Home

MDS Intrepid

1. Transmission Ratio O ME ss 100 50 0 7 50 0 Transmission Phase Normal O Shifted Figure 11 8 Site Configuration GPS Sync Unit mi be clear A 1 Setting the RFP for HSS The GSU is automatically configured as HSS Master HSM mi A Ensure that no other collocated ODU is configured as HSM Chapter 11 The 1000 and 2000 labels refer to Wireless Link and Wireless Mux radios respectively The actual annotation seen may vary but the intention should If the hub site consists only of Wireless Link units then any suitable RFP may be chosen If there are one or more Wireless Mux units you must use RFP B or E The permitted RFPs are also dependent on channel bandwidth and are color coded as follows You May use RFP Channel Bandwidth combinations with this color Wireless Link User Manual For these collocated radios Wireless Link only Wireless Mux only Wireless Link and Wireless Mux together None unavailable Release 1 9 30 11 8 Configuring the GSU Chapter 11 There is a further restriction If there are two distributed sites transmit ting to each other they must both use the same RFP This requirement together with use of shifted transmission phase item 3 below ensures that communicating distributed sites to not interfere with each other by transmitting simultaneously Two GSU managed sites transmitting with shifted transmission phase and using the s
2. Figure 3 6 IDU C Package contents the IDU C 4 E1 T1 ports 3 AS Figure 3 7 IDU C Package contents the mounting kit and DC power plugs PoE 8 Package Containing Figure 3 8 PoE 8 Unit e PoE 8 e 110 240 VAC with IEC 60320 socket cable e 3 prong terminal block connector green e 19 mounting kit External Antenna Package Contents e Antenna e RF cable 1m 3 long two cables supplied with bipolar antennas single cable supplied with monopolar antennas e Mounting kit 1 The IDU C is available with 0 4 8 or 16 TDM ports Wireless Link supports 0 or 4 TDM ports Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 5 Additional Tools and Materials Required Chapter 3 Additional Tools and Materials Required The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install Wireless Link hardware Tools and Materials Crimping tool for RJ 45 if the ODU IDU cable is without connectors Spanner wrench 13 mm 127 Drill for wall mounting only Cable ties Sealing material Cables and connectors ODU grounding cable 12AWG IDU grounding cable 18AWG ODU IDU cable outdoor class CAT 5e 4 twisted pairs 24AWG For PoE based links A crossed Ethernet LAN cable O PoE 10AWG grounding cable if applicable BDU grounding cable 18AWG if applicable Hardware Installation Sequence The following steps are required to install the Wireless Link system 1 2 3 4 9 6 7 Mounting the ODUs page page 3
3. Site Location site2 Configuration Get Diagnostics Clear Counter amp Link Link 7 Location Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 820 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps SDR CEE Rt Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site Location Radio Interface IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting on Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 12 02 2009 10 25 46 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 12 02 2009 10 25 47 Connected to Location Internal 000003 12 02 2009 10 35 05 Device unreachable Internal 000004 12 02 2009 10 35 12 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Local IP Address 255 255 255 255 Figure 19 7 Main Window after IP Address change Some additional things you may want to do now E e Go o Bite Installation Air Interface You can enter a Link ID and change the Installation Frequency and Channel Bandwidth Note e If you log on as Installer you can change the default band Chapter 20 13 Click Cancel to leave the open Management dialog You may now exit the Link Manager or connect to another ODU If you choose to connect to another ODU after about a minute the main window o
4. Event Color Critical Severe Major Minor Warning Normal GJEV Info Reset Settings Background Color Events Log File File O d My Documents EventsLog txt Figure 9 17 Preferences dialog box Event tab 3 Select the event type and click on the El button A color chart opens 4 Select the required color 5 Repeat for each of the event types gt To set the message background color e Click Background Color to change the text background gt To reset the message colors e Click Reset Settings to return to the default color settings Saving the Events Log You can save recorded events in an Events Log text file New alarms are automatically added to the text file as they enter the Events Log Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 17 Active Alarms Chapter 9 Active Alarms Upon setting a trap destination applicable events are reported as active alarms to the user The active alarms are saved and can be viewed in the Active Alarms window gt To view summary of saved alarms 1 From the Tools menu choose Active Alarm Summary 2 Choose either of the sites offered The Active Alarms Summary window opens 7 Active Alarms Site A File View Help E i Al Save Site X Close Device Date amp Time Description Interface LAN port 02 status changed to disconnected LAN Port 01 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 42 SFP port 01 status changed to disconnected SFP Port
5. Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Ethernet Qos Mode Primary 0 Secondary O Disabled Fart fe recond tink configured ar Seconde Figure 12 4 Services Configuration Panel Hot Standby mode selection Check the Primary button to configure Primary Link as the primary link 8 Complete the Wizard and then move to Secondary Link 9 Repeat step 7 for Secondary Link For the Services Hot Standby tab this time check the Secondary button 10 Complete the Wizard 11 At Site 1 2 reconnect the Hot Standby Patch panel to the external equipment From this point on we will simply refer to primary and secondary link no capitalized names At the end of the process the Link Manager main windows should look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 5 Installing a WBB MHS Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Link Configuration Link Installation Site 1 2 Site 1 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters gt Link Link Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Location Radio Interface IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask SG 20 Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Trap Destination 10 105 1 21 a y ES a EE PA IP ddress 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Ev
6. wbbOduSrvBridging 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 3 Li Bridging Mode Valid values are disabled 0 enabled 1 wbbOduSrvRingLinkMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 1 Mode of the link regarding ring topology wbbOduSrvRingT opologySupported 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 2 hee ba Ring Topology options are supported not supported wbbOduSrvRingVlanldTable ee a NA Ring VLAN IDs table VLAN IDs table wbbOduSrvRingVlanldEntry N A VLAN ID erent e the internal ring messages Valid values are 1 to 4094 Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware INDEX wbbOduSrvRingVlanldIndex wbbOduSrvRingVlanidindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 3 1 1 Integer RO Index of VLAN ID of the internal ring messages wbbOduSrvRingVlanld 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 3 1 2 Integer RW VLAN ID of the internal ring messages Valid values are 1 to 4094 Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware wbbOduSrvRingEthStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 4 Represents the Ethernet service blocking state of a Rings link wbbOduSrvRingMaxAllowedTimeFromLastRp 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 5 nd RW Defines the minimal time in ms required for m determination of ring Be wbbOduSrvRingWTR 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 4 6 Defines the minimal time in ms required for ring recovery Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 7 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 3 of 18 i ne wbbOduSrvQoSMode Mode of QoS f
7. Changing the Link Password This item is only available when the link is down Otherwise it works the same way as the corresponding item on page 5 8 Link Manager Community Strings The ODU communicates with the Link Manager using SNMPv1 protocol The protocol defines three types of communities e Read Only for retrieving information from the ODU e Read Write to configure and control the ODU e Trap used by the ODU to issue traps The Community string must be entered at log on The user must know the password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system A user may have read only privileges It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read write or the read Commu nity values are forgotten A new Community value may be obtained from WBB Customer Support for the purpose of setting new Community You must also have available the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU The read write Community strings and read only Community strings have a minimum of five alphanumeric characters bru1 and bru4097 are not per mitted Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking the check box Editing Community Strings The Community change dialog box is available from the Configuration Security tab Both read write and read only communities must be defined On logging on for the first time use the following as the current Commu nity e For Read Write Community use netman e For Read Only Community us
8. IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting om Channel 5 280 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 16 03 2009 11 25 22 Location Site will be reset Internal 000002 16 03 2009 11 25 28 Device unreachable Internal 000003 16 03 2009 11 26 05 Connected to Location Internal S amp connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 1 101 Figure 20 6 Main Window after band change new band circled E If you carry out this operation on a link the band is effective on both sites F gt and you are placed in installation mode ote Changing Band for DFS Changing to a DFS band is similar to the foregoing procedure As soon as you establish a link using a DFS band you are offered Configura tion only in the main menu Installation mode is disabled Special Products or Features Entering a License Key If you go to the Operations window as Installer Figure 20 7 you will see a provision for entering a license key Should you ever require such a key the procedure is as follows gt To enter a License key 1 Log on as Installer as for the previous procedure 2 Click the Site Location tool bar button from the main tool bar Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 20 5 Special Products or Features Entering a License Key Chapter 20 Site Configuration File Actions Help TE Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off if I
9. License Key for multiple band activation and regulation change gt Public License Key site available Key Applications WBB Wireless Link systems are ideally suited to meet the needs of cellular carriers service providers and private networks such as private and public enterprises government educational and financial institutions The Wireless Link systems power a range of applications among them e Cellular a amp haul e Broadband c ess e Video Surveillance e Private Network Connectivity Cellular Backhaul Wireless Link products enable cellular carriers to expand their networks in both urban and rural areas quickly and cost effectively Wireless Link systems are ideally suited for a broad range of cellular back haul deployment scenarios they empower carriers to expand their presence into remote and low ARPU areas provide enhanced overlay coverage in urban spots and can serve as a temporary or backup backhaul solution Figure 1 1 Typical Cellular Backhaul application Broadband Access With Wireless Link service providers can expand their service footprint rap idly and affordably and provide high capacity services that match the ever growing demand for high quality high speed broadband Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 2 Video Surveillance Chapter 1 Figure 1 3 Typical WiFi Backhaul Application Video Surveillance The Wireless Link wireless broadband system allows organizations and system
10. Table A 19 Interfaces Ethernet LAN interface type RJ 45 10 100BaseT Interface Line Impedance 100Q ODU PoE Port RJ 45 connector Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 5 PoE Device Outdoor DC Appendix A Table A 20 Mechanical ee ee eee Jable A 21 Environmental Operating Temperatures 0 C 40 C Table A 22 Safety TUV GS IEC EN 60950 Table A 23 EMC gt Ju m fee CO amp fue am fem mm fremamsemmuem OOOO FCC part 15 class B CISPR Pub 22 class B PoE Device Outdoor DC Table A 24 Electrical Input voltage range 20 to 60 VDC single input Output voltage 48VDC 0 6A Power Consumption 0 5W not including radio Differential 15KW Common 3KW Protections Table A 25 Interfaces Ethernet LAN interface type RJ 45 10 100BaseT Interface Line Impedance 100Q cima EC connector O ns Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 6 GSU Appendix A Table A 26 Mechanical Table A 27 Environmental Operating Temperatures 35 C 60 C 31 F 140 F Humidity Up to 100 non condensing Standards IEC 60721 3 4 Class 4M5 IP67 Table A 28 Safety Designed to meet these standards FCC IEC CAN CSA 60950 1 60950 22 Table A 29 EMC Designed to meet these standards GSU Table A 30 Configuration Architecture Outdoor Unit Connectorized for External GPS Antenna GSU to PoE Interface Outdoor CAT 5e cable Maxi
11. The System dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 3 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard System Fill in the attribute Fields below Link ID EBG 20561534 Link Mame TPSF_BTT Sitel Site Link Password TTTLTTLTITTTTT LTTE Change Da Monitor Link A Radio Interface RSS dBm ETBE Figure 7 2 Contiguration Wizard System dialog box The System attributes may be edited and the Link Password may be changed exactly as in the corresponding Link Installation step on page 5 5 Click Next to continue Step 3 Channel Settings Configuring the Channel Settings follows the same pattern as the Installa tion procedure Notice that you can change the channel bandwidth but it will of cause a re synchronization Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 4 Configuration Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz 5 780 Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 5 755 5 760 5 769 5 705 5 800 5 740 5 745 5 77 D fo 5 790 5 605 5 Fai 5 795 5 610 m 5 750 Reselect Channel Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Chapter 7 2 012 5 620 5 025 Figure 7 3 Channel Settings dialog box Automatic Channel Selection Notice that the operating channel is graye
12. The units are connected to each other with HSS cables and HSS Distribution Units One of the radios in the site is defined as HSS Master and generates syn chronization pulses The other collocated radios in the site the HSS Clients are connected to the HSS Master and synchronize their transmission to the pulses An HSS Client can be configured to work in one of two modes Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 2 Hardware Installation Chapter 10 e HSS Client Continue Transmission HSC CT If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master the link remains active How ever without synchronization pulses it is possible that this unit will cause interference e HSS Client Disable Transmission HSC DT If the unit loses synchronization with the HSS Master the link is dropped until the synchronization pulses resume This setting prevents the unit from causing interference The remote ODUs that are not located at the hub site are called Indepen dent Units E Wireless Link radios used as independent units do not require HSS hardware ote Hardware Installation Connecting an HSS Unit A single HSS unit supports up to ten collocated ODUs In addition to each unit being connected to its IDU or PoE device the collocated unit has an additional cable that is connected to the HSS Unit The HSS Unit is a com pact weatherproof IP67 connector box that is installed on the same mast as the ODUS All collocated units
13. Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 6 Appendix H Old Style IDU E Details The IDU E is a compact half 19 inch wide 1U plastic unit providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1 T1 interfaces It is a low cost unit intended for Access applications and Enterprise use Figure H 2 Typical IDU E Rear Panel The IDU E is also available with a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port on the rear panel Figure H 3 IDU E AL with Alarms port Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 H 1 ACS aging time ODU Bridge Mode AIND Aligning the antenna Configuring the Link Equipment Setup Evaluating the Link AIND Alignment Air Interface Technical Specifications general Alarms Active summary Connector External specification Alignment AIND Antennas Align with beeper Aligning Buzzer signals Cable grounding Connecting External Mounting Package Contents External Mounting Flat panel Parabolic Dish Applications Broadband Access Cellular Backhaul Private Networks Backup backup ODU replacement Backup and restore software ODU Band and DFS Changing defaults Beeper mute Wireless Link User Manual 5 7 8 26 8 16 22 2 22 3 22 2 22 3 22 2 1 15 A 1 9 18 B 3 E 1 22 2 3 14 3 14 3 15 18 1 3 14 3 8 3 5 17 3 1 14 1 14 9 1 2 1 4 9 21 8 24 20 5 20 1 20 3 8 25 Index muting and restoring 8 2 restore 8 25 Bridge mode Tel
14. e Use the backup configuration If a backup of the configuration is available restore that configuration using Site A Restore Recall that backup files are linked to a MAC address This won t work for an identical replacement ODU e Manual configuration The new ODU can be configured manually according to the link configuration Remember to use the same settings for Link ID channels link password IP addresses and names Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 21 Restoring Factory Setup Chapter 9 Restoring Factory Setup gt To restore factory setup e Use Site Configuration A or B and then Operations Restore Defaults Always restore the over the air site B first Online Help Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main window of the Link Manager Customer Support Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR Inte grator or distributor from whom it was purchased For further information please contact the distributor nearest to you for assistance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 22 Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 2 Site Synchronization Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization What is Hub Site Synchronization mi Q When several units are collocated at a common hub site interference may occur from one unit to another WBB ODU units support the collocation of more than two unit
15. 4 90 5 10 GHz po External Dish 2768 Integrated Flat panel MA E noe ne 3 ft fe fe fm fe fa TT fem fom ee fa 4 4 90 5 00 GHz 5 00 GHz 4 94 6 00 GHz 4 90 5 35 GHz 5 150 5 350 GHz 5 470 5725 GHZ Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 8 Antenna Characteristics Appendix A Table A 36 Antenna Continued Frequency bands bands Frequency Beam T 5 15 6 00 GHz External Flat panel E 32 0 4ft mom 5dBi 5 725 5 850 GHz y External Dish 29dBi Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 9 Wiring Specifications ODU IDU Cable The ODU IDU cable is shielded outdoor class CAT 5e 4 twisted pair 24 AWG terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends A cable gland on the ODU side provides hermetic sealing The following table shows the connector pinout Table B 1 ODU IDU RJ 45 Connector Pinout Function Colo IDU ODU amme ome oc e o pwo oom ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Table B 2 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Green Not connected White Orange CEE CC fr Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 B 1 User Port Connectors Appendix B Table B 2 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Continued White Brown User Port Connectors LAN Port The LAN 10 100BaseT interface terminates in an 8 pin RJ 45 connector wired in accordance to Table B 3 Table B 3 Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout ee Monte Ma aie ht Mel nl eg OG LAN Port for PoE 8 When
16. Auto Detect No Action v LAN 2 Disconnected Auto Detect VLAN Configuration v No Action v Information Rate Maximum Kbps Best Effort Best Effort Apply Figure 8 17 Ethernet MIR Throughput selection 4 Choose Other to define the throughput with 1 Kbps resolution 5 Choose Best Effort for the highest information rate possible for the link conditions and settings 6 Click Apply to save the changes Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 20 TDM MHS Status Chapter 8 TDM MHS Status Here you can see the TDM MHS status There is nothing to set Site Configuration A File Actions Help gt v Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System TDM Services Q Air Interface Hoen 23 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security D Date amp Time e Advanced Ethernet Mode TDM Services External Alarms I Operations Figure 8 18 TDM MHS status Setting External Alarm Inputs The IDU C IDU R IDU E AL and the new style IDU E have four external alarm inputs and four external alarm outputs in the form of dry contact relays The Alarm interface is located on the front panel of the IDU C and is a 25 pin D type female connector See Appendix B for wiring specifica tions and pinout You may enable or disable each of the alarms and config ure the alarm description text appearing in the alarm trap message The ODU sends the
17. MDS Intrepid av Jon D Y Wireless Broadband Link Version 1 9 3 MDS 05 4572A02 Rev D JANUARY 2011 Digital Energy MDS Note This document contains information that is proprietary to GE MDS No part of this publication may be reproduced modified or distributed without prior written authorization of GE MDS LLC This document is provided as is without warranty of any kind Statement of Conditions The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice GE MDS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this document or equipment supplied with it Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment Copyright 2011 by GE MDS LLC All rights reserved Regulatory Compliance General Note This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and in these bands the system can be used provided it does not cause interference FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digita
18. Mo Ser Ethemet Ethernet TDM Ho Serw Ethernet Ethernet TOM Figure 5 3 Installation Wizard System dialog box filled out 5 Click Next The default link with a rate of 6 5 Mbps is evaluated The Channel Setting dialog box appears Proceed to Channel Settings below Changing the Link Password The default password is wireless bridge Optionally you can change the link password as explained here gt To change the link password 1 Click the Change button in the System dialog box The Change Link Password dialog box opens lim Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security Note Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 5 Installation Chapter 5 Change Link Password Enter current Link Password Hew Confirm Hide characters Figure 5 4 Change Link Password dialog box 2 Enter the current link password The default link password for a new ODU is wireless bridge If you have forgotten the Link Password click the Forgotten Link Pass word button The following window is displayed Alternative Link Password Alternative Link Password The Alternative Link Password is supplied with the product It may also be obtained via Customer Support Please have the unit s Serial Number andfor MAC Address ready when requesting an Alternative Link Password Enter the Alternative Link Password Figure 5 5 Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery Follow the instructions to
19. Read Only to connect in Read Only mode Switch to connect to the local device instead of the remote one Cancel to abort this operation C In the future do not show this warning Continue Read Only Figure 4 8 Logging on to an over the air site Continuing without an IP Address The Link Manager provides limited offline functionality when there is no accessible IDU ODU It is primarily for setting managing computer related parameters running the Link Budget Calculator or viewing online Help The offline functionality is shown in Table 4 3 below The table does not show menu items grayed out Table 4 3 Link Manager Offline Functionality Return to log on dialog Same as Log Off button pa Exit the Link Manager Same as Exit button Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 7 Changing the Log On Password Chapter 4 Table 4 3 Link Manager Offline Functionality Continued Change Clear local events log Save to File Save events log data to a file Set managing computer preferences Get Diagnostics Information About Link Manager Changing the Log On Password Obtain system information Link Manager build information Link Manager View online help version of the User Manual Help Link Budget Calculator opened in default browser Calculator gt To change the log on password 1 From the Tools menu select Change Password The Change Password dialog box appears 2 Enter the current pass
20. The Configuration dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 19 Setting the Maximum Information Rate MIR Site Configuration A File Actions Help Chapter 8 ri 3 Restore Backup System Q ir Interface 23 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced Ethernet TDM Services iY External Alarms I Operations Refresh Installation Mode Buzzer Off Bridge Configuration ODU Mode Bridge IDU Aging Time sec Ethernet Ports Configuration Pot Curent Mode l Radio Link Failure Action ODU 100Mbps Ful Duplex Auto Detect v No Action ivi LAN2 Disconnected Auto Detect No Action v VLAN Configuration Information Rate Maximum Kbps Best Effort Figure 8 16 Bridge Configuration Site Configuration dialog box 3 In the Information Rate pane use the drop down menu to choose the MIR Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti 3 Restore Backup System Q ir Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services W External Alarms I Operations B Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode Bridge Configuration ODU Mode Bridge IDU Aging Time sec Ethernet Ports Configuration Part Mode oou 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect No Action LAN 100Mbps Full Duplex
21. There are three user types e An Observer has read only access to the link An Observer can monitor the link generate reports but may not change any link parameters e An Operator can install and configure the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 4 The Link Manager log on Concept Chapter 4 e An Installer can in addition to functioning as an Operator also change the operating band The latter function has legal ramifica tions requiring familiarity with local regulations The following table summarizes these options Table 4 2 User types default passwords and function Operator admin nerve ny Read Write netman configuration wireless D pe Read Write netman set band The Network Manager should change the default passwords as soon as pos sible gt Continuing the log on procedure 5 Type an IP address for the ODU if you connect through a LAN or click Local Connection if you are connected directly to the IDU port e If you log on using Local Connection but your physical connection is not local i e anything other than a direct connection between the managing computer and the IDU then any configuration you carry out may affect other links in the network Do not do this 4 Use Local Connection only if the managing computer is connected directly to the IDU or PoE device and isolated From any other network equipment Warning e Network log on IP address to the ODU is recommended
22. 1 16 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3 6 Connecting user equipment Documentation set Hardware Installation External Antennas Release1 9 30 3 14 1 16 3 8 Index 4 Indoor 3 9 Lightning protection 3 8 Mounting U 3 10 ODU 3 7 Outdoor 3 7 Outdoor connections 3 9 Sequence 3 6 Package Contents 3 3 IDU 3 4 ODU 3 3 Package contents External Antennas 3 5 Regional Notice French Canadian G 1 Replacing an ODU 9 21 S Safety Practices iii iv 3 1 Grounding 3 1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy 3 1 Security Link Lock 8 11 Selecting channel 5 7 SFP device C 1 support described C 1 Site Configuration Backup Files backup to 8 24 Backup files restore from 8 24 Configuration with Telnet 8 25 Dialog Ethernet Properties 8 15 Configuring Bridge 8 15 Maximum information rate 8 19 Ports Mode 8 17 Ethernet PropertiesIDU Aging time 8 16 Functions 8 2 Inventory 8 8 Menu bar 8 2 Setting the date and time 8 13 View Air Iinterface details 8 3 VLAN Settings 8 6 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID 8 8 Priority number 8 7 VLAN ID 8 7 External Alarm Inputs 8 21 Reset site 8 22 Reset site to factory defaults 8 22 Reset site preserve current configuration 8 22 Security Features 8 9 Community Strings 8 10 Wireless Link User Manual Editing 8 10 Forgotten paswwords 8 11 Initial log on defaults 8 10 Default Gateway 8 6 IP address 8 6 8 6 Trap Destination 8 6 Software Upgarde Multiple sites 15 3 Single Site 15 2 Soft
23. EBG 20561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active A IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Maeceann Message Connected to Location Figure 7 12 Main window of the manager after configuration Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 11 Chapter 8 Site Configuration The Site Configuration dialog panels are used to configure parameters which may differ between both sides of the link The parameters configured using the Site Configuration dialog panels include among others System settings Air interface Transmit Tx powerHub Site Synchronization status Network management including VLAN Inventory link hardware and software model details Security settings Date and time Ethernet service settings TDM Hot Standby status External alarms settings Operations Revert to factory settings The Operations dialog offers a doorway to jump into installation mode The Site Configuration dialog has its own main menu with the following extra functionality Backup DO oftware Restore ODU software or configuration from a backup file Refresh the current panel Enable disable the site ODU buzzer Jump back into installation
24. Encrypted Link Figure 12 12 Secondary Link operating after the switch back to Primary System Operation description Normal operation Switching to backup Backup operation Switching back to primary TDM services are carried by the primary link The secondary link equipment and air interface is operating but not carrying user traffic TDM ports on the secondary IDUs are tri state Switching to secondary will occur in the following cases Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss e Loss of the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to acquire expected TDM data during a period of 24ms e Primary equipment power off either ODU or IDU local or remote The switching result would be e TDM ports on the primary IDUs turn to tri state e TDM ports on the secondary IDUs become active TDM services are carried by the secondary link Switching back to primary will occur as soon as the Primary link is fully functional for 1 second Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 14 The WBB Ethernet Ring Scope Caution What is an Chapter 13 The description of WBB Ethernet Ring in this Chapter is completely generic Both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux links may participate in an Ethernet ring VLAN IDs are used by WBB products in three separate contexts Management VLAN Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring It is recommended that you use different VLAN IDs for each context Ethernet
25. Grounding a typical wall installation The next figure shows a close up of the rear of grounded ODU ODU Ground Point HAHN MN To Antennas EN 1 U Pole Ground Point Surge Arrestor Andrew Ground Lug rear Grounding Kits ODU IDU CAT5e cable Figure 18 4 ODU Surge Suppressor and grounding Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Chapter 18 18 4 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18 The Transtector protection circuits shown in Figure 18 5 below utilize sili con avalanche diode technology The unit consists of an outdoor rated NEMA 3R type enclosure with easy mounting flanges ground stud attach ment and easy wiring The ALPU POE features RJ 45 protection circuits for the ODU IDU data pairs pins 1 2 amp 3 6 and DC power pins 4 5 amp 6 7 with the pairs bonded The unit is designed to be wall mounted An optional set of bracket is avail able to allow a wide range of pole mount applications A dedicated ground stud is provided inside the unit that must be bonded to the nearest ground ing system or Master Ground bar for proper surge protection The system wiring is installed with RJ 45 type connectors that can feed directly into the chassis without having to cut splice or route through awk ward strain relief holes Figure 18 5 Transtector Surge Suppressor gt To mount the lightning protection devices 1 Mount the device as close to the ODU as possible M
26. Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory R Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced ak Ethernet Configure Operational States Enabled Operational State Hub Syne Master Radio Frame Pattern RFP Configuration Channel Bandwidth MHz TDM Services 20 40 ye External Alarms TDM Eth I Operations Fit Fit Best Best Use Wizard for configuration changes Figure 10 15 Site Configuration HSS Left Wireless Link client Right Wireless Mux master For Wireless Link units without HSS support Figure 10 16 is displayed instead of Figure 10 15 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 15 Apply Site Configuration and HSS Site Configuration A E o pi Buzzer Uff Installation Mode ES System Hub Site Syne Q Air Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory R Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet TDM Services X External Alarms I Operations Figure 10 16 HSS Not Supported Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Chapter 10 10 16 Chapter 11 Using the WBB GSU What is it for The GPS based synchronization unit GSU is designed to handle inter site interferences under large scale deployment scenarios The GSU is an outdoor unit consisting of a standard Wireless Link enclosure a GPS antenna and a PoE device The GSU is connected to the HSS Unit using a standard HSS cable It syn chronizes the transmission timin
27. RE EE 9 22 MEN NN 9 22 Bio PER REE ERE 9 22 Part 2 Site Synchronization Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization NAIL AUD Ste SN NNN ane 10 1 Hardware TSA AU ON Een 10 3 NNN me eee os Ten ree 10 3 BEE A GE eT ee TTT a ee te ee 10 4 Using More tan One ASS UNI EE 10 5 Condition 1 Cabling SQQUENCE csccscerseestenesrencescenetenseeersuearsuestoneassesenents 10 5 Condition Tol HSS Cable Lent ass s same einen 10 6 Foe Fror GE 5 ae ae E oi in en 10 7 ODU HSS Unit Connection PINOUL 2 288 uclnes canne nssoesedaanes mascara aeeetduencdatan 10 7 FINN 10 7 DO gr EE AR ME NE E E 10 7 RFP and DE EEE EEE MR NR NM 10 8 RFP General Radio Frame Pattern xrvarrrurnnnnnnrnnnnnnenennnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnenener 10 9 RFP Wireless Mux Considerations insu s cas vide biav era s nn ananter sion dinioitu sun 10 9 RFP Wireless Link Considerations veccecececcccceecceeceeueeeeeueceeeeeeeusneneeraneneeranenes 10 12 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 HSS Status LED on the IDU C and New Style IDU E 10 13 Hen adel AON and PES anciens 10 13 Ste Connguraton ee 10 15 Chapter 11 Using the WBB GSU IEE EE E EEEE E E EE EA 11 1 VNR 11 1 TN NNN E terete te terre eer ee ee ere 11 1 Independent Distributed Sites vrrrranrnrnnvnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennener 11 1 Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication x rrrrsrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnennnnnn 11 2 Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission secvevecevev
28. Setting this parameter to Value that is bigger than the activated TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation process for 30 seconds Setting this parameter to 0 will stop the evaluation process immediately wbblduTdmBackupAvailableLinks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 11 Number of TDM backup trunks wbblduTdmBackupTable NA 0900 N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table wbblduTdmBackupEntry N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry INDEX wbblduTdmBackupindex wbblduTdmBackupindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 1 Integer RO Table index wbblduTdmBackupMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 2 Integer RW TDM backup mode Enable or Disable where the main link is the air link or the external link Changes will be effective immediatly wbblduTdmBackupCurrentActiveLink 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 12 1 3 Integer TDM backup current active link N A air link is active or external link is active wbbliduT dmJitterBufferSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 13 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmJitterBufferDefaultSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 14 LS TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmJitterBufferMinSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 15 Integer TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size The units are 0 1 X millisecond wbbliduTdmJitterBufferMaxSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 16 ms e TDM Jitter Buffer M
29. Simple Installation Wireless Link systems are extremely simple to install and maintain and are typically up and running in less than an hour gt Advanced Air Interface Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 4 Key Features of Wireless Link Chapter 1 gt gt gt gt The Wireless Link system design incorporates an exceptionally robust air interface based on patented technologies The unique air interface protocol of Wireless Link is designed to ensure non stop high quality transmission even when encountering interference and harsh conditions Automatic Adaptive Rate Automatic Adaptive Rate is a method of dynamically adapting the transmitted rate by changing both the signal modulation and coding Automatic Adaptive rate optimizes the data throughput according to interference conditions to optimize data throughput while maintain ing service quality Unique Multi Point to Point Deployment WBB Wireless Link products can be installed in a unique multi point to point architecture Multiple units are deployed in one hub site location from where they provide a dedicated high capacity connection to each remote site This unique concept builds on WBB Hub Site Synchronization HSS feature which synchronizes the transmission of collocated Wireless Link and Wireless Mux units thus virtually reducing mutual interfer ence commonly experienced with collocated TDD radios HSS Interoperability between Wirele
30. Transparent Transparent VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN Priority Transparent Transparent VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN Priority Provider parameters are common fo al ports Provider parameters VLAN ID VLANP ait Figure 14 3 VLAN tag settings If you are using a new style IDU E the SFP row will not appear The choices for Ingress Mode are Ingress Mode VLAN Priority Figure 14 4 VLAN Ingress modes The two choices correspond respectively to the two rows of Table 14 1 Choosing Tag causes the VLAN ID and VLAN Priority fields to become avail able Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 8 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration Chapter 14 Ingress Mode C VLAN ID VLAN Priority 0 Figure 14 5 VLAN Ingress mode setting VLAN ID and Priority Throughout this chapter all VLAN IDs must be between 1 and 4094 inclusive All VLAN priorities must be between 0 and 6 inclusive The values entered are range checked If for example you enter a VLAN ID of 4095 ote then 4094 will be reflected back The choices for Egress Mode are Egress Mode Transparent g Untag selected WYLAN IDs Provider tagging Provider tagging without filter Filtered YLAN IDs Figure 14 6 VLAN Egress modes The five non transpatarent choices correspond respectively to
31. e If you log on via an over the air IP address you will receive a warn ing If you reset the site to which you are connected to factory set tings you can lock yourself out of the link e If you log on using Local Connection through a PoE device you will need to connect it to the managing computer using a crossed Ether net cable E e The default IP address for the ODU is 10 0 0 120 The subnet mask is ne 255 0 0 0 Note e The actual IP address is defined during link configuration see Site Management IP Address VLAN and Protocol on page 8 7 See also 19 6 If your User Type is not Operator then choose it now Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 5 Log on Errors and Cautions Chapter 4 7 Enter the password 8 If you are a user with Read Write permission click Options to enter the Community options if required 9 For initial log on e Leave the default Community passwords netman for read write and public for read only e If Community values were previously defined enter them under Community in the Read Only or Read Write boxes e If you are a user with read only permission then you may only log on as Observer The Link Manager main window is displayed see Figure 4 9 Log on Errors and Cautions Unsupported Device Attempting to connect to an unsupported device on an otherwise valid IP address for example a LAN printer will result in the following error mes sage Device unreachable Unsu
32. from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh1 Exceed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 3 Gauge Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh2Exceed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 4 Gauge Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMinT SL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 5 Integer Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMaxT SL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 6 Integer Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrlT SLThresh1 Exceed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 7 Gauge Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThresh1Exceed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 8 Gauge Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15 minutes wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonaAirintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonairintervalldx wbbOduPerfMonAirIntervalldx This table is indexed per interval number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMinRSL Current Min Received Lev
33. probingChannel 12 normal Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Monitoring for radar activity on channel n GHz n is the channel frequency in GHz radarDetected normal Indicates that radar activity was detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radar activity was detected in S on channel n GHz s Is the site name n Is the channel frequency in GHz normal Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Transmitting on channel n GHz n Is the channel frequency in GHz transmittingOnChannel Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Channel scanning in progress scanningChannels normal Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link installation is required in order to fix it Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Configuration problem detected Link installation required Indicates that the ODU time clock was set Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description The time was set to p p Is the date and time timeClockSet normal Indicates that the ODU recovered from an error but there are configuration changes Contains two parameters 1 Description Configuration changed Erro
34. 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 4 10 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation old style IDU E Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 9 First steps Mp X Q I S No te Chapter 4 A detailed field by field description of the contents of the Lirk Manager main window may be found in 6 The procedure required to make the link functional has three phases 1 Link Installation which we will detail below Installation actually gets the link operational by setting the link parame ters It uses a fixed channel at the lowest possible modulation BPSK at 6 5Mbps and will work under the harsh interference condition During the installation procedure the definition of all parameters is automatically applied to both sides of the link The ODUs as supplied by WBB are set up with a factory default band If for some reason the default band needs to be changed it should be done before link Installation The procedure is set out in 20 e Use of an incorrect band may be in violation of local regulations 2 Link Configuration described in 7 Configuration provides much the same functionality as Installation but for a running link A fallback to Installation mode is provided for situa tions which cann
35. 1 16 Basic PoE device showing the radio Ethernet port Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 11 GSU Chapter 1 Outdoor Ruggedized DC PoE Device Poi This unit may be used with both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux radios Ww ye Figure 1 17 Ruggedized DC PoE Device Input is 20 to 60 VDC single input Outdoor PoE Device OPoE The OPoE is similar to the PoE device with weatherproof cas ing and sealed connectors that enables outdoor connectivity a special mounting kit is supplied for attachment to a mast This unit can only be used with Wireless Link radios Figure 1 18 O PoE device Input is mains AC power PoE 8 The PoE 8 is a 19 inch 1U metal unit providing 8 Ethernet ports enabling connection to collocated Ethernet applications The PoE 8 interfaces with Wireless Link ODU units to provide high quality network connectivity and power SEER BEER a w as Figure 1 19 PoE 8 Unit The PoE 8 can only be used with Wireless Link radios GSU The GPS based synchronization unit GSU is designed to handle inter site interferences under large scale deployment scenarios The GSU is an outdoor unit consisting of a standard Wireless Link enclosure a GPS antenna and a PoE device Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 12 Antennas Chapter 1 The GSU is connected to the HSS Unit using a standard HSS cable It syn chronizes the transmission timing of multiple Hub Sites to the same clock source th
36. 1 3 6 14129612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDetectionTi mestamp 14 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelAvailable 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 15 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 ss Fe ODU Spectrum Channel index NE ODU Spectrum Channel frequency in MHz me S Integer Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna including 2 neighbor frequencies Integer Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna B including 2 neighbor frequencies Integer Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna over all dwells Integer Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna B over all dwells Integer Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna A over all dwells Integer Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm of Antenna B over all dwells ere TimeTicks Last CAC performed timestamp in hundredths of a second since device up time If no CAC has performed on the channel the return value will be O ell po pew TimeTicks Last Radar Detection timestamp in hundredths of a second since device up time If no Radar has detected on the channel the return value will be 0 D 13 MIB Parameters Appendix D mo ne wbbOduAirAntConfAndRatesStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 57 Integer Description Antenna configuration and Rates status 1 Single antenna with single data stream 2 Dual antenna with single data stream 3 Dual antenna with dual dat
37. 102 Integer RO ODU bridge configuration mode wbbOduAirFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 1 Integer RW Installation Center Frequency Valid values are product dependent A change is effective after link re synchronization wbbOduAirDesiredRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 2 Integer RW Deprecated parameter actual behavior is read only Required Air Rate For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively wbbOduAirSSID 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 8 MIB Parameters Appendix D I a wbbOduAirTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation The min and max values are product specific A change is effective immediately wbbOduAirSesState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 5 mu hel Link State The value is active 3 during hel operation wbbOduAirMstrSlv 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 6 Mi This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave The value is undefined if there is no link wbbOduAirResync 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process wbbOduAirRxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 1 RO Received Signal Strength in dBm wbb
38. 3 Internal ESD Protection circuits SSG 18 7 Chapter 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Why is NN NN 19 1 R CUP RER en do 19 1 MINN 19 2 Tip How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address rrararnrrnrnnnernrnennrnnnnrnnnnene 19 6 Chapter 20 Changing the Factory Default Band VIENNE 20 1 FEE 20 1 The po eoU ae aa een me a er ie 20 1 CS eae je IL SE RE EE 20 5 Special Products or Features Entering a License Key rrarnrvarnrnnrnrnernrnnvnrnsnn 20 5 Chapter 21 Link Budget Calculator ST EEE EE a eat 21 1 EL EE EEE 21 1 Link Budget Calculator Internal Data sisi issniunisnsseresatonsassintsnsaeusnantasesasesanes 21 1 O NG 21 2 Frk 21 2 Expected RSS and Fade Margin iden 21 2 Mirand POX RINGE ERE EEE AERA 21 2 Ne 21 2 NN 21 2 Antenna Hed EEE EE EE PE Ei 21 3 ADOUL thie gs ZONG EE 21 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XI Running the LINK Budget Calculator scccancsinsacssanvaptaasasesesscsaadanveesentrasssiiaceuiess 21 5 Part 5 Product Dependent Features Chapter 22 AIND Alignment Expected Signal Level for AIND radios Rs 22 1 Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment 22 2 Egupment SOUD NE EE EN 22 2 VNR 22 2 CONT O EE EE SE A T 22 3 BT TNA 22 3 je tlel cege e EE EE ET ue 22 3 Chapter 23 BRS Installation Procedure FUNN 23 1 EE COTES nn 23 3 Chapter 24 Cascaded Links About the WBB Cascaded Links uvaner 24 1 HINN 24 1 Chapter 25 Video Surveillance About the WBB Video Surveillance Product ss 25 1 MN 25 1 Part 6 Pro
39. 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 17 DisplayString Trap Community String This parameter is used by encrypted values Major version of the SNMP agent wbbOduAdmSnmpAgentVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 18 Integer wbbOduAdmRemoteSiteName 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 19 DisplayString Remote site name Returns the same value as sysLocation parameter of the remote site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 6 MIB Parameters Appendix D Type fi Description wbbOduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 20 Minor version of the SNMP agent Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 2 of 18 wbbOduAdmLinkPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 21 Display String Link Password This parameter always returns when retrieving its value It is used by the kkkkk Manager application to change the Link Password The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduAdmSiteLinkPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 22 DisplayString RW Site Link Password This parameter always returns when retrieving its value Itis used by the Manager application to change the Link Password of the site The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduAdmDefaultPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 23 Integer This parameter indicates if the current Link Password is the default password wbbOduAdmConnectionType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 24 Integer This parameter indicates if the Manager application is connected to the local ODU orto the r
40. 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened ODU 000004 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm ODU 000005 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000006 3 30 2009 10 33 03 AM Compatible IDUs detected 2 2 lt iii amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure 12 6 The secondary link under normal operation To see what happens following a cut over from the primary link to the sec ondary link you need to have running two copies of the Link Manager one logged into the primary link and one logged into the secondary link Here then is the situation after a cut over to the secondary link For the primary link the following window will appear for a few seconds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 7 Installing a WBB MHS Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help E x X o 2 Link Configuration Link Installatori Site 1 2 Site 1 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters gt Link Link y Location Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive nernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Status Link Active IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 T C IRA JE iro Pr HV in ke Vor At hive Trap Destination 10 105 1 21 Ba i S
41. 32 time 3ms TTL 63 Ping statistics for 18 4 4 124 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost iHz loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 3ms Maximum 6ms Average Jms C Documents and Settings vera Figure 4 2 Pinging an uninstalled and unconfigured link Any other response from ping means that the ODU is not responding Check your Ethernet connection and that both the IDU and ODU are switched on and then try again If you do not succeed seek assistance from WBB Customer Support 3 Dismiss the command line session 4 Double click the Link Manager icon on the desktop or click Start Pro grams Link Manager Link Manager The Log on dialog box appears meee io Ii IF Address Local Connection Password OK Cancel Options gt gt Figure 4 3 First time log on window The Link Manager log on Concept The Link Manager provides three levels of access in one of two entry modes To see them click Options at any time in the Log on window Figure 4 3 above You are offered an extended log on window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 3 The Link Manager log on Concept Chapter 4 IP Address Password User Type Community Read Only Read wiite Link Manager Version 8 5 00 Build 85 16 Operator c we Installer o community Observer Fead O rly Figure 4 4 Log on window exposing the user types
42. 36 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 7 Integer RO Current operational state of the interface wbbOduEthernetlfFailAction 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 8 Failure action of the interface wbbOduEthernetNumOfPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 3 Integer RO Number of ODU network interfaces wbbOduBridgeBasePortTable NA ODU Bridge Ports table wbbOduBridgeBasePortEntry N A ODU Bridge Ports table entry INDEX wbbOduBridgeBasePortindex wbbOduBridgeBasePortindex NN ODU Bridge Port Number wbbOduBridgeBaselflndex RO Ifindex corresponding to ODU Bridge port wbbOduBridgeTpMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 101 Integer RW ODU bridge mode A change is effective after reset Valid values hubMode 0 bridgeMode 1 wbbOduBridgeTpPortTable N A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table wbbOduBridgeTpPortEntry N A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry INDEX wbbOduBridgeTpPortindex wbbOduBridgeTpPortindex RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number wbbOduBridgeTpPortinFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 3 Counter RO Number of frames received by this port wbbOduBridge TpPortOutFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 4 Counter RO Number of frames transmitted by this port wbbOduBridgeTpPortinBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 1 ss re Number of bytes received by this port 01 wbbOduBridgeT pPortOutBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4 3 1 1 sl Number of bytes transmitted by this port 0 2 wbbOduBridgeConfigMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 4 4
43. 3xE1 Ethernet 55 55 Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dBm O O mm Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Status Link Active 12 12 Estimated Throughput Mbps 7 GT O Rx Rate D o Tx Rate Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TOM Service Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 sen Estimated Time Between Errors se mn hour mene Error Blocks IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Events Log Number Date amp Time sage Trap Source 16 09 2010 14 38 58 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 9 6 Site A port 2 set to loopback gt To deactivate a loopback e Return to the situation of Figure 9 4 and click None When a loopback is deactivated the corresponding icon in Figure 9 6 reverts to its previous state like the right side of the figure Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 5 Local Line Loopback Chapter 9 Local Line Loopback A Local line loopback can be set to test the local E1 T1 port and its connec tion to local side user equipment In this mode data coming from the local user equipment is looped back to it This loopback is initiated from a man aging computer connected to the local unit
44. 49 Feet Figure 21 11 Climactic C Factor description Close In Figure 21 12 we display a map of the world showing C Factor con tours E c 0 25 Good C 1 Average M c 2 Moderate Mi c 4 Difficult Mi c Very Difficult Figure 21 12 World map showing C Factor contours 7 Choose the required services Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 12 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 Link B Link Budget Link A Link Budget Product RIGSS FCCANT M Channel RFP Frequency 20 MHz au BE 5 8 GHz Rate 9 Mbis BPSKO 75 M Tx Power 16 dBrn 4 16 Tx Antenna Gain 22 dB Rx Antenna Gain 22 dB Cable Loss o dB Fade Margin 6 dB Tx Power EIRP 38 dBm 6 3 Watt Min Range 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles Max Range 48 8 Km 30 3 Miles Expected Performance Distance Climate 488 Km v Coordinates Good C 0 25 v Expected RSS Fade Margin 81 dBm 6 dB Services Ethernet Only 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 minfyea Ethernet Only Ethernet Rate Full Duplex TAEI fnetOny Recommended antenna height 3 et 4x E1 1 T1 2x71 upd rh Lt 0 11 13 AM build 7550 Max Trunks Figure 21 13 Services selector 8 Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate B3 Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the calculated results Note The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed e Expected RSS the expected RSS that t
45. 9 17 Preferences 9 17 Jitter Buffer 5 13 saving 9 17 K Monitor log 9 8 9 8 saving 9 8 Key Features of Radio Link Performance data explained 9 11 Performance monitoring 9 8 L Performance Reports 9 9 LAN Remote Power Fail Indication 9 20 o PoE to PC cable BI Dying Gasp circuit 9 20 Port Troubleshooting 9 20 For PoE 8 B2 Installation 4 8 LBC 9 8 ODU Browser warnings 21 6 Mast and Wall el Calculations 21 2 Step 1 Start Wizard 5 3 Climactic C Factors 21 11 Step 2 System Parameters 5 3 described 21 1 Step 3 Channel Settings 5 7 Fresnel Zone described pales Step 5 Hub SiteSynchronization Settings Internal data 21 1 5 9 Running 21 5 Step 6 Services 5 9 User input 21 1 Step 7 TDM Clock Configuration 5 16 License Key entering 20 5 Link ID 4 11 5 4 8 26 9 20 9 21 9 21 Lightning and Grounding Guidelines 18 1 Login 4 3 Link Login Errors Budget Calculator see LBC Incorrect IP Address 4 6 Configuration Incorrect password 4 7 Step 1 Start the Wizard 7 3 Unsupported Device 4 6 Step 2 System Parameters 7 3 Login showing Community Options 4 4 Step 3 Channel Settings 7 4 Login showing user types 4 4 Step 5 Hub SiteSynchronization Settings Manager Software 4 2 7 Name 54 Step 6 Services 7 8 Password 9 21 Step 7 TDM Clock Configuration 7 9 changing 5 5 Step 8 Configuration Summary and Exit Post Configuration main window 7 11 7 10 Post Installation main window 5 19 default frequency 5 7 Site names 5 4 default Settings
46. GSU Getting Started To configure the GSU you log on to it exactly as in 4 The GSU Main Window Here is the main window for GSU configuration Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 5 Configuring the GSU Chapter 11 Link Manager 192 168 222 20 Installer BK File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help u x 9 ink Configuration Link Installatior Site Location sitez Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Help F1 IP Address 192 168 222 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 GSU Monitor Time 12 41 00 Latitude 51945 0 00 N Longitude 090 0 00 E Number of Satellites Used 9 Transmission Phase Normal Tx Ratio GR Generating Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 13 07 2010 17 39 28 Connected to Location Internal gt Figure 11 6 GSU Main widow at startup The top five items in the GSU Monitor panel are taken from a satellite The transmission Phase may be Normal as shown or Shifted It purpose together with the Tx Ratio bar will be explained below The Status Box Under normal operating conditions it will be green as shown indicating that it is Synchronized with a satellite Generating Synchronization Pulse If satellite synchronization is lost then the GSU will function as an indepen dent HSM and the status box will change color Generating Synchronization Pulse The Main Menu The main menu is a subset of
47. GSU Chapter 11 Site Configuration Inventory Site Configuration Location File Help e E Backup Restore Refresh System Inve ntory GPS Sync Unit Property gt ODU B Management Det Inventory HW Version 9 SW Version 1 9 30_b1825_Jul 13 2010 Security MAC Address 00 1e 48 37 72 56 Date amp Time Serial Number See product label Le Advanced I Operations Value G55 U Figure 11 10 Site Configuration Inventory Site Configuration Security You can only change the SNMP Community stings Site Configuration Location File Help um Backup Restore Refresh System C it 22 GPS Sync Unit nds B M SNMP Communities anagement Inventory q Security D Date amp Time Oo Advanced I Operations Figure 11 11 Site Configuration Security Site Configuration Date and Time ODU Recent events alarms and traps are time stamped from the time method chosen here NTP managing computer ODU default Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 10 Configuring the GSU Chapter 11 Site Configuration Location ri EY System Date amp Time 22 GPS Sync Unit B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time Q Advanced I Operations 192 168 221 99 Figure 11 12 Setting the date and time for trap reporting Site Configuration Operations The only available action here is Restore System Defaults Site Configuration L
48. IDs Provider tagging Provider tagging without filter Filtered WLAN IDs The details of setting up VLAN tagging require advanced network manage ment skills beyond the scope of this manual Further information for the Network Manager is provided in 15 Setting the Maximum Information Rate MIR What is the MIR The maximum Ethernet throughput of the link MIR can be limited The default setting is Best Effort see Figure 8 14 above where the highest information rate available for the link conditions and settings is used What is it for The MIR setting limits the throughput for Ethernet service It does not affect the capacity of TDM services If the Link Budget Calculator or air conditions limit the capacity to X Mbps and suppose that you use Y lt X Mbps for TDM services then you are left with X Y Z Mbps for Ethernet Suppose for example that Z 20 Mbps As a Service Provider you can decide to sell a package based on 10Mbps and charge P1 for it or 15 Mbps for P2 gt P1 The MIR setting allows you do this The default value is best effort which will give Z above The minimum value is 64 Mbps S amp S The maximum value will be the minimum between Z above and ote e 18 or 22 5Mbps for Wireless Link model dependent The MIR setting is independent per direction gt To limit the Ethernet information rate 1 From the Configuration menu choose the site to reconfigure 2 Click Advanced Ethernet
49. Link Manager is shown in Table 9 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 28 Appendix E External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification The IDU E AL and PoE 8 have a dry contact alarm relay through a standard DB9 or DB25 pin female connector see page B 3 for pinout details There are two alarm types input and output The IDU C and new style IDU E support external input and output alarms through a standard DB25 pin female connector see page B 3 for pinout details Input alarms The input alarms are raised by events from external equipment such as a fire warning door open or air conditioner failure They are user defined Output alarms Output alarms are generated through dry contact relays to indicate vari ous system events such as sync loss or disconnection An alarm is raised if at least one of the conditions in one of the tables below is met IDU C and new style IDU E Alarms Table E 1 IDU C E Output Alarms Description Link is down Air interface Alarm Link in installation mode Link is up or equipment alarm is ON Link authentication problem SET e Built in Test BIT error Both ODU and IDU are in operational PR No connection to the ODU state Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 E 1 IDU E AL Alarms Appendix E Table E 1 IDU C E Output Alarms Description Output 4 Power Failure at Site B Link Loss due to Power Failure at Site B Liny mae sould vo PONET AQU indicat
50. MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab When you have the alternative Community key click the Forgot Commu nity button and enter the Alternative Community key Figure 8 10 Then change the read write Community string i Alternative Community A Alternative Community The Alternative Read Write Community is supplied with the product It may also be obtained via Customer Support Please have the unit s Serial Number andfor MAC Address ready when requesting an Alternative Read Write Community Enter the Alternative Read Write Community gt Figure 8 10 Alternative Community Dialog box Link Lock Security Feature Link Lock is a part of the WBB security concept intended to meet a form of abuse encountered in the field It is designed to prevent the Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 11 Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8 situation where a remote ODU can be stolen and used as a pirate link to steal services or information The Link Lock feature actually locks the local ODU to be synchronized ONLY to specific remote ODU It is a s te oriented feature The lock can only be set from a live link It is based on MAC authentication and is site oriented and activated on a per ODU basis For example if you lock the Site B ODU to the Site A ODU you must still lock the Site A ODU to the Site B ODU to ensure complete two way locking Link Lock can only be removed when the link is uns
51. Normally Closed 6 orons oomen fe pras Toman fo amas roren 8 Dames fom fa aps roren ad 1 The figure below shows how to connect external input and output alarms e Use an external current limit resistor to limit the current at the output relays to 1 Amp Such resistor is not required if the equipment con E3 nected to the IDU supports current limiting to 1 Amp ote e The voltage of the input alarm must be within the range of 10 to 50 VDC IDLLE Alarms Connector 50 YOC Alarm Voltage Positwe Negative 50 VEK Alarm Voltage 50 YOC Alarm Valla Leger as Curent Lire Resistor eier DG Power Source eama Positive 50 VOC Alarm valage WSs 10 to Hagati Figure B 1 Example for connecting the alarm connector Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 B 4 DC Power Terminals Appendix B DC Power Terminals IDU C amp E Table B 8 Terminal Block 3 pin 48VDC DC PoE Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 B 5 Appendix C Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver IDU C SFP Support The Small Form factor Pluggable SFP transceiver is a compact hot plug gable transceiver used in communications applications The SFP transceiver technology allows almost any protocol converter imple mentation with seamless integration to a standard Ethernet switch The IDU C supports SFP transceivers to provide and support several net work applications Any standard Fast Ether
52. ODUs Antennas Chapter 3 I 5 o ANTENNA Provided that Site A detects the signal from Site B the ODU starts beep ing 20 seconds after power up and continues beeping until the ODUs are aligned and the installation is complete Verify normal operation of the IDU by the LED indications on the front panel see Table 3 2 Direct the antenna of site B in the direction of the site A This is simplified if a previous site survey has been completed and azimuths are known Make an azimuth sweep of 180 degrees with the site A ODU so that the strongest signal from site B can be detected Slowly turning the site A ODU back towards the position of Site B listen to the tone until the best signal is reached See the following figure for audible signal variations BUZZER SIGNAL BESTSOFAR BEN INCREASED i S SAME E G DECREASED lt NO AIR LINK 7 HSS MISMATCH EE Figure 3 17 Beep Sequence for antenna alignment e Three beeps and a pause is best signal so far e Two beeps and a pause is signal quality increased e One beep and pause is no change in signal e Long beep and short pause is signal quality decreased e One beep and a long pause is no air link e Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment Secure the site A ODU to the mast wall At site B adjust the ODU slowly whilst listening to the beeper sequence until the best signal is attained 8 Se
53. POES FOR THE RPLU 13 7 FIGURE 13 5 SERVICES WINDOW WITH RING SELECTED swuunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnene 13 7 FIGURE 13 6 RING OPTIONS a 13 8 FIGURE 13 7 CONFIGURING RING LAN VIDS ccccccecsecceceeeeeeeeuseueevanvansaeeeeueeeneanes 13 8 FIGURE 13 8 CONFIGURING RPL VIDS vunnanvnnvnnvnvnnvnnennennennenennennvnnennennennenennnnnennenn 13 9 FIGURE 14 1 TWO NETWORK USING THE SAME LINK WITH TAGGING cceceeeevenseeeeeenaeeanns 14 1 FIGURE 14 2 SEPARATING CLIENT DATA STREAMS USING DOUBLE TAGGING sseceeceeveeeeers 14 2 FIGURE 14 3 VLAN TAG SETTINGS iavunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnvnnene 14 8 FIGURE 14 4 VLAN INGRESS MODES iaunnennvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennennnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnennenn 14 8 FIGURE 14 5 VLAN INGRESS MODE SETTING VLAN ID AND PRIORITY ccceceeeeeeeeenes 14 9 FIGURE 14 6 VLAN EGRESS MODES iaunnannannnnennnnnennennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 14 9 FIGURE 14 7 UNTAGGING SELECTED VIDS uanvnannnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnsnnnrvnnen 14 9 FIGURE 14 8 PROVIDER PARAMETERS avaavnannannnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennsnnsnnnnnnnnnnenne 14 10 FIGURE 15 1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE UTILITY MAIN WINDOW avunvnnannnnvnnnnnennennennennennnne 15 2 FIGURE 15 2 ADD SITE OPTIONS era aan ne de ee aa 15 2 FIGURE 15 3 ADDING A SINGLE SITE FOR UPGRADE cceccecseccecseeeeeceeeneeneeneaueaeeueeneeneas 15 2 FIGURE 15 4 SINGLE SITE ADDED FOR UPGRADE sccceccecceccacsuceeusevs
54. Ring An Ethernet ring consists of several nodes connected by hops links Loops are not allowed with Ethernet therefore one hop is a Ring Protection Link RPL which blocks Ethernet traffic In the event of failure in the ring the Ring Protection Link unblocks and Ethernet traffic in the ring is restored Some terminology e Normal State all member links are functional except the RPL which is blocked e Blocked the air link is up but Ethernet traffic is not transmitted across the link The Ethernet service panel for the RPL in the Link Manager is labeled Idle e Unblocked Ethernet traffic is transmitted across the RPL The Ethernet service panel for the RPL in the Link Manager is labeled Active e Protection State a member link is broken and the RPL passes Ethernet traffic e Ring Protection Link as described above e Ring Link any member link controlled by the RPL e Independent Link not subject to ring protection Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 1 WBB Ethernet Ring Chapter 13 e Ring Protection Message RPM control message used to moni tor and control the ring RPM messages are broadcast so it is essential to prevent flooding to associate the RPL and member Ring LInks with a VLAN ID This requires in turn that equipment used in the ring either supports VLAN or can ote transparently pass through VLAN tagged packets WBB Ethernet Ring The following figure describes the RPL beh
55. Selection Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 7 5 Channel Settings without automatic channel selection Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Configuration Chapter 7 If you click the Operating Channel drop down list the following window appears Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz C Automatic Channel Selectids soc Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 7 6 Channel frequency options Selecting one of the frequencies presented returns you to the status of Figure 7 5 with the appropriate change If you choose Other the fol lowing window opens Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz 5 760 B Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 vi Automatic Channel Selection Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 7 7 Choosing an Other Operating Channel frequency Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 7 Configuration Chapter 7 The right hand drop down list showing the current Operating Channel allows you to fine tune the frequency in increments of 5MHz within a range of the operating band which in this example is 5 740 5 835GHz The Channel Bandw
56. Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TDM Service Counters Display Mode ccrnlatirz Cuirrerit Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 D SCC VJ Clirreric Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks I Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 102 TDM Ports Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 16 09 2010 14 38 58 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 8 Encrypted Link Figure 4 9 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation IDU C and new style IDU E Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help p Gr 4 Link Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics Clear Counters ih Link Link Location Location Location Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps 6 Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units amp Mbps Fos Status Installation Required A Ethernet Throughput Mbps 4 Site Location Radio Interface IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Estimated Time Between Errors ist Trunk Errors Blocks JA Site Location 2nd Trunk IP Address 192 168 2 102 Errors Blocks Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination
57. The network has to be layer 2 and support VLANs e The ring control broadcasts RPM packets Hence it is recommended to prevent these packets from propagating into the network Some of the hops are connected through non WBB links p Some of the hops are connected through WBB links with PoE devices not supporting ring functionality 0 0 4 Q Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 4 Protection Switching Chapter 13 Table 13 1 Topologies supported by WBB Ethernet Ring Continued WBB rings with shared hops N O EG o N o 0 WBB link hop can be a part of up to 4 rings The RPL cannot be a shared link The two RPLs should use different Minimum Time for Activation values to prevent duplicate action causing a loop oe Protection Switching Protection switching occurs upon failure in the ring The Ethernet service restoration time depends on the number of hops in the ring With four hops the Ethernet service is restored in less than 50 ms In single and dual homed topologies the service restoration may take longer due to the aging time of the external switches Switches that are immedi ately aware of routing changes reduce the restoration time Hardware Considerations Ethernet Ring Protection is supported by the IDU C IDU E and PoE A typical Ring Protection Link consists of an IDU C or new style IDU E a PoE and two ODUs as shown in Figure 13 2 Hence one end of the RPL and of ring co
58. User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 6 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 8 govern access by a managing computer It is not to be confused with ote Ethernet service traffic VLAN described on page 8 18 and 15 The VLAN described here is a for management purposes and is intended to gt To enable VLAN management 1 Click Configuration from the main menu 2 Choose a site to configure If you are configuring both sites choose site B first to avoid locking yourself out Choose Management Open the VLAN tab Check the Enabled box Enter a VLAN ID Its value should be between 1 and 4094 After entering the VLAN ID only packets with the specified VLAN ID are processed for management purposes by the ODU This includes all the protocols supported by the ODU ICMP SNMP TELNET and NTP The VLAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing computer Using VLAN for management traffic affects all types of man agement connections local network and over the air Dn 1 KR U 7 Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7 8 Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be the same as those of steps 6 and 7 respectively Changing this parameter causes the Link Manager to immediately disconnect To avoid inconvenience you should verify the change by ai setting the VLAN only to one ODU and only after verifying proper Caution management operation change the other ODU VLAN setting 9 Click Appl
59. Varene ts d aan ee dan esse ic 1 7 FIGURE 1 9 AIND ALL INDOOR UNIT CONNECTED TO ANTENNA ceceececceceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeens 1 9 FIGURE 1 10 NEW STYLE IDU E FRONT VIEW NOTE NEW HSS LED ON THE LEFT 1 9 FIGURE 1 11 NEW STYLE IDU E REAR PANEL suunnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 10 FIGURE 1 12 IDU R REAR PANEL cccccceeceeceecccccneeneenesneaceueeaecneeneaneaseuseueuaeugnaneas 1 10 FIGURE 1 13 BACKUP LINK FOR E1 T1 CONNECTIONS ccecececeeveveeeeeevaveesevavansteavananes 1 10 FIGURE 1 14 IDU C ETHERNET ONLY FRONT PANEL cceccceseeesearseeeeteeeeeneeeseavarararens 1 11 FIGURE 1 15 IDU C 4 E1 T1 PORTS FRONT PANEL ccscececccevevavaveuaueueeeeeenenseananasas 1 11 FIGURE 1 16 BASIC POE DEVICE SHOWING THE RADIO ETHERNET PORT svunnunnnnannnnnnnnnne 1 11 FIGURE 1 17 RUGGEDIZED DC POE DEVICE INPUT IS 20 To 60 VDC SINGLE INPUT 1 12 FIGURE 1 18 O POE DEVICE INPUT IS MAINS AC POWER ccceceeceeceeeeeveeeeneeneaneaneneeneas 1 12 FIGURE 1 19 POE 8 UNIT asassansennnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 12 FIGURE 1 20 GENERAL GSU CONFIGURATION ccececeeceeesaccaceaeeeeeeuseueevanvansaeseeeeeennanes 1 13 FIGURE 1 21 ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA SIDE AND FRONT VIEWS 1 14 FIGURE 1 22 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS FLAT PANEL runnvnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennennnnenne 1 14 FIGURE 1 23 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS PARABOLIC DISH nvanennvnnannnnvnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 1 14 FI
60. a link e Changing an individual ODU in the field e Preparing a large number of ODUs in a warehouse prior to deploy ment in the field according to a network installation plan This chapter explains how do this Required Equipment The minimal equipment required to pre load an ODU with an IP address is e Laptop computer managing computer satisfying the requirements of Table 4 1 e An installed copy of the Link Manager e A PoE device e A crossed Ethernet LAN cable e An IDU ODU cable e If you have connectorized ODUs two N type RF terminators Do not carry out this procedure using a multi homed managing computer also connected to a network It will flood the network with broadcast F packets Further it will throw any other links on the network into Installation Caution mode Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 1 The procedure Chapter 19 The procedure n The following procedure is generic to all WBB radio products What you see E3 on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the screen Note captures used to illustrate this chapter gt To Preolad an ODU with an IP address 1 Using the IDU ODU cable connect the PoE device to the ODU ensuring that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P LAN OUT 2 For connectorized ODUs screw the RF terminators into the two antenna ports A powered up ODU emits RF radiation from the antenna port or connected antenna When working with a powered up c
61. alarm within less than a second from actual alarm trigger gt To set the external alarm inputs 1 Choose External Alarms from the Site Configuration window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 21 Resetting Site Configuration A File Actions Help bed ki Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off y Installation Mode System External Alarms Q Air Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Input1 Security Input3 Input2 Clear Clear Clear D Date amp Time Input4 Clear Le Advanced a Ethernet TDM Services External Alarms I Operations External Alarm Inputs Curent Mode Disabled Disabled 2 Choose an alarm and set its mode to Enabled or Disabled 3 Enter a description of the alarms in the text field 4 Click Apply to save 5 Click OK to exit from the dialog Resetting Figure 8 19 External Alarms Configuration Chapter 8 You may reset the link preserving the current configuration or reset to fac tory defaults Resetting the link causes service disconnection p To maintain the connection between the managing computer and Caution the link first reset Site B gt To reset the link preserving current configuration 1 From Maintenance on the main window reset the remote unit 2 From Maintenance on the main window reset the local unit gt To reset to Factory Defaults 1 Choose either of the si
62. and Wireless Link units in a collocated site you must use RFP Bor E Selection of the RFP influences the capacity latency and TDM quality RFP influences capacity and latency Jitter buffer configuration can be used to set the TDM quality see Chapter 5 TDM Services selection Using the Link Budget Calculator you can see the affect of the RFP on the Ethernet throughput Wireless Mux Considerations The performance of Wireless Mux radios that operate with RFPs B or E can be seen in the Link Budget Calculator For Wireless Mux 100 series If the HSS Master works in asymmetric Tx Rx ratio then all other collocated Wireless Mux units must oper ate in the same Tx Rx ratio In this case the ratio will be fixed and not automatic adaptive Installation Configuration considerations If you are using Wireless Mux 100 master and Wireless Mux clients the Services and Rates dialog will look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 9 RFP Wireless Mux Considerations Chapter 10 r Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate From the lists below Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hat Standby Ring Ethernet O05 Services Ethernet Configure Rate Mbps Adaptive Distance Okm DO Miles Transmission Ratio 50 0 750 02 Monitor Link x Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure 10 11 Services and Rates Wireless Mux 100 master Wireless Mux clients e The circ
63. and in the evert of a connection failure automatically switches to the radio link You may choose which of the two links is the main link and which is the backup link It may be configured in cascaded links for multi hop The latter situation arises where the trunk to be backed up is longer than the range of Wireless Link Figure 24 1below shows a simple cascaded link with two hops Station A FAE E rR Station B Figure 24 1 Cascaded Link with two hops The trunk to backed up is shown as Trunk2 from IDU A to IDU B The first hop is from ODU A to ODU A The second is from ODU B to ODU B lt i If ODU A and ODU B are sited close together they may require collocation ote Installing Cascaded Links For most part installation of the links follows the standard pattern In both the Installation and Configuration Wizards there is an extra window follow ing Services selection Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 24 1 Installing Cascaded Links Link Configuration Wizard TDM Backup Service Backup Mode Functionality configuration Main Link Selection j JRE LESAN LINI G Use External Equipment Link Enable Backup Cascaded Link Chapter 24 2 2 Repeater Line 2 4 Line Repeater Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm Figure 24 2 Contiguring an IDU R in a cascaded link To backup a single hop leave Cascaded Link unchecked In a cascaded situation check it and then c
64. at the highest air rate for which this relation ship is true In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior MaxRange for a given air rate is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFade Margin Service The Ethernet and configured TDM trunks throughput is calculated according to internal product algorithms Availability The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor C fac tor Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 2 Antenna Height Chapter 21 Availability 3 1 6x10 x Cfactor x frequency gy x RequiredRange py ExpectedFade Margin x 10 Antenna Height The recommended antenna height required for line of sight is calculated as the sum the Fresnel zone height and the boresight height See About the Fresnel Zone below Using the notation of Figure 21 1 below splitting ExpectedRange into dj d the Fresnel zone height at distance d from the left hand antenna is given by 300 frequencycn x xd xd 0 6 For the most conservative setting we take the mid point between the antennas setting d d fiksa 300 KE requenc 2 which gives 0 6 x Je ak A ExpectedRange ExpectedRange 2 2 simplifying to 0 52 x PxpectedRange frequencycn The boresight clearance height is calculated 2 E tedR 2 as I ae sd EE where Ryum 6367 4425Km About the Fresn
65. between minimal TX power and maximal TX power gt set bridge lt mode 0 Bridging OF F 1 Bridging ON gt set name lt new name gt set location lt new location gt set contact lt new contact gt set ethernet lt port MNG LANI LAN2 gt lt mode AUTO 10H 10F 100H 100F DISABLE gt reboot help Command help finished OK Figure 8 23 Telnet Management window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 27 Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics The Link Manager application enables you to monitor the link as well as perform diagnostic operations such as loopback tests This chapter covers e Retrieving link information e Link compatibility issues e TDM port loopbacks e Reinstalling and realigning a link e Link Budget Calculator e Performance monitoring e Throughput checking e Events alarms and Traps e Reverting alert messages e Remote power fail indication e Troubleshooting e Replacing an ODU e Restoring to factory setup e Online help e Obtaining support Retrieving Link Information Get Diagnostics The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes all link and Manager infor mation from both sites into a text file The file information can be used for diagnostics and should be sent to WBB Customer Support to speed up assis tance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 1 Link Compatibility Chapter 9 The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored Table 9 1 Get
66. cables to ungrounded equipment e Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground More detailed guidelines are supplied in Chapter 18 Protection against Lightning The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements All of WBB outdoor units are designed with surge limiting cir cuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes WBB recom mends the use of addtional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes See Chapter 18 for detailed installation instructions of lightning protection devices General e It is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer e Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecom munication lines you should remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts e Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines e Use extreme care when working at heights e When using an AC power source for Wireless Link always use the AC power adapter supplied by WBB e Use the right tools In addition to standard tools required for any kind of ODU orantenna installation Wireless Link requires additional specific tools detailed on page 3 6 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 2 Package Contents Chapter 3 Package Contents The Wireless Link packages include the following items
67. compatible device to the IDU panel RJ 45 ports designated LAN For an IDU C see item C in Figure 3 12 above 2 Connect user E1 T1 traffic to the IDU panel RJ 45 ports designated TRUNKS For an IDU C see labeled item L in Figure 3 12 above 3 IDU C only To use the SFP Port labeled item D in Figure 3 12 above insert an SFP plug in module into the port and connect the user switch router or any other compatible device to the SFP plug in module Refer to Appendix B for connector pinouts im Do not connect two LAN ports to the same network or flooding may occur Note gt To connect user equipment to a PoE device e Connect a user switch router or any other compatible device to the PoE device RJ 45 port designated LAN IN Refer to Appendix B for connec tor pinouts Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas You perform antenna alignment using the ODU s audible tone The method is not suitable for the following models SSS CA D Af Ara Se nce Chapter 23 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Chapter 16 AIND Chapter 22 To speed up the installation time alignment of a Wireless Link system should be performed by two teams simultaneously at site and at site B gt To align the ODUs using the alignment tone 1 Verify that power is connected to the IDUs at both sites When aligning the antennas do not stand in front of a live antenna Warning Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 14 Connecting and Aligning
68. computer Advanced Choose Hub or Bridge ODU mode IDU aging time set the Ethernet ports configuration set max information rate TDM MHS status set the external alarm inputs restore factory settings set IDU detection mode Functions at the top of the dialog box Backup Save the current ODU software to a file Restore Restore an ODUSs software or configuration from a backup file created by the backup facility Refresh Refresh current panel with latest values Installation Mode Return to Installation Mode for the entire link Selecting the Mute check box before clicking the Install Mode button mutes the Beeper Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 2 Viewing System Details Chapter 8 Buzzer Mutes the alignment tone in installation mode Reactivate the beeper during alignment gt To edit the Configuration Parameters 1 Click the required site button on the main tool bar of the Link Manager OR Click Configuration from the main menu and choose a site to config ure The Configuration dialog box opens see Figure 8 1 above 2 Choose the appropriate item in the left hand list to open a dialog box 3 Click Apply to save changes In subsequent instructions we will simply say Choose a site to configure on the understanding that the foregoing procedure is implied Viewing System Details This is the first window displayed as depicted above You can edit the con tact details and site names Viewing A
69. description 1 Description HSS multiple sync sources were detected Indicates that synchronization to a proper sync pulse source was stopped Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS sync pulse Down The reason is s s Is the reason for the sync down hssSyncPulseDetectedAlarm major Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse was detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS additional sync pulse was detected tdmBackupAlarm major Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM backup alarm backup link was activated linkLockUnauthorizedRemoteODU major Indicates that the remote ODU is unauthorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Unauthorized remote ODU connection rejected linkLockUnauthorizedODU major Indicates that the ODU is unauthorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Unauthorized ODU connection rejected hotStandbyAlarm major Indicates that the hot standby secondary link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Secondary Link Is Active sfpinsertion Indicates that a device was inserted to SFP Port sfpPort1DisconnectedAlarm 127 major Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its descriptio
70. displayed in the Events Log in the lower right hand panel of the Link Manager main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 14 The Events Log Chapter 9 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help gE x Gr F Link Configuration Link Installation Site A Get Diagnostics Clear Counters D Link TPSF_BTT A i Location Link ID EBG_29561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps amp Fps Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 TDM Service Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Estimated Time Between Errors LR s min o Error Blocks i E1 Ports IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Lag Date amp Time Message Trap Source 24 06 2009 12 43 06 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 24 06 2009 12 43 07 Connected to A Internal LC amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 VBE Encrypted Link Figure 9 16 Events Log Display gt To save the Events Log 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears 2 Click the Events Tab 3 Select the file to save 4 Click the check box to open the file for
71. for VS On completion of the installation the Link Manager main window should look similar to this Figure 25 3 Link Manager window for VS showing asymmetric throughput The Configuration wizard is similar to the Installation wizard Site configura tion is also standard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 25 2 Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 6 Product Reference Appendix Technical Specifications Scope of these Specifications ODU This appendix contains technical specifications for the major link compo nents appearing in this User Manual They are correct at the date of publi cation but are intended for general background only The latest authoritative and most up to date technical specifications are available as Data Sheets obtainable from WBB Customer Service In any event WBB reserves the right to change these specifications without notice Table A 1 Radio Performance Characteristics Wireless Visual Link Surveill Wireless Link Wireless Link HE Access ance Capacity net throughput full duplex 2Mbps 2 5Mbps 18Mbps Range Maximum 20 Km 13 miles 80 Km 50 miles Channel Bandwidth 5MHz for Access all other models 5MHz 10MHz and 20MHz 5MHz Resolution Radio Modulation OFDM BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM Adaptive Modulation amp Coding Supported Automatic Channel Selection ee le seule ele ls me CC fr far fr awe fo a Wir
72. gt To restore from a backup file 1 Choose a site to restore from a previous backup The Site Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click Restore You are offered the choice of a Full or Configuration Restore as shown Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 24 Muting the alignment tone buzzer Chapter 8 Site Configuration A File Actions Help ri si Backup Restore Refresh ES Full Restore EM system Air Interface G Tx Power amp Ant Configuration Restore Description 3 Click the required Restore type You are then offered a standard Open File dialog box 4 From the Open File dialog box navigate to your backup storage area and choose file to upload Click OK Muting the alignment tone buzzer The ODU alignment tone becomes audible as soon as power is supplied and continues until the ODUs are aligned and the link established It is possible to mute the tone during regular operation of the link It must be enabled when performing the alignment procedure gt To mute the alignment tone buzzer 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens 2 In the Configuration dialog box click the Buzzer button F p Buzzer Auto Inet OFF Wns LIME Figure 8 21 Alignment tone buzzer states 3 Click Off The tone is disabled gt To restore the alignment tone buzzer 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click
73. integrators to deploy video cameras virtually anywhere while elimi nating the costs and installation hassles of wire based systems Reliable robust and affordable the Wireless Link systems support a variety of trans mission topologies such as Ring Star and Daisy Chain to provide surveil lance coverage of the most challenging environments Figure 1 4 Multi Point to Point Video Surveillance Deployment Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 3 Private Networks Chapter 1 Private Networks Wireless Link is the perfect solution for private networks such as enter prises education government and utility organizations that want to own and control their networks and eliminate the high recurring charges for leased lines cable WBB cost effective solutions enable organizations of all types to connect geographically dispersed buildings at ranges of up to Km miles Wireless Link provides very high capacity as well as a unique combi nation of TDM and IP services over the same link Figure 1 5 Private Network al al a nn l ii I r E TEk ow i x PT Figure 1 6 Multi Point to Point Enterprise Connectivity Key Features of Wireless Link The following represents some of the outstanding features that Wireless Link provides E1 T1 Ethernet in one Solution Wireless Link systems deliver carrier class E1 T1 Ethernet over one platform making them ideal for a range of backhaul and access applications gt gt
74. k imation Preferences Leconte mm ES Figure 1 26 Menu navigation in the Link Manager Similarly mouse click items will be referred to like this Click Next to continue A mouse click always uses the left mouse button unless stated otherwise Windows Terminology Look at Figure 1 1 above The main application display which you see con sists of a frame window with a menu bar system icons and content It will be referred to as a window the main window or the Manager window depending on context The top line of icons is the tool bar and provides part of the menu bar functionality with a mouse click At the bottom of the window is the status bar a line of icons and text boxes The central part of the main window consists of several panes On the right there are Radio Interference Ethernet Service and the Frequency panes The left hand pane with the blue background is split into three sub panes If you click Site A or Site B in the tool bar you will be offered another win dow which in turn displays on of several panels depending on which func tion you choose Figure 1 27 Site Configuration window with open Management panel Viewing and Printing This manual is optimized for viewing online as a PDF file To this end it uses an 11 point Tahoma typeface for main text Tables for most part use 7 or 8 point fonts Here are a few pointers for hard copy printing e The text and table typefaces used are
75. large enough to print the manual at two pages per sheet e For good legibility use a commercial grade laser printer A color printer is of course best however a monochrome printer set to use gray scale gives acceptable results e Better quality inkjet printers also give good output Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 20 Viewing and Printing Chapter 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 21 Chapter 2 Site Preparation Planning the Link Site Overview Link site planning consists of a set of surveys which must be carried out before any equipment is brought to the site If for some reason the out come of any of these surveys is negative site re location will need to be considered A Site Survey consists of three stages 1 Preliminary survey The proposed link is analyzed in the office using a topographic map 2 Physical survey The locations of the indoor and outdoor equipment are determined on site 3 Radio Frequency RF survey It is recommended that the installation area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer to identify RF interference so as to determine a clear channel for radio installation on site The Site Survey Introduction WBB wireless links must be planned before installation The designated installation site must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degrada tion Wireless Link offers a wide ope
76. mast or brackets using UV rated cable ties Indoor Installation Installing IDU E and R units IDU E Installation The IDU E can be wall mounted placed on a desktop or take up one half of a 1U rack slot The unit should be grounded cabled to the ODU and con nected to power using the supplied AC DC adapter dv i J i mt Les j _ 7 Thy F J Lai Lai uren AAN Figure 3 10 New style IDU E Rear panel IDU R Installation AA TE b Figure 3 11 IDU R Rear Panel Installation of an IDU R unit differs from other IDU models in one respect At the rear of the IDU R see Figure 3 11 there are two jacks labeled Trunks For each IDU R the E1 cable from outside should be plugged into one of the trunks and the E1 cable to the other station should be plugged into the second trunk as in the left hand side of Figure 1 13 Apart from the above difference the link installation including the emaining part of the IDU installation and connection to the ODU proceeds as described as above Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 9 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Mounting the IDU C The Wireless Link IDU As are all rack mountable as shown in Figure 3 12 A front panel keyed schematic of a rack mounted IDU C is shown in the fig ure below K Detachable F CLAN L M GPrimay3 f K Detachable Rack mounting 6 4 8 or 16 Trunks E1 T1 Standby pin Power Rack mounting brackets Label Ports Port Co
77. mode keeping current configuration set tings Configuring the Site Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site You can edit the configuration parameters for each site individually The fol lowing functions are available from the left side of the dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site Chapter 8 Site Configuration A File Actions Help H yo Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode HS System Q ir Interface 23 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security ao Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet Contact Person TDM Services Description Wireless Link ObijectiD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 20 2 1 2 2X External Alarms Location I Operations Last Power Up 16 09 2010 14 37 32 Figure 8 1 Configuration Dialog Box Functions on the left of the dialog box System Edit the contact person and location details View the system details Air Interface View Link ID installation frequency channel bandwidth View HSS settings Management Configure the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Trap Destination and VLAN Inventory View the hardware and software inventory product identification versions MAC address and serial number Security Change the Community Values and the Link Password Set Link Lock Date and Time Set the date and time of the link from an NTP servers or from the managing
78. on your running Link Manager may differ in ote some details from the screen captures used to illustrate this chapter Figure 12 1 above is a schematic of a WBB MHS Figure 12 3 shows how to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 3 Installing a WBB MHS Chapter 12 To user equipment Patch Panel t r L ll EE l Le PTS C Fe ren ol me me ee n E TAL LS mma pige Fin Primary IDU E1T1 Cables 9 ah ledede QI atd dk de 2 gg En Ifa TO Secondary Di VP TE Jon MEN IE RU g l I ee a Pe Plt s a Fie N Selene 6 Ces dns ns eb et es 0 a E Figure 12 3 How to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel e With Wireless Mux links you can protect up to 16 TDM ports To pro ns tect more than eight TDM ports use two Patch Panels at each site S e Ethernet services are carried independently by primary and second Note ary links Each link carries different Ethernet traffic MHS does not protect Ethernet traffic In what follows it will be assumed that 1 We will depart from our usual Site A Site B conventions Sites A and B on the primary link will be Sites 1 2 and 1 4 respectively The corre sponding sites on the secondary link will be Sites 2 2 and 2 4 The site names reflect their IP addresses This is a useful convention and is reflected in the screen captures bel
79. operational avoid standing directly in front of the antenna Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on The ODU must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna Grounding All WBB products should be grounded during operation In addition e The ODU should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least 12AWG The Wireless Link ODU must be properly grounded to protect against lightning It is the user s responsibility to install the Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 1 Protection against Lightning Chapter 3 equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984 or Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit mast lead in wire and discharge unit It also lays down the size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes The Wireless Link ODU must be grounded to a Protective Earth as described in Chapter 18 and in accordance with the Local Electrical Regulations e The earth lug on the IDU C should be connected to the protective earth at all times by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider Rack mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets Further you should e Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last e Never connect telecommunication
80. peculiarity of the Wireless Link e Offer an external reference for additional information e Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning see below e Provide additional background to what follows e Offer a recommendation e Highlight an indication of something to watch out for e Advise you if an action has side effects i e it may disturb something else that would be best left undisturbed e Remind you of something that should be kept in mind A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service degradation A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the equipment Typographical conventions General Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time it is shown in Bold face You will have noticed this usage in the Terminology section above Software The Link Manager is a Microsoft Windows application following the user interface conventions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs We would describe the chain of menu commands indicated in the navigation example of Figure 1 26 like this Tools Active Alarms 1A using Boldface for the menu labels and vertical bars to separate them Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 19 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 ager 192 166 1 101 Operator ES Maintenance Help Performance Monitoring Report Active Alarms AS ees Ej Recent Events PB f Software Upgrade Events Log
81. port wbbIduAdmVlanSfpFilteredVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 19 DisplayString VLAN filtered VIDs for Sfp port Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 19 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 15 of 18 wbblduSrvDesiredTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 2 Integer RW Required trunks bitmap Note that the number of possible trunks that can be configured may vary based on the IDU hardware configuration the selected air interface rate and the range of the installation The provided Manager application enables the user to select only available configurations A change is effective immediately if applied to a master unit and the link is in service mode wbblduSrvServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 4 ObjectID This parameter is reserved to the Manager application provided with the product wbblduSrvActiveTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 6 M A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks wbbliduSrvAvailable Trunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 8 Integer A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks that can be opened in the current configuration The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration the air rate and the installation range wbblduSrvPossibleServices Table IDU Possible Services table wbblduSrvPossibleServicesEntry IDU Services table entry INDEX wbblduSrvPossibleServicesindex wbblduSrvPossibleServicesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 1 Integer RO Table index Rate index
82. position that the ODU should face towards the second ODU 2 Using binoculars locate any obstructions such as tall trees high build ings hills or mountains Look for other RF towers between the two sites Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map 3 Determine the location for the ODU having regard for existing rooftop installations and tower space It should be above any obstructions con sidering the Fresnel zone see 21 4 If you need to install the ODU on a tower make sure that the tower is far away from overhead electric power lines 5 Determine a location for the indoor equipment it should be as close as possible to the ODU At an existing site there is probably an equipment room with cable routing channels The IDU ODU cable length limit is 100m in accordance with IEEE 10 100BaseT standards Mp 6 Measure and record the path length of the cable from the ODU position to the indoor equipment room 7 Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation The ODU and IDU must both be grounded 8 Using the Ohmmeter measure and record the resistance of the required installation to the grounding point The resistance must be less than 10 ohm 9 Review the results of the physical site survey Decide if the site is suitable for the wireless network installation e If the site is suitable continue with stage 3 the RF survey e If the site is not suitable survey another
83. saving Click the Es button and in theSelect File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the Events Log file is to be saved and click OK To store the Events Log first define the IP address subnet mask default gateway and trap destination address of the managing computer see page 8 7 for details W Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 15 Link Manager Traps Chapter 9 Link Manager Traps The Link Manager application issues traps to indicate various events dis played in the Events Log Table 9 5 Link Manager Trap Messages Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in use by Warning Link Manager will not catch any traps from the ProcessName pid ProcessId ODU some other application has grabbed this port For further detail see this web site ammen 9 RS LS Factory Settings The process was not finished due to connection Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem issues to ODU Reset The process was not finished due to connection issues Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to target ODU will not be reset Cannot Write to Monitor file There is not enough space on the disk Warning Free some space on disk on the managing computer and retry Windows Error lt error_ID gt Cannot Write to Monitor file Operating System error on the managing computer Identical IP addresses at lt local site name gt and Warning Set up a different IP to each s
84. suggest upgrades when appropriate The following Link Status messages are given fullCompatibility different software versions were detected that are fully compatible The message indicates that an upgrade is available restrictedCompatibility different software versions were detected that operate correctly However new features are not supported softwareUpgradeRequired different software versions were detected allow ing limited operation The message is that a software upgrade is required versionsIncompatibility different software versions were detected that are incompatible You need to perform local upgrades Table 9 2 Link Compatibility Trap Messages Software Upgrade fullCompatibility Act Available Active Software Software Upgrade Version thenticati Recommended mismatch rror restrictedCompatibility Active Software rown Software Upgrade Upgrade Major Required Required softwareUpgradeRequired Not Active Software Local Software Upgrade Upgrade Required Required versionsIncompatibility TDM Loopbacks Internal and external loopbacks on both sites of a link are used to test the TDM connections gt To activate a loopback 1 From the Maintenance menu choose Loopbacks or right click the TDM display in the main window The Loopbacks dialog box appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 3 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 Loopback Help Loopback Configuration Con
85. the direct path then the outer boundary is said to be two Fresnel zones Odd number Fresnel zones rein force the direct wave path signal even number Fresnel zones cancel the direct wave path signal The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength of the signal the path length and the distance to the obstacle For reliabil ity point to point links are designed to have at least 60 of thefirst Fresnel zone clear to avoid significant attenuation The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in Figure 21 1 above The top of the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone leaving 60 of the Fresnel zone clear therefore the signal is not significantly attenuated Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 4 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 For more about Fresnel zone see http en wikipedia org wiki Fresnel_ zone Running the Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the Link Manager CD It may be run stand alone from the CD or from the Link Manager application gt To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD 1 Insert the Link Manager CD into the drive on the managing computer In the window which opens click the Link Budget Calculator option 2 If the CD autorun application does not start by itself then point your browser to Z WBB Setup DATA Link Budget Calculator htm where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name gt To run the L
86. to an outside surface using the two mounting holes Connect the ODU IDU cable using the RJ 45 jack Connect one cable between the IDU and the suppressor using an RJ 45 jack U A W N 6 Connect the suppressor s ground stud to a grounding point Use the appropriate wire gauge and type keeping the wire as short as possible less than 1m 3 between the stud and the site grounding point 7 Replace the cover Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 6 Internal ESD Protection circuits Chapter 18 To ODU ODU IDU CAT5e cable Pole Ground Point Surge Arrestor Ground Lug rear To IDU Figure 18 6 Surge Suppressor and grounding at building entry point Internal ESD Protection circuits WBB equipment is designed to meet the ETSI FCC Aus NZ CSA EMC and Safety requirements To fulfill these requirements the system s Telecom lines at the ODU IDU are Transformer isolated and include internal ESD Electro Static Discharge Protection circuits Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 7 Chapter 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Why this is Needed All ODUs supplied by WBB come pre configured with an IP address of 10 0 0 120 For use in a network the ODUs must be configured with suit able static IP addresses The method for doing this under office conditions is set out in Chapter 5 There are two situations under which ODJs may need to be pre loaded with an IP address prior to installation to
87. to have the model number s serial number s detailed reason for return ship to address bill to address and contact name phone number and fax number available when requesting an SRO number A purchase order number or pre payment will be required for any units that are out of warranty or for product conversion If you prefer you may contact our Product Services department to obtain an SRO number Phone Number 585 241 5540 Fax Number 585 242 8400 E mail Address productservices gemds com The equipment must be properly packed for return to the factory The original shipping container and pack aging materials should be used whenever possible All factory returns should be addressed to GE MDS LLC Product Services Department SRO No XXXX 175 Science Parkway Rochester NY 14620 USA When repairs have been completed the equipment will be returned to you by the same shipping method used to send it to the factory Please specify 1f you wish to make different shipping arrangements To inquire about an in process repair you may contact our Product Services Group using the telephone Fax or e mail information given above GE MDS LLC 175 Science Parkway Rochester NY 14620 General Business 1 585 242 9600 FAX 1 585 242 9620 Web www gemds com
88. use the Alternative Link Password and click OK to finish You are returned to the window in Figure 5 4 above Continue with the next step Enter a new password Retype the new password in the Confirm field Click OK Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password N OA oO A UW Click OK at the Password changed success message e A link password must contain at least eight but no more than 16 characters excluding SPACE TAB and any of gt E e Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless sr bridge Note e If the link is inactive then the link password may also be changed from the Site Configuration dialogs See page 8 13 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 6 Installation Chapter 5 Step 3 Channel Settings Wireless Link systems have a feature called Automatic Channel Selection ACS In the event of sync loss ACS chooses the first available channel in a list of monitored channels nominated in the Channel settings window of Figure 5 6 below A channel switch takes place sufficiently fast as to ensure no loss of service Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz 5 700 i al Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 hd Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5 759 Bren 5 709 5 800 5 015 5 745 5 760 5 770 5 730 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 76
89. vere G sans mens 4 7 NNN 4 8 et TRE 4 8 Default Wireless Link Settings vs knekken 4 11 Chapter 5 Installing the Link GE PR EE NE EA 5 1 MN 2 5 3 step 1 Start Me Wari PE E PEER 5 3 VENNENE dresi re ere a 5 3 Changing the Link SO we cas den ane eat ss el 5 5 Step 3 COS a a ea on aa 5 7 Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings ss 5 9 OR NE EE 5 9 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 vil TDM Services selection rx rarrunnannvnnnnnnnernnnnnnnevnunnnnnvvvnnnnnrvuunnnnnnnunnnnnevnune 5 10 Modulation Rate Selection ene 5 12 Setting Monitored Hot Standby Mode rrrnrarnvnrnvnnnrnrnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnevnr 5 13 IAE E I E E O A eins 5 14 Setting the TDM Jitter Buffer L e 5 14 Step 6 TDM Clock Configuration sett en 5 16 Step 7 Installation Summary and Exit se 5 18 Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window One Manager for all WBB Radio NOE sata 6 1 The Main Window of the Link Manager 6 1 The Link MAO ECO en aa te mie 6 2 Man Menu PRES OO a ao dr 6 3 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window 6 4 Chapter 7 Configuring the Link STE NE en en a da tae 7 1 SO a a EE ET ce isecneen 7 3 EL NAS IE GE Li PA ES EEE EEE TEE EE RaT 7 3 Step 2 System Parameters cca decpecedte n Scgeade cee cater ease aieecaceededineno daie 7 3 Step or gts NN 7 4 Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings ccscscsscsesecsecnseesrseeateneneceseneees 7 8 PT Rd 7 8 FN 7 9 Step 7 Configuration Summary and Exit sisccescsccensanch
90. was valid Note that the Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values were stored e g due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset SES Severe Errored Generic PM Data Seconds Integrity Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 11 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Table 9 3 Explanation of performance data Max RSL The maximum of the receive signal level measured in dBm Min RSL The minimum of the receive signal level measured in dBm Max TSL The maximum of the transmit signal level measured in dBm Min TSL The minimum of the transmit signal level measured in dBm The number of seconds in which the Receive Signal Level RSL Additional Air Interface RSL Threshold 1 was below the specified threshold PM Data The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the RSL Threshold 2 specified threshold The number of seconds in which the Transmit Signal Level TSL Threshold TSL was above the specified threshold The number of seconds in which the Background Block Error BBER Threshold Ratio BBER exceeded the specified threshold The number of Megabytes received at the specified port within Received Bytes the interval The number of Megabytes transmitted at the specified port within the interval Throughput threshold Seconds count when throughput fell below the threshold Traffic threshold Seconds count when actual traffic exceeded the threshold TDM interface oo of second
91. windows should look like this Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Q 9 Link Configuration Link Installation Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Location Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Status Link Active Radio Interface R KATY Rate Units le Mbps amp Fos Site 1 2 IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DM Service Primary Link Not Active Trap Rene 10 105 161 Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Frequency 5 280 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000028 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Compatible IDUs detected 000029 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Ethernet Service has been opened 000030 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 000031 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm I S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 DFS Encrypted Link Figure 12 9 Primary link after the switch over to secondary link After a few seconds the display moves to No Link display with TDM ports grayed out Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 11 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link C
92. you will be able to evaluate the quality of the link Figure 22 1 Wireless Link Link Setup Expected Signal Level for AIND radios Use the Link Budget Calculator utility supplied on the Link Manager Soft ware CD ROM to calculate the expected performance of the Wireless Link wireless link The utility allows you to determine the RSS of the link and number of E1 T1 services available at aspecified distance In all indoor type Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 22 1 Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment Chapter 22 installations a long transmission line RF cable between the radio and antenna will be used oftentimes over 30 m 100 ft In this case the atten uation RF loss of the cable must be determined for both sides and entered as a dB loss in the Link Budget calculator In many cases a larger antenna is necessary to compensate for this transmission line loss Andrew LDF and AVA cables are good for minimizing loss Performing Wireless Link AIND Alignment The supervisor of the antenna alignment should be located at Site A with a Spectrum Analyzer Equipment Setup gt To set up the antenna alignment equipment 1 Coarsely align the two antennas Use the compass readings taken during the Site Survey to point the antennas in the correct direction 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 22 1 but connect a spec trum analyzer in place of the remote Wireless Link AIND 3 Turn on the CW transmit signal
93. 0 0 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 Le am omiani nm 2e ms aus pen m m m m Figure 9 14 Performance Monitoring Report showing the effect of a Reset The prior data is invalidated as shown by the red crosses in the left hand column Further Min and Max RSL for the invalidated period is set to zero 3 Click the Selection Pane icon to toggle the side panel on or off The other reports look similar Here is a detailed description of the reports and their fields Several performance data occurrences are collected for each of the inter faces ES SES and UAS as well as specific data per Interface type e g Tx and Rx bytes for Ethernet For the Air Interface user defined thresholds data are collected Refer to Table 9 3 and Table 9 4 below Data is collected and selectively displayed based on three time intervals as selected by the Interval radio buttons e Current t 0 e 15 minutes Intervals e Daily Table 9 3 Explanation of performance data UAS Unavailable Seconds in which the interface was out of service Seconds The number of seconds in which there was at least one error ES Errored Seconds block Note that the notation of an error block is different per interface The number of seconds in which the service quality was low the quality is different per type of interface and determined by the BBER threshold per interface a Barone RIOEK The number of errored blocks in an interval A flag indicating that the data
94. 0 2 1 7 Integer RW The parameter defines whether to send Ethernet frames to detect an IDU The valid writable values are userDisabled 3 userEnabled 4 A change requires a reset and is effective after reset Number of mounted trunks in the IDU wbblduAdmLicensedTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 9 Integer RO Number of Licensed Trunks in the IDU wbblduAdmVlanSupported 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 10 Integer RO Identifies if the local IDU supports VLAN tag untag wbblduAdmVlanEgressMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 11 DisplayString RW VLAN tag untag egress values wbblduAdm VlaningressMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 12 DisplayString VLAN tag untag ingress values wbblduAdmVlanDefaultPortVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 13 DisplayString RW VLAN tag untag default VLAN ids for each port wbblduAdmMountedTrunks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 8 Right most digit is Vlan priority 0 6 other digits compose Vlan Id 1 4094 wbblduAdmVlanLan1UntaggedVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 14 DisplayString VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN1 port wbblduAdmVlanLan2UntaggedVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 15 DisplayString VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN2 port wbblduAdmVlanSfpUntaggedVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 16 DisplayString VLAN untagged VIDs for Sfp port wbbiduAdmVlanLan1FilteredVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 17 DisplayString VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN1 port wbbIduAdmVlanLan2FilteredVIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 18 DisplayString VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN2
95. 0 6 3 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 Table 6 2 Link Manager main menu functionality Continued Performance On screen and printable Monitoring Report P ee ee active alarms for lt Site 1 Active Alarms Chapter 9 2 lt Site 2 name gt Shows active alarms for lt Site 1 name gt Recent Events Displays recent events by site Software Upgrade Upgrade ODU firmware Chapter 14 Tools Spectrum View Not available for Wireless Link __ Change Password Password Change the log on password dialog the log on password dialog Change the log on password dialog page 4 9 4 page 49 page 9 17 Save to File Save events log file Loopbacks set TDM loopbacks page 9 4 E 1 name gt Reset lt Site 1 name gt ODU Maintenance 2 lt Site 2 name gt Reset lt Site 2 name gt ODU Link Manager Link Manager Help View View help on online help on online help ee Budget Calculator opened in default browser Calculator Get Diagnostics Manager mm ed dd mr Manager Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Link details pane The Link details pane on the left is split into three sections which are largely self explanatory The top section summarizes information about the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 4 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 20561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel B
96. 01 on Idu 02 09 2005 21 56 43 TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm Figure 9 18 Active Alarms Summary The active alarms display does not update itself until the Refresh button is used The following table provides an explanation of the command buttons Table 9 6 Active Alarms command buttons sU Inc ACTIU Sae Saves the alarms in CSV or text format for further analysis Refresh Shows the active alarms at the moment of refresh Site Selects site for the active alarms Close Closes the active alarm window Viewing Recent Events Each ODU stores the last 256 events Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 18 Reverting Alert Messages Chapter 9 gt To view the last 256 events 1 Click Tools Recent Events A window like the following is dis played IMs Recent Events A File View Help A Save Site 4 Close Number Device Date amp Time Description Interface 01 09 2005 00 00 02 Channel scanning in progress Radio Interface 01 09 2005 00 00 28 IDU of type 16xTrunks was detected 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 1 LOS E1 Port 01 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 2 LOS E1 Port 02 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 3 LOS E1 Port 03 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 TDM Interface 4 LOS E1 Port 04 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 LAN port 01 status changed to connected 100Mbps Full Duplex Management Port on Odu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 LAN port 02 status changed t
97. 1000 1 1 2 DisplayString RO ODU Hardware Version wbbOduAdmSwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 3 DisplayString RO ODU Software Version wbbOduAdmLinkName 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 4 DisplayString Link Name A change is effective immediately wbbOduAdmResetCmd 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 5 Integer RW Reset Command A set command with a value of 3 will cause a device reset The read value is always 0 wbbOduAdmAddres 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 6 IpAddress RW ODU IP address A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is recommended wbbOduAdmMask 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 7 IpAddress RW ODU Subnet Mask A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is recommended wbbOduAdmGateway 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 8 IpAddress RW ODU default gateway A change is effective after reset The parameter is kept for backward compatibility Using the alternative parameter wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg is recommended wbbOduAdmBroadcast 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 10 Integer RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbOduAdmhHostsTable N A Trap destinations table Each trap destination is defined by an IP address and a UDP port Up to 10 addresses can be configured wbbOduAdmHostsEntry N A Trap destinations table entry INDEX w
98. 12 1000 1 5 25 1 3 DisplayString RO Channels availability per CBW wbbOduAirChannelBWHSSATDDConflictPerC 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 4 Integer Indication for possible Link drop per CBW due to BW conflict between HSS and ATDD wbbOduAirChannelBWMinRatioForSupporting 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 5 Integer Minimal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM and still enable proper operation of the aforementioned CBW wbbOduAirChannelBWMaxRatioForSupporting 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 6 Integer Maximal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM and still enable proper operation of the aforementioned CBW wbbOduAirRFD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 26 Integer RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds wbbOduAirRatesTable N A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth wbbOduAirRatesEntry N A Air Rate indexes table entry INDEX wbbOduAirRatesindex wbbOduAirRatesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 27 1 1 Integer RO Air Rate index wbbOduAirRatesAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 27 1 2 Air Rate availability depending on air interface conditions wbbOduAirDesiredRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 28 Integer RW Required Air Rate index 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master side while the link is up wbbOduAirLinkDistance 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 29 Integer Link distance in meters A value of 1 indicates an illegal value and i
99. 12 1000 2 6 2 1 Integer Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit When the option is available the bit value is 1 When the option is unavailable the bit value is 0 The available options are bit 2 Automatic bit 3 Trunk 1 bit4 Trunk 2 bit5 Trunk 3 bit 6 Trunk 4 When no options are available the returned value is 1 wbblduTdmMasterClockDesired 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 2 2 Integer RW Required TDM Master Clock A change is effective after re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmMasterClockActual a 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 2 3 Integer RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock wbblduTdmConfigT able NAA IDU TDM Links IDU TDM Links Configuration table table wbblduTdmConfigEntry EE S IDU TDM Links kikk table entry INDEX wbblduTdmConfigindex wbblduTdmConfigindex RO Table index index wbblduTdmifindex eee Link index in the interface table wbblduTdmLineCoding 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 6 Integer RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only The parameter controls the line coding Setting the value to each of the indices applies to all A change is effective after the next open of the TDM service wbblduTdmLoopbackConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 9 Integer Loop back configuration table Each of the trunks can be set Normal Line loop back or Reverse line loop back A change is effective immediately Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 21
100. 15 204 It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when configuring the radio in the United States or where FCC rules apply the Tx power is set according to the values for which the product is certified The use of Tx Warning power values other than those for which the product is certified is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15 204 Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and Caution financial liabilities Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas The installer should configure the output power level of antennas according to country regulations and antenna type Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 ili Where Outdoor units are configurable by software to Tx power values other than those for which the product is certified it is the responsibility of the Warning Professional Installer to restrict the Tx power to the certified limits This product was tested with special accessories indoor unit IDU or PoE FTP CAT 5e shielded cable with sealing gasket 12 AWG grounding cable Warn
101. 29612 1000 2 1 1 DisplayString IDU configuration description wbblduAdmHwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 2 DisplayString RO IDU Hardware Revision wbblduAdmSwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 3 DisplayString RO IDU Software Revision wbbOduAdmNumOfExternalAlarmin 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 4 Integer Indicates the number of currently available External Alarm Inputs wbbOduAdmExternAlarminTable PA A This is the External Alarm Inputs table wbbOduAdmExternAlarminEntry N A Entry containing the elements of a single External Alarm Input INDEX wbbOduAdmExternAlarminindex wbbOduAdmExternAlarminindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 1 Integer This value indicates the index of the External Alarm Input entry wbbOduAdmExternAlarmInText 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 2 DisplayString RW This field describes the External Alarm Input It is an optional string of no more than 64 characters which will be used in the event being sent as a result of a change in the status of the External Alarm Input DEFVAL Alarm Description wbbOduAdmExternAlarminAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 3 Integer RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is enabled or disabled wbbOduAdmExternAlarminStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 5 1 4 Integer This value indicates the current status of the External Alarm Input wbblduAdmSN 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 1 6 DisplayString RO IDU Serial Number wbbIlduAdmiduDetectionMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 100
102. 2xL 2xL 2xL 2 xLis H 2 x L594 2X Log t 2 x L Lng Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 6 HSS Error Notification Chapter 10 Three cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 10 8 PathLength L 2xLy F2x Lg F2Xx Lyyt 2 x Lis H t 2xLyg F2x Log FIX Logg FIX Lt H 2 x L 2 x L3 2 x L34 t L3s HSS Error Notification In the event of an HSS installation fault the ODU will sound a beep pattern according to the following chart also printed on the ODU product label BUZZER SIGNAL BEST 50 FAR INCREASED EH SAME mH co DECREASED D NO AIR LIELIE HSS MISMATCH ANTENNA ALIGNMENT Figure 10 9 ODU beep for HSS Error ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout Table 10 1 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout E Not connected White Orange a C em CJ CE Radio Frame Pattern RFP A Radio Frame Pattern RFP is the cycle duration of transmit and receive of the air frame Without HSS When selecting TDM or Ethernet services the system automatically and transparently chooses the optimal RFP When TDM and Ethernet services are configured the RFP is optimized for TDM Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 7 RFP and HSS Wireless Link User Manual Chapter 10 RFP and HSS When HSS is used the RFP for the collocated radios must be selected man ually Both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux use the Time Division Duplex TDD mechanism Under HSS TDD enables synchronization of tran
103. 3 Maintaining 12 9 IDU Replacement 12 9 ODU Replacement 12 10 Port pinout B 3 Primary and secondary links 12 2 provides 12 2 Switching Logic 12 11 System Operation 12 14 MIB About D 1 Community String D 2 Interface API D 1 Parameters D 3 Private D 2 Private Parameters D 6 Reference D 1 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 D 4 TDM D 3 Terminology D 1 Traps D 23 Wireless Link User Manual Monitored Hot Standby see MHS ODU O Backup and restore software Bridge Mode aging time Connectorized described Differences between models Installation Mast and Wall Integrated Antenna mounting Mounting Kit Package Contents Preloading IP address Replacing Typically used external antennas With integrated antenna Outdoor PoE see O PoE Outdoor Unit see ODU P Package contents of Password PG Link Minimum Requirements Performance Monitor 1 7 8 24 8 16 1 7 1 7 17 1 8 fu 17 Er 17 1 33 19 1 9 21 1 14 1 14 1 12 3 3 0 21 4 1 9 2 Performance Monitoring set time interval 9 8 PoE Basic PoE Device Described Installing a link using Ports LAN for PoE 8 Protection External Lightning Surge Suppressors 18 3 Rad Grounding Antenna cable IDUs ODUs Internal ESD Protection circuits R io Frame Pattern RFP General Considerations General considerations With HSS Without HSS Radio Link Accessories B 2 18 1 18 2 18 2 18 7 10 9 10 9 10 8 10 7
104. 30 11 12 Software Update for GSUs Chapter 11 Current GPS latitude 51 500000 Current GPS N S Indicator N Current GPS longitude 0 000000 Current GPS E W Indicator E Current GPS number of satellites 09 Current GPS altitude 84 0 Command display gpsinfo finished OK The three additional set commands are set rfp lt index gt 2 6 set ratio lt ratio gt set tx_phase lt mode 1 normal 2 shifted gt Software Update for GSUs All GSUs in a distributed site can be updated simultaneously Use an IP list as described in 14 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 13 Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 3 Advanced Installation Chapter 12 Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure What is a WBB Monitored Hot Standby The WBB Monitored Hot Standby MHS a k a 1 1 is a duplicated link setup as a primary link and a secondary link in hot standby mode as shown in Figure 12 1 below Site A 1 2 alli Primary 0 user gguipnern Figure 12 1 WBB Monitored Hot Standby Site B 1 4 To use aquiprven WBB MHS provides redundancy and backup to TDM services It is designed to provide high reliability high capacity Point to Point links The WBB MHS is Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 1 What WBB MHS provides Chapter 12 e Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier class operators e Optimized for high capac
105. 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 47 Integer Antenna Gain Configurability options are product specific supported not supported wbbOduAirAntennaT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 48 External Antenna Type Monopolar or Bipolar wbbOduAirRssBalance 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 49 Integer RSS balance Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2 wbbOduAirT otalTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 50 Integer Total Transmit Power in dBm This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation wbbOduAirinstallFreqAndCBW 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 51 DisplayString Installation frequency Channel BW wbbOduAirDFStype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 52 Integer RO DFS regulation type wbbOduAirComboSubBandT able N A ODU Multi band Sub Bands Table wbbOduAirComboSubBandEntry N A ODU Multi band Sub Bands Table entry INDEX wbbOduAirComboSubBandindex wbbOduAirComboSubBandindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 ol ODU Multi band sub bands table index 1 wbbOduAirComboSubBandld 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 DisplayString ja Represents the Multi band sub band ID 2 wbbOduAirComboSubBandDescription 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 DisplayString Multi band sub band description 3 wbbOduAirComboSubBandinstallFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 Integer Represents the Multi band sub band installation 4 frequency in KHz wbbOduAirComboSubBandAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 Integer Represents the Multi band
106. 4 11 Link Budget Calculator see LBC 9 8 Information 9 1 Link ID 4 11 5 4 8 26 9 20 9 21 9 21 Air Interface Thresholds Link Lock BBER Threshold 9 13 described 8 11 Ethernet Thresholds Capacity 9 13 Enable 8 12 Ethernet Thresholds Traffic 9 13 Link Site RSL Threshold 9 13 Planning oA TSL THreshold 9 13 survey 2 1 Air Interface Thresholds setting 9 12 Stage 1 Preliminary Survey 2 2 Alarms Stage 2 Physical Survey 2 3 Active summary 9 18 Additional Indoor Site Requirements Error detection and 9 18 2 4 output 9 20 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements saved 9 18 2 4 Compatibility 9 2 Stage 3 RF Survey 2 4 Trap messages 9 3 Login Errors Events Log 9 8 Incorrect IP Address 4 6 Events log 9 14 Incorrect password 4 7 Events references Unsupported Device 4 6 trap loopback background color 9 17 activating 9 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 30 Index 3 deactivate 9 5 Local Internal 9 7 Remote External 9 6 Remote Internal 9 6 M Management Addresses 8 5 and trap addresses 8 1 Configuring the Site 8 2 Screen Telnet 8 27 Manager Software Change log on password 4 8 Events Log 6 7 Installing 4 1 Main window 6 1 Details pane 6 4 Toolbar 6 2 main window 4 6 Monitor pane 6 5 Ethernet Service 6 5 Radio Interface 6 5 Radio signal strength 6 5 Off line functionality 4 7 Status Bar 6 7 Manual Chapters by Audience Conventions Terminology MHS described 12 1 Installation Procedure 12 1 12 1 Installing 12 3 Kit Contents 12
107. 4 Mb s 16 GAM 0 5 36 Mb s 16 GAM 0 75 48 Mbis E4 G4M 0 66 o lap je dE Chapter 21 Tx Power EIRP 38 dBm 6 3 Watt iin Range 01 Em 01 Miles Max Range 48 8 Em 30 3 Miles Expected Performance 488 km m TE coor c 029 M 81 dBm 6 dE Distance Climate Expected R amp S Fade Margin Services Ethernet Only o 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 minivea Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 6 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 meter 49 Feet Figure 21 8 Rate selector E If you choose Adaptive Rate then the Rate list is unavailable as is the ae Climate factor list Both of these quantities are calculated The Rate shown defines the air interface rate in Mbps The system operates in TDD mode and has the overhead of the air interface pro toco Thus the Ethernet actual throughput is provided by the Ethernet Rate E For a given air rate Ethernet throughput will decrease with increasing range ie due to propagation delay The Fade margin is the minimum required for LOS conditions For degraded link conditions a larger Fade margin should be used The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 9 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 Link B Link Budget Link A Link Budget Product R GSS FCOC ANT v Channel RFP Frequency 20 MHz i Auto W EN 5 8 GHz Rate a Mb s BPSK 0 75 v Tx Power 16 dem 4 16 Tx Antenna Gain dB Rx Antenna Gain dB Cab
108. 40 AO DO NM cc CA 0 1010 00 00 00 0 00 0000 0 NI100 I0 nn on on on on On O1 On On On On n 1 1 1 1 Oo on on da nn nm on on on on on on On On on nm on on on on on on on in 70000000 00000000000005 72000000 000000000000005 72000000 0000000000 4 3 005 70000000 00000000000005 J IOD 0O 0 0 0 0 0 0 dD d d dD d d d d od od d oDd 70000000 00000000000005 In P i 72000000 0000000000500n OOO da Air Performance Monitor 4 15 Minutes Report Figure 9 13 A typical Performance Monitoring Report based on 15 minute intervals Notice the Min RSL value of 100 on the fourth line It Indicates that dur ing the interval 12 30 to 12 45 there was a link sync loss The next fig ure shows the effect of a reset between 14 15 and 14 30 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 10 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Performance Monitoring Report File View Configuration Help Get Data saa i bad Thresholds Selection Pane Close Urban Date amp Time Min RSL dBm Max RSL dBm RSL Thresh 1 88 dBm RSLTh MinTS MaxT TSL ih BBER UAS Raw ES SES BBE A r 19 07 2010 14 45 00 54 54 0 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 ri 19 07 2010 14 30 00 55 54 0 0 5 5 0 1 13 1 0 3038 x 19 07 2010 14 15 00 0 0 0 0 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 x 19 07 2010 14 00 00 0 0 0 0 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 LS x 19 07 2010 13 45 00 0 0 0 0 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 19 07 2010 13 30 00 0 0
109. 5 780 5 795 5 810 6 825 Ill gt Select All Clear All Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem VT Mo Serv Ethemet Ethemet TDM Mo Serw Ethemet Ethernet TOM Quality Figure 5 8 Channel Settings Showing available Channel Bandwidths Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 8 Installation Chapter 5 im ACS is only supported for a Channel Bandwidth of 20 MHz Note 3 Click the check box if Automatic Channel Selection is required 4 The Available Channels List contains all of the allowable channels for the link Check the channels that can be automatically selected Selecting a new channel causes the system quality to change The Qual ity bar provides an indication of the link quality from No serv ice red to Ethernet TDM green as shown in the bottom of Figure 5 7 above 5 Click Next Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings Link Installation Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Synchronization Status Status A B Operation Independent Unit Independent Unit Synchronization MJA HA External Pulses Not Detected Mot Detected Configure Operational States Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States Configure Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS Der Figure 5 9 HSS Settings The Synchronization Status dialog box displa
110. 5 16 TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION i anannannannnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnne 5 14 FIGURE 5 17 TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION ETBE EVALUATION BAR 5 15 FIGURE 5 18 SERVICES AND TDM DELAY SET LINK READY FOR EVALUATION sseceeeerseees 5 15 FIGURE 5 19 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION 1 5 16 FIGURE 5 20 TDM PARAMETERS cececceececesevereaeeueeeeeueeeesevereaeeaeeaesevantenvansuneaneneenras 5 17 FIGURE 5 21 INSTALLATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY cccecceceeeeeeseueeuaevansaevanseeueesneanes 5 18 FIGURE 5 22 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION WITH LOADED TRUNKS5 19 FIGURE 6 1 MAIN WINDOW WIRELESS LINK IS ACTIVE scccccececseeeeeeteeeeeneneeeavareestaress 6 2 FIGURE 7 1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD avuunnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnvnnnennn 7 3 FIGURE 7 2 CONFIGURATION WIZARD SYSTEM DIALOG BOX scssececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneneavaraearars 7 4 FIGURE 7 3 CHANNEL SETTINGS DIALOG BOX AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION 7 5 FIGURE 7 4 SEARCHING FOR THE BEST OPERATING CHANNEL swunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnenn 7 6 FIGURE 7 5 CHANNEL SETTINGS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION cseceeceeveeeeees 7 6 FIGURE 7 6 CHANNEL FREQUENCY OPTIONS csecceceecaveeeeeeeeaveneaesavansavaneauenvavenvaneneanenes 7 7 FIGURE 7 7 CHOOSING AN OTHER OPERATING CHANNEL FREQUENCY cseeseseceeeevareeeevens 7 7 FIGURE 7 6 HSS SETTINGS a eee aa aan des ea ge ea 7 8 FIGURE 7 9 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG uunnunvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennen
111. 5 5 780 5 795 5810 5 825 Il gt Select All Clear All Monitor Link Radio Interface B RSS dem CCS Oo Mo Ser Ethemet Ethernet TDM Ho Serw Ethernet Ethernet TOM Quality Figure 5 6 Channel Settings Automatic Channel Selection The default frequency for the product is shown gt To select channels to be used by the link 1 Select the installation frequency from the Installation Channel box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 7 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz Automatic Channel Selectiq Available Channels List GHz 5 740 5 7595 5 770 5 705 5 800 5 615 5 745 E 60 BPS 5 790 5 805 5 820 5 750 5 765 5 00 5 795 5 810 5 925 lt i gt Select All Clear All Monitor Link amp Radio Interface B RSS dBm O 3 i Mo Serw Ethemet Ethemet TOM Mo Sere Ethemet Ethemet TOM Quality Figure 5 7 Channel Settings Showing available installation rates 2 Choose the required Channel Bandwidth Link Installation Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization Installation Channel GHz 5 750 w Channel Bandwidth MHz Automatic Channel Selectid Available Channels List GHz 5 755 5 770 5 785 5 800 5 815 5 760 5 775 5 790 5 805 5 820 6 65
112. 5 Feet Link B Link Budget Product Channel EFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Win Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected R amp S Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Calculate Figure 21 4 Product selector 2 Choose the channel bandwidth Link Link Budget R GSGFCCNINT w 38 dBm 16 3 Watt 0 1 Br 10 1 Miles 48 8 km 30 3 Miles Expected Performance 61 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only 2 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 minivea 1 6 h bles 1 Ethernet Only 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure 21 5 Channel Bandwidth selector 21 7 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 3 For a collocated link choose the RFP Use the Help button to the right of the RFP selection box for help Link B Link Budget Product Channels RFPS Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Link Link Budget RGSAGFCCANT kd 20 Mhe vo 1 duo iv EN 5 8 GHz 8 Mbis BPSK 16 dBm le 22 dB E 22 dE o a 6 dB 38 dBm I 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 48 8 Km I 30 3 Miles Expected Performance 81 dBm l 6 dB Ethernet Only 2 98 2074 availability downt
113. 7 Mounting the external antennas if used page page 3 8 Mounting the Lightning Protection devices if used page page 3 8 Outdoor connections page page 3 9 Mounting the IDUs page page 3 10 Indoor connections page page 3 13 Aligning the ODUs antennas page page 3 14 See Figure 3 9 below which illustrates a typical installation of a Wireless Mux or a Wireless Link with external antenna s Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 6 Outdoor installation Chapter 3 Antenna Antenna Coax cables grounded Coax cable grounded to to the pole within 30 cm the pole within 30 cm of of the antenna the antenna Connectorized Connectorized ODU Coax cables grounded i Coax cable grounded to 38 to the pole within 30 cm the pole within 30 cm of of the ODU the ODU 13 Andrew Andrew a Grounding Kit a i Grounding Kit Figure 3 9 Typical Installation with external antenna Left Wireless Mux Right Wireless Link The installation steps are detailed in the following sections Outdoor installation Preparing the ODU before Deployment Each ODU must be pre loaded with an IP address This may be done prior to deployment in the field or on site using a Laptop computer The process is quite straight forward and described in Chapter 19 Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a pole or a wall In both installations the sup plied mounting kit is used to secure the ODU i mast si
114. 8 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration If you are using a PoE device this feature is unavailable You may skip this section VLAN IDs are used by WBB products in three separate contexts Management VLAN Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring It is recommended that Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context To set up VLAN tagging for Ethernet Service click the VLAN Configuration button in Figure 8 14 The following window is displayed W VLAN Configuration Ingress Mode Egress Mode Transparent Transparent VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN Priority Transparent Transparent VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN Priority Transparent Transparent VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN Priority Provider parameters are common fo af ports Provider parameters VLAN ID VLAN Priority Figure 8 15 VLAN tag settings iia If you are using a new style IDU E the SFP row will not appear ote The choices for Ingress Mode are Ingress Mode Transparent w Transparent VLAN ID VLAN Priority l and for Egress Mode are Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 18 Setting the Maximum Information Rate MIR Chapter 8 Egres Mode Transparent i Transparent Untag all Untag selected WYLAN
115. Accumulative Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Estimated Time Between Errors ee ee lt lt min HS Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 or Blocks E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Frequency 5 490 GHz Events Lag Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000038 3 30 2009 10 38 21 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000057 3 30 2009 10 43 52 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000052 3 30 2009 10 40 58 AM The time was set to MON MAR 30 09 40 58 2009 ODU 000042 3 30 2009 10 40 05 AM Transmitting on channel 5 270 GHz ODU 000023 3 30 2009 10 37 35 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU 000040 3 30 2009 10 38 26 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU lt iif amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 F DFS Encrypted Link Figure 12 8 Secondary Link operating as the Hot Standby link Notice that the active link notice is highlighted in red so that there is no mistaking which link is operational Maintaining a WBB MHS Link IDU Replacement There are two situations which must be treated differently Situation 1 To replace either of the IDUs at Site 1 4 or the IDU at Site 2 2 nothing spe cial is required Simply disconnect the IDU to be replaced and replace it with a new one Replacing a secondary link IDU obviously has no effect on the TDM service Disc
116. B MONITORED HOT STANDBY avunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnvnnene 12 1 FIGURE 12 2 WBB Y CONNECTION PATCH PANEL cccecceccececcecucceaneeeeanvansaueeeeneeneanes 12 3 FIGURE 12 3 HOW TO CONNECT THE IDUS TO THE PATCH PANEL ns 12 4 FIGURE 12 4 SERVICES CONFIGURATION PANEL HOT STANDBY MODE SELECTION 12 5 FIGURE 12 5 THE PRIMARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION cseceeceecseeeevereaneeeeaneaneuas 12 6 FIGURE 12 6 THE SECONDARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION seceeceeveceereeneaneueeeeeneas 12 7 FIGURE 12 7 PRIMARY LINK A FEW SECONDS BEFORE REGULAR NO LINK DISPLAY 12 8 FIGURE 12 8 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AS THE HOT STANDBY LINK ecseceeceeceeveeeaens 12 9 FIGURE 12 9 PRIMARY LINK AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY LINK AFTER A FEW SECONDS THE DISPLAY MOVES TO NO LINK DISPLAY WITH TDM PORTS GRAYED OUT 12 11 FIGURE 12 10 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY AFTER A FEW MOMENTS THE TDM ICONS BECOME GREEN sceccececeecaceecaeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeesaeeesaesesesesaees 12 12 FIGURE 12 11 PRIMARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK FROM SECONDARY 12 13 FIGURE 12 12 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK TO PRIMARY 12 14 FIGURE 13 1 RING PROTECTION MECHANISM unnnnnnnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 13 2 FIGURE 13 2 NODE WITH IDU AND POE DEVICE suunvnnannnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnne 13 6 FIGURE 13 3 1 1 TERME a nee we eae 13 6 FIGURE 13 4 USING IDU C or IDU E WITH
117. DIO FRAME PATTERN TABLE WIRELESS MUX cccecceceecseveeeeeeeeveneeneanns 10 8 TABLE 10 3 RADIO FRAME PATTERN TABLE WIRELESS LINK issus 10 8 TABLE 10 4 ASYMMETRIC ALLOCATION WITH COLLOCATED LINKS SCENARIOS 10 12 TABLE 10 5 IDU C AND NEW STYLE IDU E FRONT PANEL LEDS FOR HSS siiin 10 13 TABLE 10 6 EXTERNAL PULSE STATUS suununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnenne 10 14 TABLE 13 1 TOPOLOGIES SUPPORTED BY WBB ETHERNET RING iaunnannannnnennennennennennnnnene 13 3 TABLE 14 1 PORT SETTINGS INGRESS DIRECTION ccceceeccececueeaeeeneneeeaeeunvantaeeeannansas 14 4 TABLE 14 2 PORT SETTINGS EGRESS DIRECTION cccceccecceecceecesueeeesuveneeneaneaeeueaeeansas 14 4 TABLE 17 1 BILL OF MATERIALS ODU MOUNTING KIT avunnnnnnnnnnnnnannenennennennennennennenenne 17 1 TABLE A 36 ANTENNA SPECIFICATIONS cccceccecceecaceaeeeeeevanvaneaesaeueuseeeevantanvansaneeeannanys A 8 TABLE B 1 ODU IDU RJ 45 CONNECTOR PINOUT ccsccecceceeceeeeeueevaeeenvanvanseeeeeententanss B 1 TABLE B 2 ODU HSS UNIT CONNECTION PINOUT iavunvnvavnnvnvnnannnvnnennnvnnennnnnnnnnnnnenenenenn B 1 TABLE B 3 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT ccesseseecsacsccnccnnennsaneaneaceaeeneunenneaneases B 2 TABLE B 4 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT sannannnnnnnnnnnnnennenennnnnennennennennennnnennennenn B 2 TABLE B 5 TRUNK PORTS E1 T1 RI4SPINOUT uansnnnennnnnnennnnnansnnnnnnnnnnannannnannannvnnnnnn B 3 TABLE B 6 HOT STANDBY RJ 11 PORT PINOUT cccceececcecveceeeeeeeev
118. DU The ODU IDU cable conducts all the user traffic between the IDU and the ODU and also provides power to the ODU The maximum length of the ODU IDU cable is 100m 328ft in accordance with 10 100BaseT standards The ODU IDU cable is supplied pre assembled with RJ 45 connectors at the length specified when ordering or asa cable drum with spare connectors If the ODU IDU cable was not ordered use an outdoor class CAT 5e 24AWG shielded cable See Appendix B for Wiring Specifications To connect the ODU to the IDU route the cable from the ODU to the IDU secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the ODU RJ 45 connector on the IDU see item B in Figure 3 12 above Installing a Link using PoE Devices The PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connector and two Ethernet ports It is AC powered and has a power LED gt To prepare a link using PoE devices 1 To connect the ODU to the PoE device route the cable from the ODU to the PoE device secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the LAN OUT RJ 45 connector on the PoE device 2 Connect it to AC power Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 13 Connecting User Equipment Chapter 3 3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 for the second link 4 If you are using a BDU you should refer to the WBB Base Distribution Unit User Manual Connecting User Equipment gt To connect user equipment to an IDU 1 Connect user switch router or any other
119. Diagnostics Data and Description System Data General information about the system Link Information Information about the link properties e List of system events including those from other sites if this Events Log site is defined as the trap destination e Last 256 events from both sites gt To get diagnostics 1 From the Help menu choose Get Diagnostics Information Get Diagnostics Information File Help Start Stop File Path Close Available Data Events Log Link Information Site Configuration Active Alarms Performance Monitor Monitor File Path d y DocumentsiDiagnostics Information txt Figure 9 1 Get Diagnostics Dialog Box 2 Select or deselect the data options If the file is to be sent to WBB Cus tomer Support leave all options checked 3 Click File Path to specify the folder in which you want to save the file and then click Start to save the information The file is saved in the specified folder as Diagnostics Informa tion txt Link Compatibility Link Compatibility indicates the version compatibility using software traps As new hardware or software is added to existing networks compatibility issues may arise An incompatibility issue is indicated to the user by a Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 2 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 change of color of the Link Status box on the Main Menu window Trap mes sages can be viewed in the Events Log indicate the problems or limitations and
120. ED uses eeneerescueuses 9 5 FIGURE 9 6 SITE PORT 2 SET TO LOOPBACK hav unvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnennnnennenn 9 5 FIGURE 9 7 EN NL 9 6 FIGURE 9 8 REMOTE REVERSE LOOPBACK anrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnennennnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnenn 9 6 FIGURE 9 9 REMOTE LINE LOOPBACK auunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 9 7 FIGURE 9 10 LOCAL REVERSE LOOPBACK anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnennnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnenn 9 7 FIGURE 9 11 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX snannnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnevnenn 9 9 FIGURE 9 12 BASIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT suunnunnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnennennennennennnne 9 10 FIGURE 9 13 A TYPICAL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT BASED ON 15 MINUTE INTERVALS9 10 FIGURE 9 14 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT SHOWING THE EFFECT OF A RESET 9 11 FIGURE 9 15 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX acccceccecceceeeeeesuveneeueenseneaeenesueas 9 13 FIGURE 9 16 EVENTS LOG DISPLAY cccceeceeeecceeeeeeeeeeesuesevereaeeaueuesevsueaneaneaeeaneneentas 9 15 FIGURE 9 17 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX EVENT TAB uunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 17 FIGURE 9 18 ACTIVE ALARMS SUMMARY csccsecscceceeeeaeeaecaeeceeaeeeeenvanvanvanvaneaueneeneenys 9 18 FIGURE 9 19 RECENT EVENTS UP TO LAST 256 EVENTS AT SITE A yavunennennenvenvnnnnnvnnenn 9 19 FIGURE 9 20 ADVANCED PREFERENCES sccsccscccceececeeansaccaeeceeneususneenvanvaseuseneunenneanys 9 19 FIGURE 10 1 INTERFERENCE CAUSED B
121. EE LE EEE sensi 3 6 Hardware Installation S ANCES cccsacactacevacsacxsaxeveiasvsdcssavniersaaeusieapaneauarpaant 3 6 MTT Ne G Preparing the ODU before Deployment rxarurrrrnrrarnavnnvnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnvnnunnnnnnnnene 3 7 PIOUS Tie ODU EE EE TE 3 7 Mounting external NN erat 3 8 Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices xrrrursrnevennvnnnnnvnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnennvnnnenennn 3 8 Ouod G 419 28 9 JE NE 3 9 Mador TS AO E A a aa 3 9 Installing IDU E and R UNItS s ssssssssssnsnnsnnnsnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnennnennennrnnnnnne 3 9 WUE RO a a a a a 3 9 EN 39 VENN 3 10 Connecting NTN 5 13 Connecting the ODU to the IDU ad 3 13 Installing a Link USING POE DEVICES siscicisisvecernvansiaiseicvaasvenaeesiieandltcsaaseierncees 3 13 Connecting User Equipment s ssssssssssssnssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 14 Connecting and Aligning ODUs Antennas ss 3 14 Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Installing the Link Manager Application uke 4 1 Minimum System Requirements cacisscitassestuskiSasensusiwsansnsnessenesamiaeaeucs teusastuesiaes 4 1 MATES NN avvek inni 4 1 Getting Started with the Link Manager ss 4 2 The Unk NNN 4 3 Log on Errors and OO a eee eae ee en oi 4 6 NN 4 6 NNN 4 6 NNN NNN 4 7 Invalid Read Write Community String sus d screens tam seen adienesei sis ii enr 4 7 Logging in to the Over the Air Site a xrxnrarrrrnrnnnnnrnnvnvnrnnvnvnrnrnnnnnnenevnnnennnnvnnne 4 7 Continuing without NT
122. ERENT BAND SELECTED ccccececceceecescesceceeueeueueeueeseeseeantansaeaaeuneas 20 4 FIGURE 20 5 CHANGE BAND CONFIRMATION cecceccecvecceccaceaeeevseusevanvarvansaeeeesevantantanes 20 4 FIGURE 20 6 MAIN WINDOW AFTER BAND CHANGE NEW BAND CIRCLED ccceceeceeveneeneas 20 5 FIGURE 20 7 USING THE OPERATIONS WINDOW TO ENTER A LICENSE KEY secceceeceeeeeeeeees 20 6 FIGURE 21 1 FRESNEL ZONE ssciticriactaciaatomeeecesnaleneaiurnacdaenines sew aa ddusiaduabdlan denemmed Ganlceianuaals 21 4 FIGURE 21 2 ACCESSING THE LINK BUDGET CALCULATOR suunnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennennnne 21 5 FIGURE 21 3 LINK BUDGET WINDOW iieisiedesninniceedsnanseressenrensenstnewiexaendeanedenentanneeeans 21 6 FIGURE 21 4 PRODUCT SELECTOR cccccececnescesneeccccenccneeneeneeseaceaeuaeeansananeassassacaueugeas 21 7 FIGURE 21 5 CHANNEL BANDWIDTH SELECTOR savnvanvnnnnnennennnnennennennennennennennnnnnnnnnennenn 21 7 FIGURE 21 6 RFP ETNE 21 8 FIGURE 21 7 RFP SELECTION GUIDE iasunvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnvnnnnnnnnne 21 8 FIGURE 21 8 RATE SELECTOR underarmen sak de sedan 21 9 FIGURE 21 9 CALCULATION OF DISTANCE FROM SITE COORDINATES ssecseceeveeveneeneannas 21 10 FIGURE 21 10 GMA C FACTORS ene 21 11 FIGURE 21 11 CLIMACTIC C FACTOR DESCRIPTION savunvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnne 21 12 FIGURE 21 12 WORLD MAP SHOWING C FACTOR CONTOURS iaunvanvnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnne 21 12 FIGURE 21 13 SERVICES SELECTOR eee 21 13 FIGURE 22 1 WIRELESS LINK LI
123. GURE 1 24 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS GRID ANTENNA secsecceceeeseeseusevaevansaevanseenenaneanes 1 15 FIGURE 1 25 LINK MANAGER WINDOW vannanvnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnenne 1 16 FIGURE 1 26 MENU NAVIGATION IN THE LINK MANAGER anennnnvnnvnnvnnvnnennennensennenennennenn 1 20 FIGURE 1 27 SITE CONFIGURATION WINDOW WITH OPEN MANAGEMENT PANEL ns 1 20 FIGURE 3 1 ODU MOUNTING KIT aounannvnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnenn 3 3 FIGURE 3 2 CONNECTORIZED ODU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS sunnennannnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnenn 3 3 FIGURE 3 3 INTEGRATED ODU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS ccccecceceeeeeeeeeseveneaeeeeeeeeeveneanes 3 4 FIGURE 3 4 IDU E R FRONT VIEW ccccececseveceeceueeeeeevavenentavaeeneeuatansneataneneeeaneneeuens 3 4 FIGURE 3 5 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE IDU C ETHERNET ONLY 3 4 FIGURE 3 6 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE IDU C 4 E1 T1 PORTS 3 5 FIGURE 3 7 IDU C PACKAGE CONTENTS THE MOUNTING KIT AND DC POWER PLUGS 3 5 FIGURE 3 8 POE 6 UNIT vincsacnsccintsaxcenanidpatacomnaneiciimniwniaaineneraninundeniadesdeondiieinensaenats 3 5 FIGURE 3 9 TYPICAL INSTALLATION WITH EXTERNAL ANTENNA LEFT WIRELESS MUX RIGHT WIRE CESSE E E ee E E 3 7 FIGURE 3 10 NEW STYLE IDU E REAR PANEL svsnvnnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnennenn 3 9 FIGURE 3 11 IDU R REAR PANEL nnssssnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 9 FIGURE 3 12 IDU C FRONT PANEL avanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenne
124. GURE 4 10 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OLD STYLE IDU E4 9 FIGURE 5 1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD unvanvnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnennnennennennnnnnennnnnennnnnnen 5 3 FIGURE 5 2 INSTALLATION WIZARD SYSTEM DIALOG BOX varuvnvnnnvnnnnnnnnenennnenennnnsnnnnnsnnn 5 4 FIGURE 5 3 INSTALLATION WIZARD SYSTEM DIALOG BOX FILLED OUT ssceseseneeeaveveeerars 5 5 FIGURE 5 4 CHANGE LINK PASSWORD DIALOG BOX auananvnnvnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnenn 5 6 FIGURE 5 5 LOST OR FORGOTTEN LINK PASSWORD RECOVERY iuuunannnnnennnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnen 5 6 FIGURE 5 6 CHANNEL SETTINGS AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION secsevecvecveveeeseeeeeanns 5 7 FIGURE 5 7 CHANNEL SETTINGS SHOWING AVAILABLE INSTALLATION RATES seceecseveeeeers 5 8 FIGURE 5 8 CHANNEL SETTINGS SHOWING AVAILABLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS seeeeeeeees 5 8 FIGURE 59 HSS SETTINGS aa 5 9 FIGURE 5 10 SERVICES AND RATES uavnnannnnnnnennnnnennennnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 5 10 FIGURE 5 11 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION sccceccsccescesccecescceccusceesceccesneeceeuausunanees 5 11 FIGURE 5 12 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION SEVEN SERVICES SELECTED secseeeevereaees 5 11 FIGURE 5 13 SERVICES AND RATES SERVICES CHOSEN suunennnnvnnnnnnnnvnnennennennnnnnnennnnnenn 5 12 FIGURE 5 14 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG AVAILABLE RATES cseceeeeceecverserseeeureneeneas 5 12 FIGURE 5 15 CHOOSING HOT STANDBY MODE iauavannnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnennnnnennennnnnennnnnnnnnnennenn 5 13 FIGURE
125. HSM at each GSU location the GSU can force the synchronization of its collocated radios By half RFD shifting alternate collocated sites can talk to each other Normal TX TX TX Phase i RX RX Shifted TX TX TX TX Phase RX RX RX Figure 11 3 Phase shifted transmission phase shift is 1 2 the RFD Choice of normal or shifted phase is configurable per GSU using the Link Manager GSU Redundancy The GSU is designed to support redundancy improving the robustness of a GSU based topology In redundancy mode two GSUs are installed at the same HSS site One of them self configures to generate HSS sync signals We will call it the Pri mary unit The other one the Secondary unit remains dormant merely poll ing the first GSU If the Primary GSU fails then the Secondary GSU becomes active immediately If the Primary unit becomes active again it remains dormant reversing the original roles The choice of the Primary GSU is random and of no significance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 3 GSU Kit Contents Chapter 11 If the Primary GSU fails and then the Secondary GSU also fails to receive sync signals from its GPS then it moves to self generation HSM mode like an ordinary HSM ODU until its GPS recovers GSU Primary Figure 11 4 Make the GSUs the first two collocated units Redundancy switching is completely transparent to the GSU managed links GSU Kit Contents The GSU package includes e 1 XG e 1
126. IDU C Test Equipment E Figure 9 7 Local Line Loopback Remote Reverse Loopback A remote reverse loopback can be set to test connection between the local and remote units and between the local E1 T1 port and its connection to the local user equipment In this mode data coming from the local user equipment is looped back at the remote side This loopback is initiated from a managing computer connected to the local unit IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Test Equipment ae Figure 9 8 Remote Reverse Loopback Remote Line Loopback The remote unit can be set to a line loopback to test the remote E1 T1 port and its connection to the remote side user equipment In this mode data Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 6 Local Internal Loopback Chapter 9 coming from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally This loopback is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit Test IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Figure 9 9 Remote Line Loopback Local Internal Loopback The local unit can be set to close a remote loopback to test connection between the local and remote units and between the remote E1 T1 port and its connection to the remote user equipment In this mode data com ing from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally This loop back is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit Test IDU C ODU ODU IDU C Figure 9 10 Local Reverse Loopback Reinstallin
127. IDU major Indicates that the IDU was disconnected Raised by both sides of the link Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDU Disconnected mismatchIDU major Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs Raised by the master only Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDUs Mismatch One Side is s and the Other is s s Is the type of the IDU openedServices normal Indicates that services were opened Raised by the master only Contains 3 parameters 1 Description n2 out of n1 Requested TDM Trunks have been Opened 2 n1 Is the requested number of TDM truncks 3 n2 Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were opened closedServices normal Indicates that services were closed Raised by the master only Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service has been closed The reason is s s Is the reason incompatibleODUs critical Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Incompatible ODUs incompatiblelDUs 10 major Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Incompatible IDUs incompatibleOduldu 11 major Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description The IDU could not be loaded The reason is s s Is the incompatibility type
128. Interface RSS dem Figure 5 14 Services and Rates dialog Available rates Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 12 Installation Chapter 5 gt To choose a modulation rate 1 Choose Adaptive or one of the available rates 2 Click Evaluate to continue or click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab to set the TDM Jitter Buffer see next section The service is activated as show below Please Wait Activating Service You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of Figure 5 14 Setting Monitored Hot Standby Mode If you are not using Hot Standby Mode you may skip this section To install and use the Hot Standby feature see 12 The following procedure can be used to switch links between primary and secondary or to disable the mode gt To set the Hot Standby Mode 1 Click the Hot Standby tab The following dialog appears Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Mode 0 Primary Secondary 8 Disabled Service has been evaluated Click Next bo continue IDU Product FC 16 BOOO FC H6 BOOO HW Version 3 3 Sy Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Evaluation Figure 5 15 Choosing Hot Standby Mode 2 Click the radio button to make this link primary or secondary Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 13 Inst
129. Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 E 3 Appendix F Reserved Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 F 1 Appendix G Regional Notice French Canadian Proc dures de s curit G n ralit s Avant de manipuler du mat riel connect des lignes lectriques ou de t l communications il est conseill de se d faire de bijoux ou de tout autre objet m tallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les l ments sous ten sion Mise a la terre Tous les produits WBB doivent tre mis a la terre pendant l usage courant La mise la terre est assur e en reliant la fiche d alimentation une prise de courant avec une protection de terre En outre e La cosse de masse sur l IDU C doit tre constamment connect e a la protection de terre par un c ble de diam tre de 18 AWG ou plus Le mat riel mont sur rack doit tre install seulement sur des racks ou armoires reli s la terre e Une ODU doit mise la terre par un cable de diam tre de 12 AWG ou plus e Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d interrupteurs sur la connection a la terre De plus e Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la d connecter en dernier e Il ne faut jamais connecter les cables de t l communication a du mat riel non la terre e Il faut s assurer que tous les autres cables sont d connect s avant de d connecter la terre Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 1 Protection contre la foudre Appendix G Protect
130. MonEthDayldx wbbOduPerfMonEthDayRxMBytes This table is indexed per Day number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day wbbOduPerfMonEthDayTxMBytes RO wbbOduPerfMonEthDayEthCapacityThreshUn der Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day The number of times throughput was below threshold each day wbbOduPerfMonEthDayHighTrafficThreshExc The number of times actual traffic was above eed threshold each day wbbOduPerfMonEthDayActiveSeconds The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet service was not blocked each day wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrT able N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveSeconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 10 1 1 Gauge Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalldx wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalldx This table is indexed per interval number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonTdmintervalActiveSeconds Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was activ
131. N csccecceceeeveceareceeueeeeeevsnteneanes 18 3 FIGURE 18 3 GROUNDING A TYPICAL WALL INSTALLATION ceccecseceeceeeeeeseeeneeneaneaeeeeeueas 18 4 FIGURE 18 4 ODU SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING seececeeceeceeeeeseveeeeneeneueeunsueas 18 4 FIGURE 18 5 TRANSTECTOR S SURGE SUPPRESSOR i auunnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnnnnene 18 5 FIGURE 18 6 SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING AT BUILDING ENTRY POINT sun 18 7 FIGURE 19 1 LOG ON WINDOW FOR LOCAL CONNECTION seccecseceeceeeeeesevcuveneaneueeueeneas 19 2 FIGURE 19 2 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ccceceeceeeeeeeeees 19 3 FIGURE 19 3 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ccccceeceeeeeeaceaeeaeeeeeeeseesevanvansaeeaeeeneneanes 19 3 FIGURE 19 4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ceeseeeeeveers 19 4 FIGURE 19 5 ODU WITH IP ADDRESSING CONFIGURED cceccecsececeeeeeeeseeseeaneaneeeueneneas 19 4 FIGURE 19 6 CONFIRMATION OF IP ADDRESS CHANGE anunnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnennennennennenennnnnenn 19 4 FIGURE 19 7 MAIN WINDOW AFTER IP ADDRESS CHANGE ccceceecceceeeeeeseeeneaneaneanennsnas 19 5 FIGURE 19 8 EXISTING IP ADDRESS DISPLAYED AFTER LOG ON WITH LOCAL CONNECTION 19 6 FIGURE 20 1 BECOMING INSTALLER anvannnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnnnennennennennnne 20 2 FIGURE 20 2 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO BAND CHANGE DEFAULT CIRCLED 20 3 FIGURE 20 3 CHANGE BAND DIALOG anannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnne 20 3 FIGURE 20 4 A DIFF
132. NEL savanennennvnnnnvnnennennennenennnnnennennennennennennnnnnnnene H 1 FIGURE H 3 IDU E AL WITH ALARMS PORT savsnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne H 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 xviii List of Tables TABLE 1 1 ODU SERIES TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS anannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnvnenn 1 8 TABLE 1 2 WIRELESS LINK FREQUENCY BANDS AND RADIO REGULATIONS csseceeseseneanears 1 8 TABLE 1 3 USER MANUAL GENERAL LAYOUT auunennennnnnnnvnnennennennennnnrnnennennennennennnnenne 1 17 TABLE 1 4 USER MANUAL LAYOUT ianannvnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennennnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnenne 1 17 TABLE 3 1 COMPONENTS OF AN IDU C FRONT PANEL esranvnnvnnennennennnnrnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnne 3 10 TABLE 3 2 IDU C AND IDU E R FRONT PANEL LEDS cccceceeeeeeeeeveveeseeavanseenvavares 3 11 TABLE 3 3 IDU C AND NEW STYLE IDU E FRONT PANEL LEDS FOR HSS cceeeeereuees 3 12 TABLE 4 1 PC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE LINK MANAGER APPLICATION sesseceeeeeeeeaveneaneare 4 1 TABLE 4 2 USER TYPES DEFAULT PASSWORDS AND FUNCTION ccceceeecseeeeeeeeneeeseaverarerens 4 5 TABLE 4 3 LINK MANAGER OFFLINE FUNCTIONALITY iauuvanvnnnnnennennennenennennennennennnnnnnennenn 4 7 TABLE 4 4 DEFAULT SETTINGS sawunvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnne 4 11 TABLE 5 1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD vannnnnvnnvnnnnnnennennnennnnnennennnennnnnennnnnnennnnnennnnnnen 5 2 TABLE 6 1 LINK MANAGER TOOLBAR cccecceccaceecea
133. NK SETUP iuunennennennenennennennennenennrnnennennennennenrnnennennenn 22 1 FIGURE 23 1 INACTIVE LINK Navn 23 1 FIGURE 23 2 BRS AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX usrunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 23 2 FIGURE 23 3 BRS CHANNEL SETTINGS PRE TRANSITION cceceeccececeeeeeeeseesevaneaneueeenentas 23 2 FIGURE 23 4 BRS CHANNEL SETTINGS POST TRANSITION cceceeceeceeeeeeseeeneeneaneaeeneueas 23 3 FIGURE 24 1 CASCADED LINK WITH TWO HOPS unnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnne 24 1 FIGURE 24 2 CONFIGURING AN IDU R IN A CASCADED LINK seccecseceveeeeeeeneeneeeeuneneeneas 24 2 FIGURE 25 1 COLLOCATED BASIC VS CONFIGURATION saunannannnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnne 25 1 FIGURE 25 2 VS SERVICES WINDOW FOR VS unvnnvnvnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnenenn 25 2 FIGURE 25 3 LINK MANAGER WINDOW FOR VS SHOWING ASYMMETRIC THROUGHPUT 25 2 FIGURE B 1 EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING THE ALARM CONNECTOR usecceeceeeeceeeueeeevaneaneeueeers B 4 FIGURE D 1 TOP LEVEL SECTIONS OF THE PRIVATE MIB rss D 3 FIGURE D 2 PRODUCT MIB LEFT WIRELESS LINK RIGHT WIRELESS MUX sceseseseeeeees D 3 FIGURE G 4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYL NE cececececececeucececeeeeecececeuacauauauauaususeeeeeeeeavaneuaes G 4 FIGURE G 5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR suunvunennnnvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnenenn G 5 FIGURE H 1 IDU E FRONT VIEW ccccccccccsccccccccuscesneccceaceenssceuaeuaneasseceuuseunseseuaeags H 1 FIGURE H 2 TYPICAL IDU E REAR PA
134. ODU Package Contents The ODU package contains e One DO see Figure 3 2 and Figure 3 3 below for front and rear view e An ODU mounting kit see Figure 3 1 below e ACD containing e the Link Manager e Quick Start Guide e User Manual the document you are reading e Link Budget Calculator e Label showing the MAC address and the alternative Community string The label is self adhesive You should keep this label safe e Cable glands to be used with the ODU IDU cable Figure 3 1 ODU Mounting kit pe Le Eai ODU Front View ODU Rear View Figure 3 2 Connectorized ODU Front and rear views Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 3 IDU E or IDU R package containing Chapter 3 ODU Front View ODU Rear View Figure 3 3 Integrated ODU Front and rear views IDU E or IDU R package containing e _IDU E or IDU R e AC DC Converter e IDU E wall mounting drilling template e Self adhesive label showing the IDU LED operation Figure 3 4 IDU E R front view IDU C Package Contents The IDU c package contains e IDU C see Figure 3 5 below e 19 rack mounting kit see Figure 3 7 below e Two DC power plugs for power cables see Figure 3 7 below aH ot ro CR Figure 3 5 IDU C Package contents the IDU C Ethernet only Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 4 PoE 8 Package Containing Chapter 3 i iij i DT i LT tay ETS _ SES we i ay a y a H mee
135. ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper signals e This ODU is a client Continue Tx but is not detecting signals e This ODU is a client Disable Tx and is detecting signals from multiple sources All orange cases transmit HSS is not activated HSS is not supported Disconnection between ODU and IDU gt To mount an IDU C 1 Attach the rack mounting brackets K to the IDU 2 Bolt the IDU into an empty slot in the rack ensuring that it sits securely 3 Ground the IDU to the rack using grounding lug I The IDU should be left permanently grounded E Instead of using the rack mounting brackets the IDU may be rail mounted PS using the four screw holes on each of its sides ote Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 12 Connecting power to the IDU Chapter 3 Connecting power to the IDU The IDU C has redundant power connection circuits items G and H in Figure 3 12 above An enlarged schematic of the power connectors is shown in below Figure 3 16 IDU C Power connectors The connectors are 3 pin in line female with polarities left to right minus ground plus To avoid damage to the IDU always use an AC DC adapter supplied by WBB Ensure that the IDUs at both sites are powered up The IDU E has a single three pin power connector the same as used on the IDU C The IDU R models have a two pin power connector and an AC DC adapter supplied by WBB Connecting the ODU to the I
136. ODUSs is displayed 3 Select the type of unit configuration from the drop down list 4 Select the appropriate RFP radio button Some RFP options may be dis abled depending on the bandwidth previously selected Take care to avoid incorrect configuration of bandwidth RFP or to set E multiple Hub Sync Masters as system interference can occur Link Manager er provides error messages and tool tips if the system is configured with Note mismatches Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 14 a Site Configuration and HSS Hub Site Configuration Operational States These settings will apply to both sites OE OCE Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Hub Sync Master R Hub Sync Client Continue Tx Hub Syne Client Disable Tx Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 i Eth Eth Oa Best Fit Fit B Best Fit Fit C Best Fit D Best OE i i Fit Fit Chapter 10 Hub Site Configuration Operational States These settings will apply to both sites a On Hub Sync Master v IndependentUnit Radio Frame Pattern RFP Configuration Channel Bandwidth MHz o 20 40 TDM Eth Eth Fit Fit Fit Fit Best Best Best Best D GE Radio Frame Pattern selection depends on the Channel BW and Service Sadio Frame Pattern selection depends on the Channel BW and Service Status B Operation Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Synchronization N A N A External Pulse
137. OduAirT otalFrames 11 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 2 1000 1 5 9 2 Counter Ro Tren Number Total Number of received radio frames received radio frames wbbOduAirBadFrames kai 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 3 on ba Mi number ed eee received radio frames with CRC error wbbOduAirCurrentRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 4 Integer Deprecated parameter Actual rate of the air interface in Mbps For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively wbbOduAirCurrentRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 9 5 RO Index of current air rate wbbOduAirTxPower36 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 10 Integer La Deprecated parameter Actual behavior is read only wbbOduAirTxPower48 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 11 Integer RW Deprecated parameter Actual behavior is read only wbbOduAirCurrentT xPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 12 Integer Current Transmit Power in dBm This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation wbbOduAirMinFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 13 RO Minimum center frequency in MHz wbbOduAirMaxFrequency 11 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 14 1000 1 5 14 Integer ao tise center Maximum center frequency in MHz in MHZ wbbOduAirFreqResolution eat eee 1000 1 5 15 O bl le E Frequency resolution Measured in MHz if value lt 100 otherwise in KHz wbbOduAirCurrentFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 16 Integer Current Center Frequency Measured in MHz if center frequency resolution value lt 100 o
138. On to have the buzzer beep continuously or Auto to have the buzzer beep only in install mode Configuration with Telnet A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the Wireless Link To start a Telnet session use telnet lt ODU_IP gt For example if you run Telnet as follows telnet 192 168 2 101 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 25 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8 you will be asked for a user name and password The Telnet log on user name isthe password that you used to enter the Link Manager for example the default admin The Telnet password is the corresponding Community string default netman sa Telnet 192 168 2 101 login admin Password Hello admin welcome to ODU Management CLI admin i92 168 2 161 gt Type help for help admin 192 168 2 181 gt m Figure 8 22 Telnet session log on A Read Only Community string allows display only whereas a Read Write Community string allows display and set commands Supported Telnet commands are shown in Table 8 2 Note that some of the commands are model specific For example TDM commands will not apply to Ethernet only and PoE based links Table 8 2 Telnet Commands Summary Command display inventory display management display link display ethernet display tdm display ntp display PM lt interface AIR LAN1 LAN2 TDM1 TDM2 1TDM4 gt lt interval current day month gt set ip lt ipaddr gt lt subnetMask gt
139. Protocol In addition the MIB uses internally the older notions of Local site and Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B To avoid burdening the reader this appendix will follow the MIB usage Interface API Control Method The Link Manager application provides all the means to configure and mon itor a Wireless Link link communicating with the SNMP agent in each ODU Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the IDUs and ODUs in the link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 1 Community String Appendix D Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprietary protocol im Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address Note To control and configure the device using the MIB you should adhere to the following rules The connection for control and configuration is to the local site over any SNMP UDP IP network All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs Note that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air comection To correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of the ODUS Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to configure the local site For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be taken before the new value is loaded Please refer to the operation in the parameters description Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent It is strongly recommend u
140. RON Ethernet Throughput Mbps 4 Site Location Radio Interface IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Probing Channel 5 510 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 30 03 2009 15 11 01 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure 16 3 The local ODU after activation Probing Notice that the Link ID is shown in the Link details pane circled 9 Repeat the above procedure for the remote ODU ensuring that in the Air Interface window that you enter exactly the same Link ID but this time that you check the Slave radio button If both ODUs are powered up after a minute or so a link will be estab lished If you are still connected to the remote site from the previous steps the window of Figure 16 3 will look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 3 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Chapter 16 Link Manager 192 168 2 102 Installer BK File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help pE x amp P Link Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link Location Location Location Link ID EBG 20561334 Services Ethernet Only Frequency GHz 5 580 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adapt
141. Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Link Link Budget RicsercennT M 20 MHz off Auta M 5 8 GHz he d8m 4 16 22 dB 22 dB ME e dE 38 dBm 16 3 Wat 0 1 Km 01 Miles 48 8 Km I 30 3 Miles Expected Performance ss km m TEEN 81 dBm 6 dB RTE Mod C 2 Ethernet Only SA 98 2074 avail pee l2 minea very Difficult C 6 1 6 Mbl Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure 21 10 Climactic C Factors For help about what these mean cick the button to the right of the list in Figure 21 10 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 11 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 Link B Link Budget Link Link Budget Product RIGSSSFCCANT hi Channel RFP Frequency 20 Mhe M Auto BE 5 8 GHz Rate sms BPSKOTS V Tx Power he dBm 4 16 Tx Antenna Gain 22 dB Climate Terrain Rx Antenna Gain 22 dB Factor Cable Loss Mr Fade Margin e dE Tx Power EIRP 38 dBm I 6 3 Watt hin Range 0 1 Em 0 1 Miles Max Range 45 8 Em 30 35 Miles Expected Performance Moderate Moderate terrain C DistancelClimate 488 Em w Coordinates Good C 0 25 Expected RSS Fade Margin 81 dBm 6 dE Services Ethernet Only 8 98 2074 availability downtime 42 minivea Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 6 Mbfs Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter
142. SE 140000 010 ENE EE NE 14 1 VLAN Background Information on the WEB x arxnxarnvnvnnvnrnvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 14 1 ENE 090 ERE EEE EEE TET EN 14 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 QinQ Double Tagging for Service Providers viceccececcceueceeeeseeeeaneeeneeeenegeentanes 14 2 PANGO rinii E RE ae ne RE 14 2 Port Functionality EEE EEE A AATAS ENAN AAi 14 2 a E EE A EE 14 4 Pares MONO EE ET e TT 14 4 VEAN ETE EE EE EE ao 14 6 VLAN Configuration Using the Link Manager 14 6 Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation nn 14 7 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration xxxsxaxarxnrnrannrnnrarnrnnvnvnnnene 14 7 Chapter 15 Software Upgrade What is the Software Upgrade Utility 15 1 Uporadina EN E 15 1 Software Update for OS EE anne en 15 5 Chapter 16 FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure FEL OHZ ENKS FUN Gen 16 1 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation 16 1 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link COMMON vassere 16 4 Part 4 Field Installation Topics Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation ODU Moun ng Kit CONTENTS EEE EEE 17 1 Mounting an ODU On PR a a re dre 17 2 MTT 17 3 Mounting an External Antenna ae 17 3 Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally 17 4 Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Grounding for Antenna AU a ae dan id 18 1 Grounding for Indoor Outdoor UnItS nanas ascenseurs 18 2 I 0 A 18 2 Te EEE NE EE 18 2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding 18
143. Sheet 4 of 5 Name Bevery Bescon ooo externalAlarmInPort1 Clear 205 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 1 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 1 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared 206 externalAlarmInPort2Clear normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 2 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 2 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared lanPort1 Clear 209 normal Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description LAN port 1 status changed to connected S 2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description LAN port 2 status changed to connected S 2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex lanPort2Clear 210 normal mngPortClear 211 normal Indicates the management port status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description Management port status changed to connected s 2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex externalAlarminPort3Clear normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 3 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 3 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared normal swVersionsMatchFullCompa
144. Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 16 of 18 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 17 of 18 mi m PT wbblduTdmLineStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 6 1 10 wbblduTdmCurrentTable N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table wbblduTdmCurrentEntry N A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry INDEX wbblduTdmCurrentindex wbblduTdmCurrentindex RO Table index Same as wbblduTdmLinelndex wbblduTdmCurrentBlocks 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line 1 wbblduTdmCurrentDrops 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 a Number of error blocks transmitted to the line 2 wbblduTdmCurrentTxClock 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 Integer RW TDM Transmit Clock A change is effective after 3 re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 7 1 10 ss bag High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks 4 wbblduTdmRemoteQual 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 8 Integer Estimated average interval between error second events The valid values are 1 2131 where a value of 1 is used to indicate an undefined state wbblduTdmRemoteQualEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 9 Integer Estimated average interval between error second events during evaluation process The valid values are 1 2131 where a value of 1 is used to indicate an undefined state wbblduTdmSrvEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 10 Integer RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask
145. The ODU is the radio transceiver of the Wireless Link system and is the main component of the system The ODU connects to an antenna that enables radio communication and can be mounted on a pole or wall The ODU connects to the IDU via a CAT5e cable ODUs are available in different frequencies and regulations in the ranges 2 3 2 7GHz 4 9 6GHz The ODU comes in two different form factors as shown in Figure 1 8 below depending on the type of antenna e ODU with integrated 1ft flat panel antenna Integrated Antenna ODU This unit contains both the ODU and antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof casing e ODU with a connector for an external antenna Connectorized ODU The unit is fitted with an N type connector An external antenna can extend the range of the link and in some cases may help to reduce environmental interferences Connectorized oO D s O 0p D Figure 1 8 ODU Form Factors e Integrated Antenna ODU This ODU has an integrated 370mm 1 2ft flat panel antenna The ODU contains both the radio and the antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof case e Connectorized ODU Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 7 The Outdoor Unit ODU Chapter 1 This ODU has one N type connector for connecting an external antenna There are four series of Wireless Link ODU s e Wireless Link Access e Wireless Link VS e Wireless Link e Wireless Link High End The followin
146. This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Performs preliminary configuration of the system This button is disabled after Link Installation the link is installed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 2 Main Menu Functionality Chapter 6 Table 6 1 Link Manager Toolbar Continued Site lt Site 1 name gt Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 1 Same as Configuration 1 Configure lt Site 1 name gt Site lt Site 2 name gt Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 2 Same as Configuration 2 Configure lt Site 2 name gt CCC eo Ce e o enese OO Main Menu Functionality The main menu contains the following items File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help The Link Manager menu functionality is displayed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Link Manager main menu functionality Return to log on dialog Same as Log Off button Exit the Link Manager Same as Exit button Run the Configuration Wizard Not Pink Contiguration Bo available in Installation Mode spel Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 1 Has a path to return to Installation Mode Configuration Chapter 8 Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 2 Has a path to return to Installation Mode g Runs the Installation Wizard Not Link Installation available in Configuration Mode 1 Configure lt Site 1 name gt 2 Configure lt Site 2 name gt Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 3
147. Y COLLOCATED UNITS cecseceeceevseeeeveneeneeeeaeeneeueas 10 2 FIGURE 10 2 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION 1 10 2 FIGURE 10 3 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION 2 cccececeeeeeeeees 10 2 FIGURE 10 4 HSS INTERCONNECTION UNIT cccscescescceccccccesceanennenneaneacsacsaenesaneaneases 10 3 FIGURE 10 5 HSS WIRING SCHEMATIC avanvnnvnnennnnvnnnnnvnnennennenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 10 4 FIGURE 10 6 HSS SYNC SIGNAL PATH WITH ODU 1 AS HSS MASTER 10 5 FIGURE 10 7 CASCADING TWO HSS UNITS sssssansssunnnnunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 10 5 FIGURE 10 8 CASCADING THREE HSS UNITS cccecceevecceeeaceeeseeseesevsuvanvansaeeeeeevantantanss 10 6 FIGURE 10 9 ODU BEEP FOR HSS ERROR sranvanvnnennnnrnnrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnne 10 7 FIGURE 10 10 RADIO FRAME PATTERN aneassencosscnncesenstegeatestacetastennceiancees 10 8 FIGURE 10 11 SERVICES AND RATES WIRELESS Mux 100 MASTER WIRELESS Mux CLIENTS10 10 FIGURE 10 12 SERVICES AND RATES WIRELESS Mux 100 MASTER WIRELESS MUX CLIENTS EXTREME A AMET RUG OC ANON settee ee da cena a ea a en ee aa 10 11 FIGURE 10 13 HSS SETTINGS LEFT WIRELESS LINK CLIENT RIGHT WIRELESS MUX MASTER10 13 FIGURE 10 14 HUB SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG LEFT WIRELESS LINK RIGHT WIRELESS Mux10 15 FIGURE 10 15 SITE CONFIGURATION HSS LEFT WIRELESS LINK CLIENT RIGHT WIRELESS MUX MASTER NN 10 15 FIGURE 10 16 HSS NOT SUPPORTED uaa
148. a RAKA EAER ANA pene E 2 FN E 3 Appendix F Reserved Appendix G Regional Notice French Canadian VERNE G 1 EL DES OR G 1 JE RE aanea NE Fin G 1 NNN Te G 2 Pr cautions de s curit pendant le montage de ODU UN G 2 Connecter la terre IDU C AEE sta NN G 3 Installation suf pyione GO EE EE G 3 Contenu du kit de montage ODU jn coscteevvsvdisineieinaaniesecsssaiaienomeuseereveneaenentioas G 3 Montage SOT Un NE Vase sde teens mecs bnaehso ce tunis G 4 Momage EEE ERE EKE ENE G 5 Montage d une antenne externe ssssssssssssssssnssessnnsnnnsnnnenennnnnnnnnernnenurnnrennenne G 6 Contenu du kit de montage d une antenne externe sens G 6 Appendix H Old Style IDU E Details Index Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 xiii List of Figures FIGURE 1 1 TYPICAL CELLULAR BACKHAUL APPLICATION cceccecscceceucesceauvaneanseeseeenesntanes 1 2 FIGURE 1 2 TYPICAL BROADBAND ACCESS APPLICATION suuunannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnnenn 1 3 FIGURE 1 3 TYPICAL WIFI BACKHAUL APPLICATION suunnnnannnnnnnnnnennennennnnennennennennennnnnnnenn 1 3 FIGURE 1 4 MULTI POINT TO POINT VIDEO SURVEILLANCE DEPLOYMENT ccecseceeeseeeeeeers 1 3 FIGURE 1 5 PRIVATE NETWORK wntsiciancccsavsntvamidtedavacnnsnvencuwsdudeenndieiewsanbaasecewneeationewes 1 4 FIGURE 1 6 MULTI POINT TO POINT ENTERPRISE CONNECTIVITY ccecceeeeevecvereaneaeseveneanes 1 4 FIGURE 1 7 EXAMPLE OF LINK ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM COMPONENTS secseceeceeeeeeeeventanes 1 6 FIGURE 1 8 ODU FORM FACTORS
149. a device reset and is incremented upon each change in the wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTable either an addition or removal of an entry wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTable N A This table includes the currently active alarms When a RAISED trap is sent an alarm entry is added to the table When a CLEAR trap is sent the entry is removed wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmEntry N A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED trap INDEX wobOduAgnCurrAlarmCounter wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmCounter 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 1 Integer A running counter of active alarms The counter is incremented for every new RAISED trap It is cleared after a device reset wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity 1 3 6 1 41 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 2 Integer RO Current Alarm severity wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmid 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 3 Integer Unique Alarm Identifier combines alarm type and interface The same Alarmid is used for RAISED and CLEARED alarms 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 4 Integer Interface Index where the alarm occurred Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value 65535 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmUnit 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 5 Integer RO Unit associated with the alarm wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 6 Integer ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm was raised wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 7 Integer Timestamp of this alarm This number is in seconds fr
150. a stream wbbOduAirDualAntTxMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 58 Integer RW Description Transmission type when using Dual radios MIMO or AdvancedDiversity using one stream of data wbbOduAirTxOperationMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 59 Integer RW This parameter controls the Operation mode of frames sent over the air The Operation mode is either normal 1 for regular transmission where frame size is determined by the traffic or throughput test 2 when the user requests an actual over the air throughput estimation using full frames The latter lasts no more than a predetermined interval default 30 sec wbbOduAirDesiredNetMasterT xRatio 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 60 1 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element manager provided with the product wbbOduAirCurrentNetMasterTxRatio 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 60 2 Integer RO Represents the actual Net Master Tx RAtio wbbOduAirMinUsableMasterTxRatio 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 60 3 Integer Represents the minimal value the user can configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio wbbOduAirMaxUsableMasterTxRatio 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 60 4 Integer Represents the maximal value the user can configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio wbbOduAirAccumulatedUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 61 Integer Accumulates the Unavailable seconds of the Air Interface wbbOduPerfMonCurrTable N A This table defines keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonCurrEntry N A This is
151. ajor The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 4 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 4 lt User Text gt Alarm 113 major Release 1 9 30 D 25 Trap Parameters Appendix D Table D 3 MIB Traps Sheet 3 of 5 fame YB seig oser oo swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with full link functionality Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch full link functionality 115 swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm minor The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch restricted link functionality swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgradeRequired major The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software versions mismatch Software upgrade required swVersionsincompatible critical The trap is sent if SW versions are incompatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description SW Versions incompatible hssMultipleSourcesDetectedAlarm hssSyncToProperSourceStoppedAlarm major 124 major Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources were detected Contains a single parameter which is its
152. allation Chapter 5 Ethernet Ring To install and use the Ethernet Ring feature see 13 Setting the TDM Jitter Buffer gt To set the TDM Jitter Buffer size 1 Click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab The following dialog appears Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TOM Jitter Buffer Hat Standby Ring i B Sze ms ses ms A Han Change FO fer Sue 378 vil affect re TOA cer IDU B Product FC 16 BOOO FC H16 BOOO HW Version 3 3 Sy Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Cancel Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 16 TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration B3 e The receiver jitter buffer for each site can be enlarged thereby increasing system resistance to interference the Note larger the jitter buffer the longer the interference period that the system will overcome without TDM errors e You can also decrease the jitter buffer to decrease the sys tem delay e The jitter buffer can be configured between 2 0 and 16 0 ms e After setting the new value you must evaluate the expected quality During the evaluation the ETBE Expectecd Time Between Errors bar is displayed You select either Next which performs the change or Back to cancel the change Notice that the Jitter Buffer is configured per site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 14 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rat
153. allation Configuration e Possible scenarios are shown in Table 10 4 Whenever Asymmetric Allocation is available it is static for all traffic conditions Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 11 RFP Wireless Link Considerations Chapter 10 Table 10 4 Asymmetric Allocation with Collocated Links Scenarios 199 GHICIT Wireless Link Link Releases prior to 2 4 Link down Release 2 4 later Wire less Mux PDH and Wire Change master to less Mux 50 series Release 2 4 and later Wireless Wireless tue asymmetric allocation Link down Mux 100 series Asymmetric Release 2 4 and later Allocation slider visible but Wireless Mux 100 cannot be changed series TDM services stopped link set to transmission ratio of master Wireless Link Link Wireless M es n client to Asymmetric a Slider You cannot a this peti asymmetric not displayed Wireless Link Link Wireless M client to Asymmetric slider You cannot ee this PRET asymmetric not displayed RFP Wireless Link Considerations e When Wireless Link radios are collocated with Wireless Mux radios using HSS all radios must use RFP B or E e The performance of Wireless Link radios that operate with these RFPs can be seen in the Link Budget Calculator e The choice of the unit to be the HSS master is a matter of conve nience There is no technical reason to prefer a Wireless Link over a Wireless Mux as HSS master or vice versa It is however recom mende
154. ame RFP transmit one half a RFD apart see Figure 11 3 above 2 Setting the Tx Transmission Ratio Since the GSU is always HSM it must be able to cater for hub site Wire less Mux 100 based links See the Wireless Mux User Manual Chapter 5 If you use asymmetric allocation shifted transmission phase becomes unavailable and you cannot cascade links as described in step 1 3 Choosing the Transmission Phase Chose the Transmission Phase in accordance with considerations in step 1 above If you choose Shifted Phase then the Asymmetric Ratio selector is disabled Site Configuration Management Site Configuration Location File Help Backup Restore y Refresh System Management FSA 22 GPS Sync Unit Network Parameters VLAN Protocol r Management IP Address 192 168 222 20 Inventory R Security Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Date amp Time Default Gateway 192 168 223 18 Oo Advanced Trap Destination IP Address 192 168 223 18 192 168 223 147 192 168 221 40 192 168 221 99 192 168 223 139 192 168 221 86 192 168 221 113 192 168 223 122 192 168 223 37 0 0 0 0 I Operations Figure 11 9 Site Configuration Management Here you set the GSU IP address subnet mask and gateway You also set trap addresses here It is identical to the corresponding panel for Wireless Link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 9 Configuring the
155. an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonCurrUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 1 Gauge The current number of Unavailable Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrES 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 2 Gauge Current number of Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrSES 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 3 Gauge Current number of Severely Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrBBE 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 4 Gauge Current number of Background Block Errors starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonCurrintegrity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 1 1 5 Integer RO Indicates the integrity of the entry wbbOduPerfMonintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonintervalEntry N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonintervalldx wbbOduPerfMonintervalldx This table is indexed per interval number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonintervalUAS Fo The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonIntervalES Current number of Errored Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonIntervalSES Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval wbbOduPerfMonIntervalBBE PR Current number of Background Block Errors per Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters S
156. ance with NEC Sections 725 54 c and 800 30 In all other cases an appropriate Listed Primary Protector must be provided Refer to Articles 800 and 810 of the NEC for details 2 For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes appropriate requirements of NFPA 780 should be considered in addition to NEC 3 For Canada appropriate requirements of the CEC 22 1 including Section 60 and additional requirements of CAN CSA B72 must be considered as applicable Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 IV Brief Table of Contents Part 1 Basic Installation Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Site Preparation Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Chapter 5 Installing the Link Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window Chapter 7 Configuring the Link Chapter 8 Site Configuration Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics Part 2 Site Synchronization Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization Chapter 11 Using the WBB GSU Part 3 Advanced Installation Chapter 12 Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure Chapter 13 The WBB Ethernet Ring Chapter 14 VLAN Functionality with Wireless Link Chapter 15 Software Upgrade Chapter 16 FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure Part 4 Field Installation Topics Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Chapter 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address Chapter 20 Changing the Factory Default Band Chapter 21 Link Budget Calculator P
157. ange Date and Time If you used an NTP Server you will see a window like this Site Configuration A File Actions Help 3 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Date amp Time Q ir Interface 2 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time Offset Minutes 00 00 HH mm e Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services XX External Alarms Date amp Time 01 09 200518 14 38 I Operations NTP Server Figure 8 13 Date and Time configured from an NTP Server 8 Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog Ethernet Properties Configuring the Bridge Bridge configuration is required in various network topologies such as pro tection Ethernet 1 1 and ring applications The bridge configuration parameters are located under the Advanced tab of the Site Configuration dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 15 Configuring the Bridge Chapter 8 Site Configuration File Actions Help ti CRE Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Q ir Interface Hub Site Sync ODU Mode Bridge B Management Inventory Bridge Configuration IDU Aging Time sec R Security Ethernet Ports Configuration Date amp Time Ss a Mode 00 Radio Link Far Action Le Advanced opu 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect No Action Ethernet LAN 1 100Mbps Full Duplex Auto Detect v No Action v E TDM Servi
158. antenna Figure D 2 Product MIB Left Wireless Link Right Wireless Mux The ODU MIB contains the sections Admin Service Ethernet Bridge Air PerfMon and Agent The IDU MIB contains the sections Admin Service Ethernet Bridge and TDM The GpsSynchronizerFamily MIB defines the GSU The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps as a trap description parameter MIB Parameters Wireless Link User Manual The following section describes all of the MIB parameters The MIB parame ters follow the following naming convention lt wbb gt lt Section 1 gt lt Section n gt lt Parameter Name gt Release 1 9 30 D 3 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Appendix D For each of the configuration and control parameters parameters with read write access the Description column describes when the new value is effective It is recommended that you perform the appropriate action to make the values affective immediately after any change Where a change is required on both sides of the link it is recommended that you change both sides of the link first and then perform the action Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Table D 1 Supported RFC 1213 Variables Sheet 1 of 2 1361212212 DisplayString A unique value for each interface lts value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber The value for each interface must remain constant at least from one re initialization of the entity s n
159. art 5 Product Dependent Features Chapter 22 AIND Alignment Chapter 23 BRS Installation Procedure Chapter 24 Cascaded Links Chapter 25 Video Surveillance Part 6 Product Reference Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix B Wiring Specifications Appendix C Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver Appendix D MIB Reference Appendix E External Alarms Specification Appendix F Reserved Appendix G Regional Notice French Canadian Appendix H Old Style IDU E Details Index Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Full Table of Contents Ne gt EE EO ds i FN NN li Regulatory COMPARER 2 ses ennns anne anene ns send banane steam s ads ne ten Il Part 1 Basic Installation Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to Wireless Link ns scies ners sosie timenssissss 1 1 DUN NN 1 1 Koy ABD IG SUF EE EE eirinen 1 2 NN 1 2 Broadband ACCESS EEE RE EE 1 2 Video Surveillance NE 1 3 PAT AVS CR 1 4 Key Features of Wireless Nenne 1 4 SE GE EE a 1 6 TE OUTOON U ODO RER D TS 1 7 AIND All Indoor Unit EE 1 9 The ndor UME IDU aa 1 9 New style IDU E for both Wireless Link and Wireless MUX ccsceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 1 TART TE A TTT 1 10 DU renare E ane D E Re 1 10 Power Over Ethernet POE Devices rurrarnnrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenenn 1 11 PTE TG 1 11 EEE EEE EN ENE 1 12 pr RS SE TTT 1 13 FUNN 1 14 PUR NNN 1 14 ET dn EE EE EE EE ER noie 1 15 TG GE EE EEE EE EA 1 15 a E RE I a EE 1 16 Documentation supplied with Wir
160. ase 1 9 30 A 2 IDU Appendix A Table A 4 Power Power Feeding Dual feeding 20 to 60 VDC AC DC converter is available Port milie elaine Power Consumption with IDU See IDU specifications this Appendix Table A 5 Configuration ODU Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna or Connectorized for External Architecture Antenna IDU Indoor Unit for service interfaces or PoE device for Ethernet only ODU to IDU PoE Interface Outdoor CAT 5e cable Maximum cable length 100 m Table A 6 Management Management Application per link Link Manager Table A Z Environmental Operating Temperatures ODU 35 C to 60 C 31 F to 140 F Humidity ODU Up to 100 non condensing IP67 Table A 8 Safety FCC IC cTUVus UL 60950 1 UL 60950 22 CAN CSA C22 2 60950 1 CAN CSA C22 2 60950 22 ETSI IEC EN IEC 60950 1 EN IEC 60950 22 Table A 9 EMC IDU The following specifications are for most part common to both IDU C and new style IDU E products Differences are pointed out in the tables Table A 10 TDM Interface Number of ports 16 8 4 ports or no TDM ports 2 or no TDM port Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 3 IDU Appendix A Table A 10 TDM Interface Continued a a CC e am E1 HDB3 2 048 Mbps T1 B8ZS AMI 1 544 Mbps E1 1200 balanced T1 100Q balanced Jitter amp Wander According to ITU T G 823 G 824 Jitter Buffer Jitter Buffer configuration enabling a latency from 5msec
161. ational each ODU sends traps originating from both Site A and Site B The source IP address of the trap is the sending ODU The trap originator can be identified by the trap Community string or by the trap description text Each trap contains a trap description and additional relevant information such as alarm severity interface index time stamp and additional parame ters Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 23 Trap Parameters Appendix D Trap Parameters Table D 3 MIB Traps Sheet 1 of 5 mme IB sy bein trunkStateChanged 1 normal Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks Raised by both sides of the link Contains 3 parameters 1 Description TDM Interface nN x 2 n Is the trunk number 3 x Is the alarm type and can be one of the following Normal AIS LOS Loopback linkUp 2 normal Indicates that the radio link is up Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radio Link Sync on channel n GHz n Is the channel frequency in GHz linkDown 3 critical Indicates that the radio link is down Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Radio Link Out of Sync The reason is s s Is the reason detectIDU 4 normal Indicates that the IDU was detected Raised by both sides of the link Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description IDU of Type s was Detected s Is the type of the IDU disconnect
162. avior during a ring failure and recovery cycle Lind Es iji ami blocked Link la p am Link l mewn bisc ked i Figure 13 1 Ring Protection mechanism The steps below follow the numbering in Figure 13 1 1 Normal operation Ethernet traffic runs in the ring but does not pass through the RPL which is blocked The RPL does however broadcast RPM packets through the ring 2 Ring Link down RPL notified Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 2 Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by WBB Chapter 13 The RPL detects a link down condition by the non arrival of an RPM packet It remains blocked for the Minimum time for failure detec tion which is configurable using the Link Manager see page 13 9 3 Ring Link down RPL unblocked for traffic The RPL unblocks for Ethernet traffic after the Minimum time for fail ure detection expires and no RPM message has been received 4 Ring Link restored but still blocked for traffic The Ring Link is restored but remains blocked for the Minimum time for recovery set using the Link Manager to avoid rapid fluctuations leading to potential short term loops see page 13 9 5 Ring Link restored RPL blocked for traffic The RPL blocks to Ethernet traffic after the Minimum time for recov ery expires and restores Ethernet traffic to the Ring Link with a special RPM packet Return to 1 Ring Link restored RPL blocked for traffic The ring is back to normal operat
163. aximum Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond wbblduTdmJitterBufferSizeEval 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 17 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size The units are 0 1 x millisecond ebidvT mtneSiawS r261412060210002620 Deaysums RO unes bbiduTEnFetStandbyOpeatonsiaus TETE 100202 ieor RO Tre naai ss Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 22 MIB Traps Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 18 of 18 wbblduTdmBackupLinkConfiguration 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 24 The current configuration of the backup link wbbGeneralTrapDescription 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 1 DisplayString RO Trap s Description Used for Trap parameters wbbGeneralTrapSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 2 Integer RO Trap s Severity Used for Trap parameters wbbGeneralCookie 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product used for saving user preferences affecting ODU operation wbbGeneralEcChangesCounter 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 4 Integer This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each element constant write operation via SNMP or Telnet wbbGeneralTelnetSupport 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 100 5 Enable Disable Telnet protocol MIB Traps General Each ODU can be configured wth up to 10 different trap destinations When the link is oper
164. bbOduAdmHostsindex wbbOduAdmHostsindex RO Trap destinations table index wbbOduAdmHostsip 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 12 1 2 IpAddress RW Trap destination IP address A change is effective immediately wbbOduAdmHostsPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 12 1 3 Integer RW UDP port of the trap destination A change is effective immediately wbbOduBuzzerAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 13 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode A change is effective immediately The valid values are disabled 0 enabledAuto 1 enabledConstantly 2 2 wbbOduProductld 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 14 DisplayString This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product wbbOduReadCommunity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 15 DisplayString RW Read Community String This parameter always returns when retrieving its value It is used by the Manager application to change the Read Community String The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values wbbOduReadWriteCommunity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 16 DisplayString Read Write Community String This parameter R always returns when retrieving its value Itis used by the Manager application to change the Read Write Community String The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values the Manager application to change the Trap Community String The SNMP agent accepts only wbbOduTrapCommunity 1
165. bbiduEthernetlfindex RO If Index corresponding to this Interface nen 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 1 1 5 DisplayString RO IDU MAC address wbbiduEthernetNumOfLanPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 3 Integer RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU wbblduEthernetNumOfSfpPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 4 Integer RO The number of SFP interfaces in the IDU wbblduEthernetSfpProperties 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 3 5 DisplayString bad SFP venfor properties Vendor Name PN and Revision wbblduBridgeT pAging 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 4 4 2 Integer RW Timeout in seconds for aging Note that for this parameter to be effective the ODU must be configured to HUB mode A change is effective immediately wbblduTdmTxClockAvailStates 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 1 Integer Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit When the state is available the bit value is 1 When the state is unavailable the bit value is 0 The available states are bit 2 Transparent bit 3 Local Loop Timed bit 4 Remote Loop Timed bit 5 Local Internal bit 6 Remote Internal wbblduTdmTxClockDesiredState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 2 Integer RW Required state ofthe TDM Transmit Clock Control A change is effective after re activation of the TDM service wbblduTdmTxClockActualState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 6 1 3 Integer RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control wbblduTdmMasterClockAvailOptions 1 3 6 1 4 1 296
166. be tall buildings RF towers or transmitters which could cause interference to the link 4 Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as e High ground hills or mountains e Lakes or large bodies of water Water has a reflection effect on RF Signals like a building This type of reflection causes the received amplitude to be reduced As a rule of thumb the presence of a large body of water between the link sites may double the required antenna height 5 Determine and record the compass bearings between both ODUs rela tive to north 6 If there are obstructions between the two sites calculate the Fresnel Zone see 21 for details 7 If the site chosen does not meet requirements consider alternative sites Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 2 2 Stage 2 Physical Survey Chapter 2 8 Use the Link Budget Calculator on the CD supplied with the equipment or using the Link Manager to determine the expected performance Stage 2 Physical Survey The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed installa tion location to ensure that the link sites are suitable for the wireless net work The results of the physical site survey should be recorded E It is advisable to go on a clear day so you can more easily see any Fr obstructions between the two sites ote gt To perform a physical survey 1 From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey find the azi muth horizontal
167. ble If you do not following the next reset of the updated site you could experience a link software mismatch which may affect service See page 9 3 for details Software Update for GSUs All GSUs in a distributed site can be updated simultaneously Use an IP list as described above Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 15 5 Chapter 16 FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Links Background The FCC IC regulation for 5 4 5 3 GHz allows unlicensed wireless data equipment provided that it does not interrupt radar services If radar activ ity is detected the equipment must automatically change frequency chan nel This feature is termed Dynamic Frequency Selection DFS According to the standard a channel with active radar is prohibited from use for 30 minutes Before using a channel for transmission the radio equipment must probe it for radar signals for a period of 60 seconds WBB radio products support DFS as well as ACS An immediate consequence of the FCC IC regulation for 5 4 5 3 GHz is that the standard method of link installation using a single default fixed installa tion channel cannot be used Instead of the installation procedure of Chapter 5 a link activation method is used The ODUs are either supplied from the factory ready for use at 5 4 GHz or 5 3 GHz FCC IC or alternatively they can be set up for these bands using the Link Manager n The following procedure is generic to all rele
168. ceeeeevaevanvanvaeseesevaneanvanvanseeueeeneantanes 6 2 TABLE 6 2 LINK MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY avanvnnvnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnennennennenennennenn 6 3 TABLE 6 3 STATUS BAR INDICATORS 2e menace chanmienece deu tinaaseemeeedeseawenatuasaneweeds 6 7 TABLE 7 1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD auuunnnvnnennennnnvnnvnnennennennennenennennennennennnnennennenn 7 2 TABLE 8 1 ODU MODE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMON SCENARIOS seceeveceeveueeueueaeenvanes 8 17 TABLE 8 2 TELNET COMMANDS SUMMARY avanvnnnnnnnvnnvnnnnnennennennennennnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnene 8 26 TABLE 9 1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DATA AND DESCRIPTION svuunnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnennenn 9 2 TABLE 9 2 LINK COMPATIBILITY TRAP MESSAGES auannnnnnvnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnennenn 9 3 TABLE 9 3 EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA susnvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 11 TABLE 9 4 ACTION OF THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS suunennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnenennnnnennennennennennnnenne 9 12 TABLE 9 5 LINK MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES i avunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennennennnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnenne 9 16 TABLE 9 6 ACTIVE ALARMS COMMAND BUTTONS avanvnvnnvnnvnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 9 18 TABLE 9 7 LED FAULT INDICATORS ciiissicccsssexcswcnsevsvnasssnacwudeevecawenecenesa swaenesedevendeses 9 20 TABLE 9 8 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING cccecseccscccescceceecececaccaecueeaesnuassaseaeuauaneaananeas 9 21 TABLE 10 1 ODU HSS UNIT CONNECTION PINOUT ccecececveceesevaveeeevaveesnvavaveneavavanes 10 7 TABLE 10 2 RA
169. ces LAN 2 Disconnected Auto Detect v No Action v E External Alarms Operations VLAN Configuration Information Rate Maximum Kbps Best Effort Figure 8 14 Bridge VLAN and MIR Configuration ODU Mode This parameter controls the ODU mode with two optional values e Hub Mode inHub mode the ODU transparently forwards all packets over the wireless link e Bridge Mode In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and aging forwarding only relevant packets over the wireless link The aging time of the ODU is fixed at 300 seconds mi Changing these modes requires system reset Note IDU Aging time This parameter controls the IDU aging time The aging time parameter controls the time after which each MAC address is dropped from the MAC address learning table The default value is 300 seconds n e Any change to these parameters is effective immediately e Each side of the link can be configured separately with different Note aging times Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 16 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode Chapter 8 Caution The following table shows the appropriate configuration for several common scenarios Both link sites must be configured with the same parameter Table 8 1 ODU mode configuration for common scenarios Standard default Configuration for Ethernet Bridge 300 sec Applications aging is required Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode The ODU Ethern
170. connect to this box using CAT 5e cable Cables in prepared lengths are available for purchase The HSS unit is supplied with ten protective covers any port not in use must be closed with a protective cover EG Ling Connection Insimeciang n Paris musi bo connecded oominuousiy When flseorrecting radio uni shiti uso ports In maintain CONbruous Corel yey Figure 10 4 HSS Interconnection Unit e Fora single HSS unit ensure that the collocated units are connected in sequence from SYNC 1 If an ODU is removed from the hub site E then all remaining ODUs must be reconnected to maintain the con nectivity Note e You may cascade daisy chain two or more HSS Units with an HSS cable The method is described in detail below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 3 Using a Single HSS Unit Chapter 10 gt To connect an ODU to an HSS unit 1 Unscrew the protective cover from the port marked SYNC 1 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector from one end of the prepared CAT 5e cable to SYNC 1 3 Connect the other end of the CAT 5e cable to the ODU connector labeled SYNC 4 Tighten the protective seal that is on the prepared cable over the RJ 45 connector 5 Repeat for all ODUs that are to be collocated at the hub site The next ODU to be connected is inserted in SYNC 1 SYNC 2 followed by SYNC 3 and so on Using a Single HSS Unit Figure 10 5 HSS Wiring schematic The wiring as shown in Figure 10 5
171. connecting the PoE 8 LAN port cable directly to PC a crossed LAN cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends must be used wired according to Table B 4 Table B 4 Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Ethernet RxN White Green Ethernet TxT White Orange ES 1 Ethernet TxN 2 O PoE to PC LAN Cable When connecting the O PoE ETH port cable directly to a PC a crossed LAN CAT 5e 4 twisted pair 24 AWG STP terminated with RJ 45 connectors on both ends must be used The pinout in Table B 4 applies here Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 B 2 Trunk Ports E1 T1 RJ45 Connector Appendix B Trunk Ports E1 T1 RJ45 Connector The E1 T1 interfaces terminate in 8 pin RJ 45 connectors as shown in Table B 5 below Table B 5 Trunk Ports E1 T1 RJ45Pinout Transmit Data Tip Receive Data Tip Receive Data Ring Hot Standby Port RJ 11 Table B 6 Hot Standby RJ 11 Port Pinout Transmit Data Ring Txring 2 soon 1 2 en a CODEREN com e IDU all models Alarm Connector The IDU Alarm interface is a 25 pin D type female connector Its pinout is listed in Table B 7 Table B 7 IDU Alarm Connector Dry Contact co en rose 1 en rome poez Co Dos roe Dos free 5 os 1 Negative 2 1 Common 2 Normally Closed CC Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 B 3 IDU all models Alarm Connector Appendix B Table B 7 IDU Alarm Connector Dry Contact Continued Output 2
172. cure the site B ODU to the mast wall Monitor the link quality for about 15 minutes to verify stability Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 15 Chapter 4 Getting Started with the Link Manager Installing the Link Manager Application Minimum System Requirements The Link Manager application is distributed on a CD Operating system spe cific PC resources required by the application are set out in Table 4 1 below Table 4 1 PC Requirements for the Link Manager Application P III PIV P IV Dual Core Requirements common to all systems are e Hard disk 1 GB free space e Network 10 100BaseT NIC e Graphics 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color e Microsoft Explorer version 5 01 or later Installing the Software Any PC running the Link Manager application can be used to configure a Wireless Link link gt To install the Link Manager program 1 Insert the CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The installation starts automatically Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 1 Getting Started with the Link Manager Chapter 4 2 Follow the on screen instructions of the installation wizard to complete setup of the Link Manager program in the desired location Getting Started with the Link Manager If your links are within easy reach you can configure them using the proce dure described below If however your links are to be geographically scat tered it may be convenient to pre load each ODU with its ne
173. d on the device Not Supported is not a configurable state RO Recaved Sonal Svenin in dam or AnemaB Frieser RO Reprasens ne namber of Spectrum Channels wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelTableEntry N A ODU Spectrum Analysis Channel Table entry INDEX wbbOduAirSpectrumChannellndex wbbOduAirSpectrumChannellndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 1 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 2 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelScanned 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 3 TimeTicks Channel last scan timestamp in hundredths of a second since device up time If the channel was not scanned than the return value will be 0 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAntennaA 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAntennaB 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 6 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelScanningTimesta 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelAverageNFAnten 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 naA 7 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelAverageNFAnten 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 naB 8 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAntennaA 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 9 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAntennaB 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 10 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelCACPerformed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 11 1 3 6 14 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelLastCACTimesta 12 mp wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDetected 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 5 1 13
174. d out If you use the Reselect Channel button to change it you will be asked for confirmation Link Configuration Wizard 5 You are about to change the Operating Channel This process will result in Link re synchronization Do vou want to continue If you accept then the system will search for the best operating channel Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 7 5 740 5 755 5 770 5785 5800 2 5815 2 45 FE DrD 5 730 5 805 5 820 5 750 ABA we Are 5 795 5 810 ar 5 825 EE pa RE gt Reselect Channel pho tere cated Link State Active Cancel Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 7 4 Searching for the best operating channel The link will return to the status of Figure 7 3 above with a possible change to the operating channel If you work without automatic channel selection the Channel Settings win dow looks like this Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Operating Channel GHz 5 780 w Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 w Automatic Channel
175. d that you use the Wireless Mux as master since it will enforce the correct RFP on the other collocated units The following list summarizes the effect of using RFP B or E on Wireless Link radios These effects should be taken into consideration when planning new installations e Channel bandwidth 5 MHz is available under RFP E but is only sup ported for Wireless Link Access products e For products supporting a maximum throughput of 18 1 Mbps the maximum Ethernet throughput is 14 5 Mbps at 20 MHz channel bandwidth and 9 3 Mbps at 10 MHz channel bandwidth e For products supporting maximum throughput of 22 5 Mbps the maximum Ethernet throughput is 21 4 Mbps at the 20 MHz channel and 9 3 Mbps at 10 MHz channel bandwidth Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 12 HSS Status LED on the IDU C and New Style IDU E Chapter 10 HSS Status LED on the IDU C and New Style IDU E The IDU C and IDU E have a front panel HSS status LED Table 10 5 IDU C and New Style IDU E Front Panel LEDs for HSS Green This ODU is HSS master generating signal and HSS Sync is OK Bunning This ODU is a HSS client and in Sync Green Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection This ODU is not transmitting HSS is operational One of the following conditions apply This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper signals This ODU is a client Continu
176. dow Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 9 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 3 Performance Monitoring Report File View Configuration Help Get Data Save lea Thresholds Selection Pane Report Selection Interface Air Jethernet ist Trunk Jand Trunk 3rd Trunk Interval Current 15 Minutes O Daily Figure 9 12 Basic Performance Monitoring Report 2 Choose a report type from the left panel and click the Get Data toolbar button For example if you choose Site A Air and Current you will be offered a report looking like this Performance Monitoring Report File View Configuration Help al J Get Data Save Clear Thresholds Selection Pane Close m oO m Date amp Time v Min RSL dBm Max RSL dBm RSL Thresh 1 88dBm RSL Th Min TS MaxT TSLTh BBER UAS Raw ES 19 07 2010 13 30 00 55 54 19 07 2010 13 15 00 54 54 19 07 2010 13 00 00 55 54 19 07 2010 12 45 00 54 19 07 2010 12 30 00 55 54 19 07 2010 12 15 00 55 54 19 07 2010 12 00 00 55 54 19 07 2010 11 45 00 55 54 19 07 2010 11 30 00 55 54 19 07 2010 11 15 00 55 54 19 07 2010 11 00 00 55 54 19 07 2010 10 45 00 55 54 19 07 2010 10 30 00 54 54 19 07 2010 10 15 00 54 54 19 07 2010 10 00 00 55 54 19 07 2010 09 45 00 55 54 19 07 2010 09 30 00 54 54 19 07 2010 09 15 00 55 54 19 07 2010 09 00 00 55 54 19 07 2010 08 45 00 55 54 4104074901
177. duct Reference Appendix A Technical Specifications Scope of these Specifications ed A 1 51 U EEE TE ERE EE EE A 1 UN A 3 He DEMI TOOT AC SE A 5 FEDME A 6 ES EN ER ET aide id REE A 7 Antenna CharacteristiCS EEE EN A 8 Appendix B Wiring Specifications DTU Ra arsenal ue B 1 ODU HSS Unit Connection Pinout ccccecseeeeeeeeveeeeeeveeseeevaeeeeevaverensanseeneenas B 1 PN NNN B 2 PA 6 EE EN A a oo ous B 2 LAN FOL INL OE EE biuaov ATENAS B 2 OFORE IO PC LAN CIDO iin tote apa ees a a a ns B 2 Trunk Ports EITI RJ45 Connector sssssssssssoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B 3 NNN TT AREARE B 3 IDU all models Alarm Connector RE EE B 3 Dra B 5 FE EEE DN re Me PSP B 5 DE E a S A a ca ne B 5 Appendix C Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver UT FN C 1 Appendix D MIB Reference MT D 1 TN NNN D 1 ES AIRE OS EEE EE EN TE UNE EE D 1 APR a et a ee mimi ele D 1 CONGO 58018 ETE ENE EEE NA D 1 DS NOUS TE EEE EEE D 2 Private MIB Structure EE EE EE EEE D 2 MIBE ci gt REE ee de D 3 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB s aruvrarnnrnrnnrnnnnennnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenr D 4 MIB EG CIO ERa ENE Aai D 6 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 xii D Re a a a ia EE D 23 C A eterna ceed EE we gers es EE A AN T T D 23 NNN E ca de au ee D 24 PA PS o 2 EE E A D 28 Appendix E External Alarms Specification External Alarms ET EON Lese E 1 DC and new style IDU E AlafMS meme E 1 IOUE ALANIS etre ersten atte es artes Seid a
178. e Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring B A ele Default Size ms 4 5 Default A Meaning Changuag AM fer Buffer are sal affect fre TM delap va Service has been evaluated Click Next to continue Evaluate ID B Product 0 16 E000 0 16 B000 Hi Version 3 3 Sy Version 1 9 30 63700 May 13 2010 1 9 50 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Evaluation Figure 5 17 TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration ETBE evaluation bar 2 After setting the jitter buffer size if grayed out the Evaluate button is enabled while both Back and Next are disabled as shown in the next figure Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TOM Jitter Buffer Hat Standby Ring i B Size ms Size ms hace Cianging HA dier Duer aze wi affect re FAM delap Ee ID Product 7 0 16 B000 FC HH6 BOOO Hy Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 132010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 B Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 18 Services and TDM delay set link ready for evaluation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 15 Installation 3 You may make any further changes to the Service Configuration or the Jitter buffer When you are satisfied click the Evaluate The optimum transmission rate for the selected services is evaluated Following a short delay for processing Back and Next are
179. e Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayTable N A This table defines keeps the TDM counters of the last month in resolution of days wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayldx wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayldx This table is indexed per Day number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonTdmDayActiveSeconds Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active wbbOduPerfMonTxThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 20 Integer RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring TSL1 counter is incremented wbbOduPerfMonRxThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 21 wbbOduPerfMonRxThresh2 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 22 When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL1 counter is incremented When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL2 counter is incremented wbbOduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 23 Integer RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring BBER counter is incremented The units are 1 10 of a percent When the current throughput is below this threshold the corresponding counter is incremented wbbOduPerfMonEthCapacityThreshKbps 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 24 wbbOduPerfMonHighTrafficThr
180. e Tx but is not detecting signals This ODU is a client Disable Tx and is detecting signals from multiple sources All orange cases transmit HSS is not activated HSS is not supported Wireless Link only Disconnection between ODU and IDU Link Configuration and HSS For Wireless Link HSS enabled units and all Wireless Mux units the Hub Site Synchronization Settings dialog box appears in both the Link Installation and Configuration Wizards Link Configuration Wizard Link Configuration Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Site Synchronization Status Synchronization Status Status A l B Status A B Operation Hub Syne Client Disable Tx Independent Unit Operation Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Synchronization Synchronized N A Synchronization N A NJA External Pulses Detected Not Detected External Pulses Generating Not Detected Configure Operational States 5 Configure Operational States Enabled These settings will apply to both sites 3 Si Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States Expected Operational States Monitor Link Radio Interface Monitor Link 2 RSS dBm Radio Interface ETBE RSS dem Figure 10 13 HSS Settings Left Wireless Link client Right Wirele
181. e Upgrade Utility Main window The default sites shown in the Software Upgrade list panel belong to the currently link The list may be empty if you are running the Link Manager offline What follows about adding sites manually or from a list fle assumes that all sites to be upgraded are of the same type either Wireless Link or Wireless Warning Mux but not both This will not work with a mixed list 2 Click Add Site to add additional sites for upgrade 3 x Add Site 4 Clear all 113 Add Single Site Upgrade P m Add From File Figure 15 2 Add site options Click Add Single Site for one site only Add Site for Software Upgrade IP Address Figure 15 3 Adding a single site for upgrade Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 15 2 Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15 Enter the IP address of the site the Community strings Default public and netman respectively and then click OK The site will appear in the Software Upgrade list box For example if we add the site at IP address 192 168 2 101 the SWU main window of Figure 15 1 looks like this e Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help gt Xi ae eee A E A TA Start Upgrade Stop Upgrade AddSite Clear All Upgrade Package Save Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Reset Details Available Release 2 5 00_b2635_Jul 25 2010 O Reset each device after successful upgrade Description Release 2 5 00 O Reset all devices after all select
182. e configuration must be carried out before the new ODU is connected to its IDU If you try to do it live against its IDU it will Note cause spurious transmissions and a service break gt To pre configure an ODU 1 Attach the new ODU to an IDU or a PoE device 2 Run the Link Manager and use Hot Standby tab of Figure 12 4 above to configure the new ODU to Primary or Secondary mode as required 3 Ensure that it is set to the proper HSS mode in accordance with Figure 12 4 above Enter the required Link ID and frequency gt To replace an ODU for primary or secondary link at either site e Install the pre configured ODU Since the other link is working normally nothing need be done with it If the secondary ODU was replaced TDM service remains as is on the primary link If the primary ODU was replaced then the TDM service will shift back to the primary link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 10 Switching Logic Chapter 12 Switching Logic Switching from Primary Link to Secondary Link Switching from primary link to secondary link will occur following e Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss e Loss of the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to acquire expected E1 T1 data during a period of 24ms e The Primary equipment either ODU or IDU local or remote is pow ered off Following the switch from the primary to the secondary link the primary and secondary link Manager main
183. e installation e Verify that the Received Signal Strength RSS is according to expected results as determined by the Link Budget Calculator Installation mode as described above may be re entered using Site A or Site B and Installation Mode in the Site Configuration dialog Some Installation mode functionality may cause a break in or degrade link service Caution If you can accomplish link changes without affecting the service always prefer to use Configuration mode described in 7 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 19 Chapter 6 The Link Manager Main Window One Manager for all WBB Radio Products The Link Manager application is largely generic to all WBB Radio Products Functionality differences are minimal according to radio series Wireless Link and Wireless Mux capabilities The Main Window of the Link Manager Ensure that the Link Manager is running The main window should look similar to that in Figure 6 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 1 The Link Manager Toolbar Chapter 6 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help gE x E P Be Q Link Configuration Link Installatior Site A Site B Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Help F1 he Link TPSF BTT Link ID EBG 20561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dem Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Locatio
184. e link frequency The color of the box indicates the status Frequency 3 80 GHz e Green is an active link e Red is an inactive link e Magenta indicates an authentication or compatibility problem e Brown indicates severe compatibility problem Events Log The Events Log stores alarms generated from both sides of the link and is detailed in Chapter 9 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 27 06 2010 10 08 16 Connected to A 28 06 2010 16 11 31 TOM Counters were cleared for both sides Status Bar amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 LE3000 Encrypted Link The Status bar displays the following icons Table 6 3 Status bar indicators Shows if Link Manager is communicating with the ODU Connection mode to the ODU e Over the Air connection using the IP address of the remote unit e Local connection direct connection to the IDU without using an IP Connection available address Network connection through a LAN g la ODU unreachable IP Address Log on IP address Normally encrypted link Encryption indicator e Unencrypted link lock open Link password validation failed The link is encrypted with default keys Service and configuration are unavailable Change the link password Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 7 Elem
185. e public e For Trap Community use public gt To change a Community string 1 From the Configuration dialog box choose the Security tab 2 Type the current read write Community default is netman 3 Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box 4 Type the new Community string and re type to confirm A community string must contain at least five and no more than 32 characters exclud ing SPACE TAB and any of gt 5 Click OK to save Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 10 Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8 Change Community A Enter current Read Write Community Read Write Community New Confirm Read Only Community New Confirm Trap Community New Confirm Figure 8 9 Changing the Community String Forgotten Community string If the read write Community string is unknown an alternative Community key can be used The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can be used only to change the Community strings The alternative Community key is supplied with the product and should be kept in a safe place If both the read write Community and the alternative Community key are unavailable then an alternative Community key can be obtained from WBB Customer Support using the ODU serial number or MAC address The serial number is located on the product label The serial number and the
186. each participating link separately in the usual way 7 For each link run the Configuration wizard to define it as RPL or a Ring Link e The Ring uses a VLAN ID for the RPL It is used to manage the Ring ata and nothing else it is completely separate from the management and traffic VLANs referred to elsewhere ote e A regular Ring Link may be a member of up to four rings and each of their RPL VLAN IDs must be configured Here then is step 2 in more detail gt To integrate a link into an Ethernet Ring 1 Using either the Installation or Configuration wizards navigate to the Services window and chose the Ring tab Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate from the lists below Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Ethernet QoS ES Configure Ethernet Ring Settings Figure 13 5 Services window with Ring selected 2 Click Configure The Ring definition window is displayed The default is Independent Link and is used when the link is not part of any Ring Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13 Ring Configuration Link Mode Each Bing must contain one APL Independent Link Independent Link Ring Link non RPL Fins g Protection Link RPL i Verniy fhaf al inks are configured w h same Aing VLAN ID Advanced Minimum time for failure detection msec mH Minimum time for recovery sec EH Figure 13 6 Ring Opt
187. eature wbbOduSrvQoSConfindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 2 1 1 Integer RO Index of QoS Configuration wbbOduSrvConfVlanQGroups 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 2 1 2 i Fe Frames classification according to VLAN Priority IDs wbbOduSrvConfDiffservQGroups 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 2 1 3 Integer RO Frames classification according to Diffserv wbbOduSrvConfQueMir 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 2 1 4 Desired Private MIR wbbOduSrvConfQueWeight 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 2 1 5 QoS queueu s weights in percent wbbOduSrvQoSVlanQGroupsSetStr 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 3 DisplayString RW Frames classification according to VLAN IDs string for set wbbOduSrvQoSDiffservQGroupsSetStr 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 4 DisplayString Frames classification according to Diffserv IDs string for set wbbOduSrvQoSMaxRTQuePercent 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 5 5 Maximal percent for RT amp NRT queues wbbOduEthernetRemainingRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 1 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps wbbOduEthernetlfTable NA ODU Ethernet Interface table wbbOduEthernetlfEntry N A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry INDEX I wbbOduEthernetlfindex wbbOduEthernetlflndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 1 Integer RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index wbbOduEthernetlfAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 5 DisplayString RO ODU MAC address wbbOduEthernetlfAdminStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 3 2 1 6 Required state of the interface wbbOduEthernetlfOperStatus 1
188. ecurity Internet Explorer has restricted this webpage from running scripts or ActiveX controls that could access your computer Click here For options X WBB B Link Budget WBB Link Budget Warming Scripts are disabled In order to use the calculator please enable browser scripts Product Band v I Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz wv Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked content gt To use the Link Budget Calculator for Wireless Link 1 Choose a band from the drop down list Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 6 Running the Link Budget Calculator Link B Link Budget Product Channel REPS Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade bargin Tx Power EIRP hin Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected RSS Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Chapter 21 Link Link Budget RilaoGrF CENT Lnk A FIG FC CHANT R HIG24 FCC ANT R HIG2ZS BR SINT R HIG4S FCCNT R HIGSSFCCAC ONT FIGE SH FINT R HIGSS HFYNT RIGSHVETS INT R HIGS4 FCCICOANT RGS4 HFYNT F HIGS4 HFYINT RIGSGJFCCANT F HIGSS FCCANT R H GSS INDSCOVINT RIGSSJETSLINT RIGSSHPINT PoE R HIGS9 HFYNT F HIGEO HFYINT Link v External Antenna Expected Performance 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only 2 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 mintea 1 6 Mb s amp Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 1 49
189. ed devices successfully upgraded C Backup device software Do not reset devices after upgrade is completed C Delayed Upgrade Software Upgrade Li nk Name IP Address Curren t Release Progress TPSF_BTT Direct connection 192 168 1 101 2 5 00_b2630_Jun 27 2010 Airconnection 192 168 1 102 2 5 00_b2630_Jun 27 2010 TPSF_BTT Direct connection 192 168 2 101 1930 b1825 Ju132000 Figure 15 4 Single site added for upgrade The list can be cleared using the Clear All button As an alternative to adding sites one at a time you can add sites from a prepared list using the Add from File option in Figure 15 2 The list has the following format lt IP address gt lt Read Only community gt lt Read Write community gt Here is an example 192 168 1 101 public netman 192 168 1 102 public netman 192 168 2 101 public netman 192 168 2 102 public netman Having created an update list click Upgrade Package to chose the rel evant files The default files are located in the SWU subdirectory in the Link Manager installation area They are currently named SWU_1k swu and SWU 2k swu You may have to find them elsewhere depending on your system You make limited changes to the list by right clicking any line Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 15 3 Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15 Link Name IP Address Site Name Current Release Progress Sta
190. el GHz 5 510 Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 Automatic Channel Selection Available Channels List GHz 1 vi 5 485 5 500 5 515 5 490 5 505 5 520 5 495 5 510 5 525 i Reselect Channel Select All Clear All 5 530 5 545 5 560 5 535 5 550 5 565 5 540 5 555 5 570 gt Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dBm A Figure 16 5 Channel Select dialog box ACS permanently enabled HIE ACS cannot be disabled Upon completion of the wizard the Site configuration dialogs can be used in the usual way Once operational the Link Manager window is the same as for other radio equipment models Here is the Link Manager main window upon completion of the wizard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 5 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Chapter 16 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x g Ca Link Configuration Lite Installation Site A Get Diagnostics Clear Counters gt Link TPSF_BTT Location Link ID EBG_20561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 510 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fos Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps Oo ma Radio Interface IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TDM Service Counters Display Mode dl Estimated Time Between Errors ooo EE a Accumulative Current IP Address 192 168 2 102 E1 Por
191. el Reference per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMaxRSL Current Max Received Level Reference per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalRSLThresh1Excee Number of seconds Receive Signal Level d exceeded the RSL1 threshold per interval wbbOduPerfMonDaySES wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalRSLThresh2Excee Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold ACCESS read d only per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMinTSL Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalMaxTSL Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval wbbOduPerfMonaAirintervalTSLThresh1Exceed Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 15 MIB Parameters Appendix D ne Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 11 of 18 wbbOduPerfMonAirintervalBBERThresh1Exce Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval O Qa wbbOduPerfMonAirDayTable N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the last month in resolution of days N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX ifIndex wbbOduPerfMonAirDayldx wbbOduPerfMonAirDayEntry wbbOduPerfMonAirDayldx This table is indexed per Day number Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL wbbOduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh1Exceed Current Min Received Level Reference per Day Curre
192. el Zone The Fresnel zone pronounced frA nel with a silent s is an elliptically shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna It is always widest in the middle of the path between the two antennas Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 3 About the Fresnel Zone Chapter 21 First Fresnel ER Zone Curve ee ne ee ee RE RS OS RS US ES MS ES ee 60 of ses ha Site B d 1 d Expected Range Figure 21 1 Fresnel zone Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi path reflections from reflective surfaces such as water and intervening obstacles such as build ings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmo spheric conditions weather conditions large bodies of water and other reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clear ance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obsta cle does not attenuate the signal There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center of the direct wave The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined as the combined path length of all paths which are half wavelength 1 2 2 of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path If the total path distance is one wavelength 1 longer than
193. eless Link avrvrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 1 16 HOW t Use mis MN 1 17 ALIG TN a ae er A a 1 17 Conventions Used in this Man 1 19 FG 310 i ETETA RE NE E A 1 19 DN 1 19 Eee EE EE EN pe A EEE EE 119 TE NE EE NE NE EE EN 1 19 MN ves 1 20 Viewing and Pining ENE EE EE 1 20 Chapter 2 Site Preparation Planning the Link Site EE EEE EE EE 2 1 ENE EE RE en 2 1 Mr Jar 2 1 VE 18100810 E ET NS EM 2 1 Recommended Equipment s sssssssssssssnnssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 2 1 Stage 1 Preliminary TE es de ne aa 2 2 otage L als SUVO a ao mener ten 2 3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements s ssssssssssssnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 2 4 Additional Indoor Site Requirements xvvvvrrrrrnnnnrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnener 2 4 EEG EE EEE EE EE NE 2 4 RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites ccscceeseeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 SED Aa fa CES AEA EE NE NN EE 3 1 FT ova enose 10 R Narve 3 1 Re EE EE 3 1 Protection against Lightning ek a tes os ain en en man en arte 3 2 C aha veiw DE RR TE aida a SN 3 2 FPU NS 3 3 ODU PACK SG COMME EE EANA ARE DE EAN RUNA ina Aa 3 3 METT NNN 3 4 MN NNN 3 4 ENN STG 3 5 External Antenna Package Contents rrarusrunvnnnnnnavnavnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnannavnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 3 5 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3 6 TOO a en a eter 3 6 Canes and lee
194. eless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 1 ODU Appendix A Table A 1 Radio Performance Characteristics Continued Sensitivity dBm BER lt 10e 11 i Encryption AES 128 Table A 2 Frequency Bands and Regulatory Compliance Occupied Frequency FCC 47CFR Part 15 FOC IC 5 8 Ji Subpart C and IC RSS 210 FCC 47CFR Part 15 nee Subpart E 5 475 5 720 SAID 9 095 ul 5 655 5 720 IC RSS 210 FCC 47CFR Part 15 Subpart E and IC RSS 210 FCC 47CFR Part 90 Subpart Y and IC RSS 111 FCC 47CFR Part 15 Subpart C and IC RSS 210 FCC IC 5 3 5 250 5 350 FEC IC 4 9 4 940 4 990 FCC IC 2 4 2 402 2 472 FCC 2 5 2 496 2 690 FCC 47CFR Part 27 WPC India 5 8 5 825 5 875 GSR 38 MII China 5 8 5 730 5 845 MII China ETSI 5 8 5 725 5 875 ETSI EN 302 502 UK 5 8 5 725 5845 UK VNS 2107 ETSI 5 4 5 490 5 710 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI 5 3 5 170 5 330 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI 2 4 2 402 2 482 ETSI EN 300 328 Universal 5 9 5 730 5 950 Universal 5 4 5 475 5 720 Universal 5 3 5 140 5 345 Universal 2 4 2 312 2 482 Universal 2 3 2 302 2 397 Universal 5 7 5 690 5 880 Universal 2 7 2 700 2 900 Universal 6 0 5 795 6 030 Table A 3 Mechanical ODU with Integrated Antenna 30 5 12 00 W x 30 5 12 00 H x 5 8 2 28 D cm in 1 5 kg 3 3 Ibs ODU Connectorized 13 5 5 3 W x 24 5 9 6 H x 4 1 5 D cm in 1 0 kg 2 2 Ibs Wireless Link User Manual Rele
195. emote ODU over the air A value of unknown indicates community string mismatch wbbOduAdmBackToFactorySettingsCmd 1 3 6 14 1 29612 1000 1 1 25 Integer RW Back to factory settings Command A change is effective after reset The read value is always 0 wbbOduAdmlpParamsCnfg 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 26 DisplayString RW ODU IP address Configuration The format is lt IP_Address gt lt Subnet_Mask gt lt Default_Gatewa y gt wbbOduAdmVlaniD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 27 Integer RW VLAN ID Valid values are 1 to 4094 Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware wbbOduAdmVlanPriority 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 28 VLAN Priority 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest priority wbbOduAdmSN 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 29 DisplayString RO ODU Serial Number Serial Number wbbOduAdmProductName 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 30 DisplayString as hiss he EE This is the product name as it exists at EC wbbOduAdmActivationKey 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 31 DisplayString RW Activates a general key wbbOduAdmRmtPermittedOduT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 32 DisplayString Mobile Application permitted partner OduType wbbOduAdmCpulD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 33 Integer RO CPU ID wbbOduSrvMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 2 1 Integer RW System mode The only values that can be set are installMode and slaveMode normalMode reserved to the Manager application provided with the product A change is effective after link re synchronization
196. ems during the interval then for that threshold the recom mended BBER value should be 0 Since the system provides a lossless Ethernet service there is throughput degradation in case of interference The degradation is proportional to the BBER Ethernet Thresholds Capacity This is used as a basis for checking adherence to a Service Level Agree ment It is the number of seconds count that the link capacity falls bellow the threshold Ethernet Thresholds Traffic The number of seconds count that received traffic exceeded this threshold It can be used to measure traffic peaks Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 13 Events Alarms and Traps Chapter 9 Events Alarms and Traps S No te The Events Log The Events Log records system failures loss of synchronization loss of sig nal compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events The foregoing event types include events from all links for which this managing computer has been defined as the traps address Only events from WBB equipment will be shown Alarms traps are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window The Events Log may be saved as a text file The Events Log includes the following fields gt Sequential number ID gt Date and time stamp gt Message gt gt Trap source gt IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm For complete information about traps and alarms see Appendix E The events are
197. en IDU operational Blinking Green During power up only Red Failure Blinking Orange During power up continues if ODU fails to load IDU firmware Also when using an IDU C to replace a PoE device in which case all other LEDs off ODU to IDU communication link is operating ODU to IDU communication link is disrupted Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 11 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Table 3 2 IDU C and IDU E R Front Panel LEDs Continued Green Wireless link is synchronized AIR I F Orange During installation mode also signals software mismatch on some identical ODUs Red Wireless link lost synchronization Green E1 or T1 line is synchronized Orange Alarm detected at the opposite site interface Normal or LOSS Blinking Orange Local or remote loopback Red Alarm detected at this site interface Ethernet only IDU or E1 T1 not configured CRC See supplementary Table 3 3 following STBY Green Primary Active Blinking Green Secondary Not active Red Primary Not active Orange Secondary Active Off Off HSM not activated Table 3 3 IDU C and New Style IDU E Front Panel LEDs for HSS This ODU is HSS master generating signal and HSS Sync is OK ale This ODU is a HSS client and in Sync Green Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection This ODU is not transmitting HSS is operational One of the following conditions apply e This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals e This
198. enabled 4 Click Next to continue B3 The transmission rates used by Wireless Link are shown in Table 5 4 above ote Step 6 TDM Clock Configuration The following dialog is displayed Link Installation Wizard TOM Parameters Configure the TOM Parameters below Ts Clock Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Master Clock ij independen Lock Per Por Supported Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Ser min our day mont Wea Ser min our day mont yea Figure 5 19 TDM Parameters Configuration 1 gt To configure TDM clock parameters 1 For any individual port click it For the same parameters for all ports click the Select Maximum tag e Select Maximum will select the maximum number of services that were configured for the air interface for configuration E e Deselect All unconditionally deselects all of the services for configu ration ote e Without selecting anything right clicking any port will cause the appearance of the drop down list of Figure 5 30 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Installation Chapter 5 2 Click Configure The following drop down list is displayed Link Installation Wizard TDM Parameters Configure the TOM Parameters below Ts Clock Configure Transparent Transparent Select Maximum L Timed Recovered is AE Deselect All Recovered Loop Timed Internal Recovered pense Internal at Suppor
199. enieiaaesevesasnsnnevnereiatsnence 7 10 Chapter 8 Site Configuration NNN cence atetepeiases ayeweeaaucus A EAN 8 1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site uvurrnrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnene 8 1 Functions on the left of the dialog box ss 8 2 Functions at the top of the dialog bOX inserer hit 8 2 Viewing ke Eg EEE 8 3 Viewing Air Interface Details aan 8 3 PT NNN 8 4 Site Management IP Address VLAN and Protocol 8 5 Configuring the ODU Address EN 8 5 VNR Ne 8 6 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID ORNE PER EE DER KA NAERAA 8 8 Enable Disable Telnet ACCESS rurrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 8 8 B ge Me 0 NE trinni Eini a 8 8 FE PN eee 8 9 NNN 8 10 Link Manager Community Strings x rararnrnrnrnrnrnrnnnrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennvnvnnnenennn 8 10 ENN 8 10 OS EEG I NR I a 8 11 Link LOG Security Fetare EE este one er ecta 8 11 Setting me Date and IME eid 8 13 ENN en 8 15 comoara Me BOJE saroi nnana ira aa ERN Eai 8 15 MG 8 16 IDU AGING LING ssarseststesntessanbereistenesessienasecainssiseanetarersaeseriniiesbienienareeiateieieaean 8 16 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode van 8 17 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration ss sssssssssssssssssssssensnnsnenennsenne 8 18 Setting the Maximum Information Rate MIR sicccccceccccveuccccvevevaveeeeeneneneneeneeas 8 19 RT OG 8 19 VON 8 19 VE SA ae a un 8 21 Setting External Alarm IP seie 8 21 EG Eng E TE nn A ieee EE ol aa 8 22 Wireless Lin
200. ent during business hours 8 00 A M 5 30 P M Eastern Time When calling please give the complete model number of the product along with a description of the trouble symptom s that you are experiencing In many cases problems can be resolved over the telephone without the need for returning the unit to the factory Please use one of the following means for product assistance Phone 585 241 5510 E Mail gemds techsupport ge com FAX 585 242 8369 Web www gemds com FACTORY SERVICE Component level repair of this equipment is not recommended in the field Many components are installed using surface mount technology which requires specialized training and equipment for proper servicing For this reason the equipment should be returned to the factory for any PC board repairs The factory is best equipped to diagnose repair and align your unit to its proper operating specifications If return of the equipment is necessary you must obtain a Service Request Order SRO number This number helps expedite the repair so that the equipment can be repaired and returned to you as quickly as possible Please be sure to include the SRO number on the outside of the shipping box and on any corre spondence relating to the repair No equipment will be accepted for repair without an SRO number SRO numbers are issued online at www gemds com support product sro Your number will be issued immediately after the required information is entered Please be sure
201. ents Log Number Date amp Time 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected LE S2 Connection Available IP Address 10 105 1 2 ors 8 Encrypted Link Figure 12 5 The primary link under normal operation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 6 Installing a WBB MHS Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help gE x i og Link Configuration Link Installation Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link Location LinkID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fos Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active RSS dem Ethernet Throughput Mbps site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 2 2 TDM Service Secondary Link Not Active Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 z x Estimated Time Between Errors A hour mon lt lt min hour day monne D ______ _ Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 Il site 2 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000001 3 30 2009 10 21 36 AM Connected to 2 2 Internal 000002 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 000003 3
202. ents of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 Table 6 3 Status bar indicators Continued DC TDM Backup IDU R In the event of an active alarm opens alarms dialog Backup enabled Backup disabled He Hi EE Ge Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 8 Chapter 7 Configuring the Link Overview This chapter describes the link configuration procedure which is performed after the installation of both sides of the Wireless Link link as set out in 5 Link configuration uses a Link Configuration wizard to redefine the configu ration parameters and fine tune an operational link Both sides of the link are configured simultaneously Link configuration allows you to configure link parameters which do not lead to sync loss or require a reset Some may change service performance in respect of which warnings are displayed For ease of use the Link Configuration wizard follows the same pattern as Link Installation You should therefore be familiar with the content of 5 The following parameters are configured using the Link Configuration Wiz ard e System parameters e Channel settings e Transmission power and antenna settings e Service arameters For new style IDU E users The procedure shown here is the same as for IDU C based links The main window will show two trunk ports instead of four mi A The Configuration Wizard has seven steps as shown in Table 7 1 below Wireless Link User Ma
203. er 14 Each port can be configured how to handle Ethernet frames at the ingress direction where frames enter the IDU and at the egress direction where frame exit the IDU The configuration is independent at each port Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 3 Port Functionality Chapter 14 Ingress Direction Table 14 1 Port settings Ingress direction Transparent The port does nothing with regard to VLANs inbound frames are left untouched Frames entering the port without VLAN or QinQ tagging are tagged with VLAN ID and Priority which are pre configured by the user Frames which are already tagged at ingress are not modified User Network traffic User Network A Tagged traffic User Network traffic a Priority Code Point PCP which refers to the IEEE 802 1p priority It indicates the frame priority level from 0 lowest to 7 highest which can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic voice video data etc Egress Direction Table 14 2 Port settings Egress direction The port does nothing with regard to VLANs outbound frames are left untouched All frames are untagged Un tagged traffic inside the User Network User Network A Tagged traffic multiple VLANs Un tagged traffic inside the User Network Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 4 Port Functionality Chapter 14 Table 14 2 Port settings Egress direction Continued Untags only frames
204. er Manual Release 1 9 30 20 2 The procedure Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Chapter 20 i Site Location Get Diagnostics F gt Link Link Link ID Services L Location Radio Interface RSS dBm Ethernet Service Ethernet Throughput Mbps Rx Tx Rate Units O Mbps amp Fps IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting om Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 1 101 WBB circled Trap Source IP Address Figure 20 2 Opening Link Manager window prior to band change default 7 Click Tools Change Band The following window appears ct Change Band Select a band from the list below Band Description 5 150 5 335 GHz Universal 5475 5 720 GHz Universal 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC default 5 835 5 865 GHz WPC 6 740 5 940 GHz Universal 1 The fable conais common dala fom fre and 8 sites Figure 20 3 Change Band dialog I 8 Click the band required Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Installation Frequency GHz 5 280 5 580 5 780 5 840 5 780 The bands appearing in Figure 20 3 are product dependent To see which bands are available for your product check y
205. ervices over the 2 3 2 7 GHz and 4 9 6 0 GHZ spectrum bands and comply with worldwide standards and regulations including FCC and ETSI All WBB carrier class Wireless Link products meet the stringent perfor mance and quality demands of cellular carriers and service providers Deliv ering high capacity connectivity of up to 54 Mbps at distances of up to 80 Km 50 miles the Wireless Link products offer an unmatched combination of robustness and reliability at an affordable price About Release 1 9 30 Release 1 9 30 of Wireless Link brings together incremental changes fixes and several new features added to the 1 9 release Here are the major changes and additions gt gt gt gt gt gt New IDU E features The IDU E new style supports HSS two LAN ports two indepen dently clocked TDM ports and a 25 pin dry contact alarm port VLAN for Ethernet services VLAN tagging and double tagging is supported for links using new style IDU Es JLayer 2 capabilities DC PoE devices A ruggedized version for outdoor use New Ethernet features e VLAN functionality e Ring protection and Ethernet 1 1 RFD RFP B is now available for collocated Wireless Link and Wireless Mux units See Chapter 10 Scheduled Software Upgrade Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 1 Key Applications Chapter 1 gt Telnet access may be enabled or disabled gt Contextual online help for the Link Manager
206. es below The supplied mounting kit is used to mount the antenna onto a pole The antennas must be aligned for maximum throughput Do not stand in front of a live antenna Warning gt To mount an external antenna 1 To mount an external antenna ensure that the antenna is properly grounded and then mount the antenna onto the pole Refer to Chapter 17 for detailed antenna mounting instructions 2 Follow the mounting instructions supplied with the antenna Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements The Wireless Link ODU is designed with suge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes WBB recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 8 Outdoor Connections Chapter 3 Refer to Chapter 18 for detailed installation instructions of lightning pro tection devices Outdoor Connections gt To complete the outdoor connections 1 Connect the ground cable to the ODU chassis as marked on the ODU 2 Connect the antenna cable to the ODU 3 Connect the lightning protection device to the ODU see Chapter 18 4 Attach the ODU IDU cable to the ODU RJ 45 connector see Appendix B for the connector pinout UT Screw in the cable glands to ensure hermetic sealing of the ODU 6 Secure the cables to the pole
207. escription 1 Description External Alarm 1 lt User Text gt Alarm 105 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 2 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 2 lt User Text gt Alarm 106 majorl The trap is sent if there is no way to recover from the situation Contains two parameters 1 Description ODU power up built in test failed Error code is n 2 n number major oO O0 The trap is sent if there is a way to recover from the situation Contains two parameters 1 Description Wrong configuration loaded Error code is Yn 2 n number major Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected 109 major O Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected major Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Management port status changed to disconnected 111 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 3 Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 3 lt User Text gt Alarm 112 m
208. esh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Management Q Air Interface Network Parameters VLAN Protocol 22 Hub Site Sync IP Address B Management Inventory Security Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 D Date amp Time e Advanced sk Ethernet TDM Services XX External Alarms 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination IP Address I Operations Figure 8 4 Management Addresses Site Configuration dialog box 4 Choose Management 5 Enter the IP address of the ODU in the IP Address field If performing configuration from the Link Manager the IP address is that entered from the Login window Mp 6 Enter the Subnet Mask 7 Enter the Default Gateway 8 Enter the Trap Destination This could be the IP address of the managirg computer The events log will be stored at this address 9 Click Apply to save the changes Configuring VLAN Settings VLAN IDs are used by WBB products in three separate contexts Management VLAN Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring It is recommended that Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management traffic whenever such separation is required It is recommended that both sides of the link be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traf fic This reduces your chances of accidentally locking yourself out of the link Wireless Link
209. eshKbps 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 25 Integer When the current traffic is above this threshold then corresponding counter is incremented Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 17 MIB Parameters Appendix D mo mn wbbOduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 1 1 Integer RW If yes is chosen the iflndex Unit Severity Time_T and Alarm Id from the wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to the end of each private trap wbbOduAgnGenSetMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 1 2 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element manager provided with the product W wbbOduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 1 IpAddress R IP address of the server from which the current time is loaded wbbOduAgnNTPCfg TimeOffsetFromUTC 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 2 Integer RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time minutes Possible values 1440 1440 wbbOduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 2 3 OctetString RW This parameter specifies the real time and date Format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Hexadecimal A date time specification field octets contents range wane nee 1 1 2 year Z 1 12 1 91 4 5 hour a 6 minutes 0 59 6 7 seconds 0 60 use 60 for leap second 7 8 deci seconds 0 9 For example Tuesday May 26 1992 at 1 30 15 PM EDT would be displayed as 07 c8 05 1a Od 1e Of 00 1992 5 26 13 30 15 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmLastChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 1 Integer This counter is initialized to 0 after
210. ess Link User Manual 5 7 9 22 8 2 8 13 B 5 16 1 20 5 16 4 16 1 16 1 1 7 13 1 13 6 13 2 13 5 13 1 13 7 13 3 13 1 9 17 9 2 9 8 9 17 sl 8 1 8 22 9 22 A 1 A 1 8 2 8 26 A 7 11 3 11 5 11 4 11 4 1 12 11 3 11 13 fi 1 11 3 1129 11 9 Release1 9 30 H HSS 10 1 and asymmetric allocation lt endtrange 10 12 Hardware Installation 10 3 IDU C front panel LEDs 3 12 10 13 ODU HSS Connection Pinout 10 7 B 1 Radio Frame Pattern Table 10 7 HSS Client 10 2 Continue Transmission 10 3 Disable Transmission 10 3 HSS Master 10 2 Hub Site Synchronization see HSS I IDU Aging time 8 16 aging time ODU Bridge Mode 8 16 Connecting to ODU 3 13 described 1 9 IDU C Alarm Connector B 3 Front panel 1 11 1 11 Described 3 10 LEDs 3 11 3 11 4 2 Front panel LEDs for HSS LEDs 3 12 10 13 Mounting 3 10 Power connections 3 13 3 13 IDU E Back Panel H 1 IDU R Back Panel 1 10 3 9 Installing IDU R 3 9 Installing IDU E and R units 3 9 Package Contents 3 4 IDU C Package Contents 3 4 IDU E or IDU R package contents 3 4 Indoor Unit see IDU Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality 6 3 Post Configuration main window 7 11 Post Installation main window 5 19 see Link Installation Installation Mode 8 2 8 2 8 17 Installing BRS 16 1 23 1 Interference caused by collocated units 10 2 Environment 1 7 Inventory 8 1 8 11 Displaying 8 8 IP address 8 2 Telnet display 8 26 Index 2 J default colors
211. et port is configured to auto detect by default and may not be changed The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed 10 100BaseT and duplex mode half or full duplex An Auto Detect feature is provided whereby the line speed and duplex mode are detected automatically using auto negotiation Use manual con figuration when attached external equipment does not support auto negoti ation The default setting is Auto Detect You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer connection since a wrong configuration can cause a management disconnection or Ethernet services interruption gt To configure the Ethernet Mode Note 1 From the Configuration menu choose the site to configure The Site Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click Advanced Ethernet 3 In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane use the drop down menu to choose the configuration 4 Click Apply to save the changes It is possible to close the Ethernet service by disconnecting the Ethernet port If you close the port you may subsequently be unable to access the device If this should occur a workaround is as follows e Connect the system from the remote site e Connect via other Ethernet port of the IDU e Power down the equipment and connect immediately after power up the fastest way is to enter install mode Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 17 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration Chapter
212. etwork management system to the next re initialization A textual string containing information about the interface This string should include the name of the manufacturer the product name and the version of the hardware interface ifType 130121221 5 Integer The type of interface distinguished according to the physical link protocol s immediately below the network layer in the protocol stack An estimate of the interface s current bandwidth in bits per second For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation can be made this object should ontain the nominal bandwidth The interface s address at the protocol layer immediately below the network layer in the protocol stack For interfaces which do not have ifSpeed 1361212215 ifPhysAddress 136121221 6 Phys Address such an address e g a serial line this object should contain an octet string of zero length ifAdminStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 7 Integer RW The desired state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed ifOperStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 Integer The current operational state of the interface The testing 3 state indicates that no operational packets can be passed ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 X Counter The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters ifInUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 X Counter The number of s
213. eueeueueueeeeneneaneneneneaes 11 3 GSU ee ty a ee re in 11 3 EEG G gg EEE ENE ere ene 11 4 ESTE LEE ee EE EE EE 11 4 NNN 11 4 POA toe CSU Ce NE EE RE ET AAA Ea 11 5 PTE Re EE AA Ea 11 5 Be ouno e OE EE NE LES Eg es es 5 EE EE EE EE te 11 5 Using Site Configuration for the EE RE 11 7 NN 11 12 GSU Monitoring and AB 951 ov ne sis 11 12 UNN 11 12 MUNNET 11 13 Part 3 Advanced Installation Chapter 12 Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure What is a WBB Monitored Hot Standby rrararvavnrvarnrnevnrnnvnnnnnernnnnnnrnnnennennene 1 2 1 wnat WBE MHo DrOVIGOS spe 12 2 Equipment Protection EEE NE MER 12 2 APENES a denses cs 12 2 PM TNS 12 3 MN NE 12 3 WBB MAS KIC COR EN EE NE 12 3 Mema a NBE MHS RE EE eras 12 3 velar a WBB MAS RS EE nn a 12 9 IDU Replacement EE ED Te 12 9 NNN NN 12 10 NNN 12 11 Switching from Primary Link to Secondary LINK ressens 12 11 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary LINK Rs 12 12 System Operation description rrrrrrerrenenennnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenene 12 14 Chapter 13 The WBB Ethernet Ring BO EE EE EEE NE EN 13 1 Wnat is an ER a a 13 1 MENN TT 13 1 By Sa eg EE EE a de 13 2 Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by WBB 13 3 Me a en er 13 5 Hardware CON 9 15 10 1 1 SEE eee ae 13 5 Special Case 1 1 Ethernet Redundancy 13 6 Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring ns 13 7 Chapter 14 VLAN Functionality with Wireless Link ERT NNN 14 1 KWAN G
214. f the Link Man ager will revert to that shown in Figure 19 2 above In any event power down the changed ODU your changes will take effect when you power it up again B3 Don t forget to remove the RF terminators from a connectorized ODU after powering it down Note Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 5 Tip How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address Chapter 19 Tip How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address If you have an ODU with lost or forgotten IP address use the above proce dure to log on to it using Local Connection The IP address will appear in the left hand status area Link ID EBG 20561334 Services None Frequency GHz 5 815 Band 5 730 5 845 GHz FCCIIC Channel By MHz 20 Fate Mbps Status Transmitting IP Address 197 168 1 101 Subiecte rate L Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Figure 19 8 Existing IP address displayed after log on with Local Connec tion Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 6 Chapter 20 Changing the Factory Default Band Why this is Needed All ODUs supplied by WBB come with pre configured with a factory default product dependent band according to the ODU part number For ODUs supporting Multi band it may be changed using the procedure in this chapter The procedure is generic applying to all ODUs with the Multi band feature e If for some reason the default band needs to be changed it should be done before link installation Caution e Use of an incor
215. fered a power failure The failed site sends a final trap indication about the power loss just before powering off A Dying Gasp circuit identifies the power failure at a minimum interval of 20 milliseconds before the ODU or IDU powers off During that interval a message notifying the power failure is sent to opposite site External alarm output number 4 indicates power failure at the opposite site Troubleshooting Use the following table to troubleshoot LED fault indications Table 9 7 LED fault indicators LED Status Remedy ca Check that power is connected to the IDU Du Red Check that the IDU ODU cable is properly wired and connected obu Red Check that the IDU ODU cable is properly wired and connected l orange Complete the installation procedure from the Link Manager the installation procedure from the Link Manager AIR IE EE the antenna alignment Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units are the same Channel and Link ID Orange Alarm detected at the Site B interface or Local or Remote loopback SVC Red Alarm detected at the Site A interface Off Ethernet only IDU or E1 T1 not configured Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 20 Replacing an ODU Chapter 9 Table 9 7 LED fault indicators Continued Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection This ODU is not transmitting Orange HSS is operational One of the following conditions apply This ODU is a master that is ge
216. figure Select Maximum Deselect All Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Figure 9 2 Loopback configuration box 2 From the active ports click those required for loopback activation The selected port icons change color to light blue as in the following exam ple Loopback Help Loopback Configuration Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Configure Select Maximum Deselect All 1 3 er ae Figure 9 3 Loopback configuration box with one Site A port selected 3 Click configure to choose a loopback mode Loopback Help Loopback Configuration ein Select Maximum Deselect All Configure Select Maximum Deselect All None B Reverse 1 3 2 4 un ITU Figure 9 4 Loopback options 4 Click the required loopback mode Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 4 TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9 Loopback fx Help Loopback Configuration nement NE Ra Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Figure 9 5 Loopback defined 5 Click OK to activate the selected loopback s This activates selected loopback s The corresponding service port icon changes color and appearance to indicate an active loopback Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help i G 2 x o Link Configuration Link Installation Site A Site B Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Exit Help F1 pink TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG 20561334 E Radio Interface Services
217. figuring the Link Installation technician System manager Site Configuration Installation technician System manager ER oe and Diagnos jnstallation technician System manager A Little Terminology In the field a link typically has alocal or headquarters site as for example in Figure 1 1 above Here the service provider is the local or headquarters site The service recipient is the remote site Where the link is completely internal to a corporation the choice of the loal and remote is just a matter of convenience A link then consists of two sites In Broadband Wireless terminology the local and remote sites are some times referred to as near and far HQ and remote and so on Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 17 A Little Terminology Chapter 1 The site which is closer to the network core often the local site will be referred to as s te A and the opposite side of the link usually closer to the end user as site B This choice is application neutral and will be used throughout the manual both to describe the sites and their names as in the examples The link is configured and managed using a PC the managing computer connected to site A The precise requirements for the managing computer are set out on page 4 1 We will occasionally need to distinguish between the site to which the man aging computer is connected and the second site when they are not nec essarily A or B The for
218. from site A from the Wireless Link NMS 4 At site B tune the SA to the frequency transmitted 5 Increase the SA sensitivity according to the expected receive signal Aligning the antennas E When one antenna is moved the opposite site is passive Move the Nasr antennas very slowly Note gt To align the antennas 1 Slowly move the site B antenna azimuth axis the elevation axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the azimuth axis 2 Slowly move the site A antenna azimuth axis the elevation axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA 3 Lock the azimuth axis 4 Slowly move the site B antenna elevation axis the azimuth axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the elevation axis 5 Slowly move the site A antenna elevation axis the azimuth axis should be locked until you see the best signal on the SA Lock the elevation axis 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the reading on the SA is equal or as close as possible to the calculated receive signal for Rx Power Level see Expected Signal Level for AIND radios on page 22 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 22 2 Aligning the antennas Chapter 22 7 When the SA reads the expected receive signal the antennas are aligned and there is an indication of a good link between the sites 8 Tighten the antenna azimuth axis and elevation axis 9 Stop the CW function The NMS will restart
219. g and Realigning a Link It may be necessary to reinstall the link if the ODUs need to be realigned E Activating Install Mode causes both sites to go into install mode causing F7 disruption in service for approximately fifteen seconds ote gt To reinstall the link 1 Choose a site The Configuration dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 7 The Link Budget Calculator Chapter 9 2 In the Configuration dialog box click the Install Mode button message box asking if you want to enter install mode appears 3 Click Yes to continue The system enters Install mode and the alignment tone becomes audi ble 4 Realign the ODUs and start the Installation wizard see 5 The Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is part of the Link Manager software and is found in the Help menu This useful utility enables you to calculate the expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range including antenna size cable loss and climate condi tions For full details see 21 Performance Monitoring Wireless Link Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traffic over the radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface TDM and Ethernet ports It does so continuously even when the Link Manager is not con nected Two types of logs are recorded e Monitor Log that records statistics on traffic rate and radio signal strength e Events L
220. g of multiple Hub Sites to the same clock source thus eliminating mutual interference GSU Functionality The GSU receives a synchronization signal from the GPS on per second It distributes a WBB proprietary synchronization signal to all other ODU units using the RS422 protocol and the standard HSS mechanism where the GSU acts as an HSM unit When the GSU doesn receive a synchronization signal from the GPS for 30 seconds it moves automatically to Self Generation mode and acts as a reg ular HSM unit until the GPS recovers Typical GSU Scenarios Independent Distributed Sites In the scenario of Figure 11 1 we have multiple independent collocated sites which may interfere with each other To meet this situation we coor dinate all of them using the GSU as shown The GSU functions like wide area HSS unit ensuring that all participating radios at the locations marked GSU each transmit and receive at the same time Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 1 Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication Chapter 11 Figure 11 1 GSU Scenario Independent distributed sites Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication What happens if in Figure 11 1 the GSU towers themselves have radios communicating as shown in Figure 11 2 Consider GSU 1 and GSU 2 Both collocated towers transmit and receive simultaneously However the radios communicating at GSU 1 and GSU 2 must transmit and receive in turn according to t
221. g table shows the differences between the four systems Table 1 1 ODU Series Typical Characteristics Max Ethernet Throughput 2Mbps 2 5 Mbps 18Mbps 18Mbps devices Services HSS Tx Power Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet and TDM Ethernet and TDM Y lt e e Je 18 dBm 18dBm 18 dBm 25 dBm The Wireless Link ODUs come is many variations reflecting supported com binations of regulations and frequency bands as shown in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Wireless Link Frequency Bands And Radio Regulations ea A T T l EE pace pama pa pa sapma O me fa vajaa SE PS EC se paa fame fe f 5 4 GHz me 1 1 1 fs 1 ffs Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 8 FCC IC 5 475 5 720 s 5 490 5 710 5 475 5 595 5 655 5 720 2 302 2 397 2 312 2 482 2 700 2 900 4 940 4 990 5475 5 120 5 690 5 880 AIND All Indoor Unit Chapter 1 Key to abbreviations e FCC Federal Communications Commission e IC Canadian radio regulation e ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute e IDA Indian WPC radio regulation e CN China MII radio regulation e UK Office of Communications Radio Interface Requirement e HP no specific radio regulation AIND All Indoor Unit The AIND All Indoor unit offers a single enclosure for Radio and Multiplexer modules It enables outdoor placement of only a pas sive element a Figure 1 9 AIND All Indo
222. ge Trap Source IP Address 000001 12 02 2009 10 25 46 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 12 02 2009 10 25 47 Connected to Location Internal i amp connection Available Connection Mode Local IP Address 255 255 255 255 Figure 19 2 Opening Link Manager window prior to installation 8 Click the un grayed Site Location button The following dialog window appears Site Configuration A File Actions Help ied Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off j Installation Mode Air Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory ObjectiD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 20 2 1 2 AR Security Date amp Time Oo Advanced ak Ethernet Contact TDM Services it External Alarms Location Description Wireless Link I Operations Last Power Up 16 09 2010 14 37 32 Apply Figure 19 3 Contiguration Dialog Box 9 Click the Management item in the left hand panel The following win dow is presented Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 3 The procedure Chapter 19 Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti 3 S Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Management Q ir Interface Hub Site Sync IP Address Subnet Mask Inventory R Security Default Gateway D Date amp Time Trap Destination Le Advanced _IPAddress gt sk Ethernet TDM Services iY External Alarms I Operati
223. hapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help Eg Gr z Link Configuration Link Installation Site 2 2 Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link Link gt Location Link ID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active RSS dem Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units O Mbps Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site 2 2 vi snr Ge TDM Service Secondary Link Active Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 gr Estimated Time Between Errors sec min hoor MN Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 Error Blocks E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 Frequency 5 490 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000038 3 30 2009 10 38 21 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000057 3 30 2009 10 43 52 AM TDM Service has been closed The reason is Sync Lost ODU 000052 3 30 2009 10 40 58 AM The time was set to MON MAR 30 09 40 58 2009 ODU 000042 3 30 2009 10 40 05 AM Transmitting on channel 5 270 GHz ODU 000023 3 30 2009 10 37 35 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU 000040 3 30 2009 10 38 26 AM Transmitting on channel 5 280 GHz ODU lt amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 2 2 F DFS Encrypted Link Figure 12 10 Secondary link operat
224. he Link Manager shows when the Wireless Link ODUs are optimally aligned e Services Type max number of T1 or E1 trunks if Max Trunks is selected e Ethernet Rate maximum throughput available for the chosen parameter combination e Antenna height for LOS the minimum antenna height required for line of sight operation It is the sum of the height required for boresight clearance due to the earth s curvature plus the height required to clear the Fresnel zone If the expected performance is not sutable for your application try different parameters and repeat the calculation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 13 Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 5 Product Dependent Features Chapter 22 AIND Alignment Use this procedure when installing the Al indoor system Wireless Link ANID or manually aligning two Wireless Link units To achieve the best results use the Link Budget Calculator from the Wire less Link installation and then align the antennas so that they exactly face each other To achieve the best performance the line of sight must be as clear as possi ble with no obstructions between the two sites Prior to attempting alignment install the hardware and software in accor dance with this User Manual The figure below shows the link setup At least two people are needed to perform the alignment procedures Once the alignment is complete
225. he Spectrum View tool to find the best working channel Tools Spectrum View e Decreasing the Tx Pwer of a link will reduce collocation interference Site Configuration Air Interface E Use the Link Budget Calculator to determine the minimum Tx Power required to maintain link stability ote Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 2 5 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation This chapter sets out the requirements and procedures for the hardware installation and alignment of a Wireless Link link in accordance with the prior planning as set out in Chapter 2 It is intended to guide qualfied field technicians Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may expose the end Warning user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities WBB and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas E The material in this chapter is generic to all WBB radio link products unless stated otherwise ote Safety Practices Preventing overexposure to RF energy To protect against overexposure to RF energy install the ODUS so as to pro vide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons When the system is
226. he marker in the Quality bar on the Channel Setting window see Figure 5 6 moving into the green area RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites Interference may arise from e Self interference from collocated WBB radios e Other collocated radio devices installed on the same site To avoid or minimize interference follow these recommendations e For collocated WBB units use an HSS unit to synchronize between them Select a different operating channels for each collocated WBB unit e If oneor more collocated units are not WBB units ensure that there is a physical separation of at least three meters between a WBB unit and any other collocated radio on the site e Use the largest possible frequency gap between these units Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 2 4 RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites Chapter 2 e Choose the best frequency channel as clear as possible form inter ference You may change band with Combo Wireless Link prod ucts and all Wireless Mux products e To select a frequency channel move the link to Installation Mode using Site configuration and start the Installation wizard In the Channel Settings window use the quality bar at the bottom to help you choose a better channel clearer of interference e If you are using Wireless Link radios install the collocated links with different antenna polarizations e If you are using the Wireless Mux radios use t
227. he scheme in marked Nor mal Phase in Figure 11 3 This is an impossible situation if all the links must send and receive together It is further complicated by adding a third and further sites as shown Figure 11 2 GSU Scenario Communicating distributed sites Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 2 Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission Chapter 11 Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission The solution offered here is not a universal cure The following conditions are necessary but in any specific case may not be sufficient e The GSU sites marked 1 and 3 above are sufficiently far apart as to ensure that there is no mutual interference between communicat ing sites 1 2 and 2 3 above e There should be no interference between non communicating sites 1 and 3 above To see how it works we use Figure 11 2 The GSU towers are numbered and marked for cascading 1 2 and 2 3 There should mot be a link between 1 and 3 The GSU can synchronize the TDD timing of several sites enabling the cas cading of consecutive links without mutual interference To use cascading the TDD timing of the even ordered links GSU 2 above must be shifted Shifted Phase and odd ordered links GSU 1 and GSU 3 above must be unshifted Normal Phase The phase shift is half of the Radio Frame Duration RFD from the chosen RFP The scheme is shown in Figure 11 3 Since the GSU is always HSS master
228. heet 9 of 18 interval wbbOduPerfMonintervalintegrity Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval wbbOduPerfMonDayTable wbbOduPerfMonDayEntry Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 14 N A This table defines keeps the counters of the last month in resolution of days N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonDayldx MIB Parameters Appendix D This table is indexed per interval number Each interval is of 24 hours and the oldest is 30 wbbOduPerfMonDayUAS The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval of 24 hours Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 10 of 18 wbbOduPerfMonDayldx wbbOduPerfMonDayES Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDayBBE Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonDaylntegrity Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrT able N A This table defines keeps the air counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 1 Integer Current Min Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 4 1 2 Integer Current Max Received Level Reference starting
229. hernet service 6 under Channel BW of 20MHz _ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfp TdmChannelBW20MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service under 7 Channel BW of 20MHz _ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW40MHz Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 40MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW40MHz Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 40MHz _ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpStr 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 8 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization supported patterns wbbOduAirHSSHsmiD 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 9 Integer A unique ID which is common to the HSM and all its collocated ODUs wbbOduAirHssTime i 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 10 DisplayString Hub Site Synchronization GPS time wbbOduAirHssLatitude ee 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 11 DisplayString vid Hub Site Synchronization GPS Latitude wbbOduAirHssNSlindicator en 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 12 DisplayString Fo Hub Site Synchronization GPS N S Indicator Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 11 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 7 of 18 m een wbbOduAirHssLongitude 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 13 DisplayString 0 wbbOduAirHssEW Indicator 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 14 DisplayString ad Hub Site Synchronization GPS E W Indicator 0 wbbOd
230. hose the Line Repeater combination that reflects your setup You should repeat this procedure for the second link making sure that your definition of Line Repeater IDU Rs is consistent Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 24 2 Chapter 25 Video Surveillance About the WBB Video Surveillance Product The Video Surveillance solution provides an inexpensive asymmetric link A fast uplink for a real time video stream from a camera site to the surveil lance base and a slower command downlink from the base to the camera Site The Video Surveillance VS product belongs to the Access line A VS link consists of a base ODU transmitting at 2Mbps connected by a PoE device The camera site uses a PoE connected ODU transmitting at 5Mbps Installation configuration and maintenance of a VS link is substantially the same as for a regular PoE based link VS links are readily collocated using the HSS system so that a single base mast can accommodate up to 16 camera stations Figure 25 1 Collocated basic VS configuration Installation Follow the procedures of Chapters 4 to 8 The only substantial difference is in the Services window VS is Ethernet only You must however specify which ODU has the high transmission capacity Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 25 1 Installation Chapter 25 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Monitor Link Figure 25 2 VS Services window
231. ic from clients that are already VLAN tagged User Network A User traffic Double Tagget multiple VLANs traffic with single Provider s VLAN ID Figure 14 2 Separating client data streams using double tagging The outer tag representing the Provider VLAN comes first followed by the inner tag In QinQ the EtherType 0x9100 VLAN tags may be stacked three or more deep When using this type of Provider Tagging you should keep the following in mind e Under Provider Tagging the system double tags egress frames towards the Provider s network The system adds a tag with a VLAN ID and EtherType 0x9100 to all frames as configured by the ser vice provider Provider VLAN ID e The system always adds to each frame tags with VLAN ID and EtherType 0x9100 Therefore e Fora frame without a tag the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType 0x9100 so the frame will have one tag e Fora frame with a VLAN tag the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType 0x9100 so the frame will be double tagged e Fora frame with a VLAN tag and a provider tag the system will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType 0x9100 so the frame will be triple tagged and so on VLAN Untagging VLAN Untagging means the removal of a VLAN or a Provider tag Port Functionality The VLAN functionality is supported by all LAN and SFP ports in the IDU Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 2 Port Functionality Chapt
232. idth may also be changed The available choices are 5 10 and 20MHzdepending on model see Appendix A When you have completed making your choice click Next to continue Step 4 Hub Site Synchronization Settings Link Configuration Wizard Hub Site Synchronization Settings Settings for reducing mutual interference between multiple units at the Hub Site Synchronization Status Status A B Operation Independent Unit Independent Unit Synchronization NA RA External Pulses Not Detected Not Detected Configure Operational States Enabled These settings will apply to both sites Expected Operational States Configure Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 7 8 HSS Settings The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each side of the link See 10 for instructions about installing and configuring col located links If you do not require HSS click Next Step 5 Services Here is the services dialog Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 8 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Services 3xEl Ethernet Rate Mbps Adaptive v Distance 0 km I 0 Miles IDI A B Product FC 16 BOOO 7016 8000 Hi Version 3 3 SV Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 132010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 7 9 Services and Rates dia
233. ime 9422 minivea 1 6 Mbis 1 Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure 21 6 RFP Selector Link B Link Budget Product Channel RFPS Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain RFP Table Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss TOM Eth TDM Eth TOM Eth Fade Margin Ca fbestleest Fi fr Power EIRP B Best Fit Best Fit Min Range Max Range Distance Climate Expected R amp S Fade Margin Services Ethernet Rate Full Duplex Recommended antenna height Link A Link Budget RIGSBIFCCINT M 20 MHz v Auto de ME 5 8 GHz 9 Mbis BPSKO 75 M 16 dem 4 16 22 dB 22 dB o dB 6 aB 38 dBm 6 3 Watt 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 48 8 Km I 30 3 Miles Expected Performance 81 dBm 6 dB Ethernet Only 2 90 2074 availability downtime 9422 minivea 1 6 bibis Ethernet Only 15 Meter 49 Feet Calculate Figure 21 7 RFP Selection Guide You must select E for a Hub Site containing Wireless Mux links 4 Enter the radio details Note that Rate is chosen from a drop down list Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 8 Link B Link Budget Product Channel RFP Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Running the Link Budget Calculator R GSBIFCCANT wt Link A Link Budget 20 MHe V auto w 90 58 GHz 9 Mb s BPSK 0 75 12 Mb s QPSK 0 5 18 Mb s QPSK 0 75 2
234. ime for recovery is a delay switch to prevent rapid on off fluctuations It functions like a delay switch use to protect elec trical devices from rapid on off power fluctuations which in this con text may lead to potential short term loops 6 Click OK to accept your settings The RPL will be clearly indicated in the Link Manager In the Link status area on the top left you will see an Ethernet Blocked notice K Link TPSF_BTT 2 Link ID EBG 2056 d Services x9 1 Ethernet Blocked Frequency GHz Band 5 730 5 845 GHz FCCJIC Channel BY MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active A Link Idle message is displayed on the Ethernet Services Bar Ethernet Secvice Ring Protection Link Icle Estimated Throughpu Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 9 Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13 When the RPL cuts in as a result of a failure the Ethernet Blocked notice disappears The Ethernet Services Bar indicated that the RPL is active OO eee Ethernet Service Ring Protection Link Active Estimated Throughg Upon restoration of the broken link the RPL returns to idle status with the appropriate indications on the Link Manager main window On the status bar for all ring member links you will see the ring mem bership indicator icon e Do not configure more than one RPL If you do you will break the Ring e If you forget to configure one RPL in a Ring you
235. ing after the switch over to secondary After a few moments the TDM icons become green Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Switching back from the secondary link to the primary link will occur after the primary link has become and remains fully functional for a continuous period of at least one second Following reversion from the secondary link to the primary link the Manager main windows should look like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 12 Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 1 2 Operator Link Link Link ID Setup 1 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 280 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Site 1 2 IP Address 10 105 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 21 IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 3 30 200 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 1 2 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm 12 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected 12 4 gt n VG _ n z 7 der nn st PCT OUT el Pe var AE ToU nine 13 DP nee CSA Te Beet onnection Mo de ork IP ress 10 105 1 2 WBE Qor voted Li MK 1 j 3 Figure 12 11 Primary link operating after the switch back from secondary Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 13 System Operation descriptio
236. ing hich must be used with the unit to insure compliance Indoor Units comply with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 These devices may not cause harmful interference 2 These devices must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada China MII Operation of the equipment is only allowed under China MII 5 8GHz band regulation configuration with EIRP limited to 33 dBm 2 Watt India WPC Operation of the equipment is only allowed under India WPC GSR 38 for 5 8GHz band regulation configuration Unregulated In countries where the radio is not regulated the equipment can be operated in any regulation configuration best results will be obtained using Universal regulation configuration Safety Practices Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code NEC NFPA 70 and the National Electrical Safety Code ANSI IEEE C2 must be considered during installation NOTES 1 A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet and instructions are provided to avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in accord
237. ink Budget Calculator from the Link Manager e Choose Help Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the Link Manager as in the following figure Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Macie lt a JO Link Configuration oy ms stan Link Manager Help Fi Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Get Diagnostics Information A gt Link TPSF BTT About Link Manager TESE Figure 21 2 Accessing the Link Budget Calculator However invoked your browser displays the following page Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 5 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 Link B Link Budget Link Link Budget Product R GSBIFCCINT M Channel RFP Frequency 20MHe M auto D 5 8 GHz Rate 9 Mbis BPSKO75 M Tx Power he d8m 4 16 Tx Antenna Gain 22 ap Rx Antenna Gain 22 dB Cable Loss D B Fade Margin B Tx Power EIRP 38 demi 6 3 Watt Min Range 0 1 Kmi 0 1 Miles Max Range 45 8 Km 30 3 Miles Expected Performance DistancalClimate 488 km M Beier Good c 025 M EX Expected RSS I Fade Margin 81 dBm 6 dB Services Ethernet Only 8 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 minivea Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 6 Mb z Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure 21 3 Link Budget window e Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like this F To help protect your s
238. inks independently Enhanced Air Interface Security Wireless Link s AES 128 bit key encryption provides enhanced air interface security Advanced Management and Performance Monitoring The Wireless Link Manager software has full local and remote man agement capabilities The user friendly SNMP based management tool provides full end to end configuration event log and perfor mance monitoring capabilities Multiple Wireless Link links can be managed by WBB Network Man agement System RNMS gt SFP support in the IDU C Standard SFP modules are used enabling any type of Ethernet phys ical connectivity including various fiber connections E3 T3 or E1 T1 over Ethernet SFPs can be used as well gt Separate management and traffic VLAN support gt Ethernet Ring Topology Wireless Link Link The Wireless Link point to point solution is a wireless communication link Typically each side of the link is comprised of an Outdoor Unit ODU and antenna and an Indoor Unit IDU or PoE device as shown in Figure 1 7 below The link is managed by the SNMP based Link Manager application The IDU and the ODU are connected by a CAT5e cable that carries the ser vice traffic and power Radio Link EE ny ODU IDU as mire en 5 M re Figure 1 7 Example of Link Architecture System Components Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 6 The Outdoor Unit ODU Chapter 1 The Outdoor Unit ODU
239. ion With WBB links a Ring Protection solution prevents Ethernet loops in the ring at all times The ring is always broken somewhere e Under a ring configuration a WBB Ring Link that was down and com mences recovery keeps blocking Ethernet traffic The RPL identifies this situation blocks itself and then unblocks the other Ring Link This is the transition from step 4 to 5 in Figure 13 1 e If the failed hop is not a WBB link then there are two possibilities e If the hop Ring Link can signal that it is down by issuing a Loss of Signal LOS at the Ethernet port then the RPL will control the WBB link connected to that port in the same manner as described above to prevent an Ethernet loop e Otherwise there may be a short loop period when the RPL is still open for traffic and the Ring Link is also unblocked during the Minimum time for recovery Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by WBB The following ring topologies are supported Table 13 1 Topologies supported by WBB Ethernet Ring The ring is not connected to other rings 0 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 3 Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by WBB Chapter 13 Table 13 1 Topologies supported by WBB Ethernet Ring Continued One of the nodes is connected to another network ring r Single homed ring C Two adjacent nodes are connected through a non WBB link e g micro wave or fiber Dual homed ring o 68 Note e
240. ion Chapter 23 BRS Link Configuration The BRS link is reconfigured during the Link Installation or the Link Configu ration wizards or from the Air Interface screen Both sites in a BRS Link must be configured identically lin Any changes to the frequency settings cause the link to re Note synchronize A short loss of service will occur during re synchronization gt To Configure BRS Channel Settings 1 Set the Band Plan 2 Select the Bandwidth required e Single aBd e Double ad e Quad ad 3 Select the Frequency from the pull down menu 4 Click Next The system is re synchronized to the changes Link Installation Wizard BRS Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel Field may result in Link re synchronization Configuration iM BRS Notation Band Plan Pre Transition Post Transition Bandwidth Quad Band v Frequency MHz 42 45 61 62 2518 50 43 B1 B2 B3 2524 00 B1 B2 B3 C1 2529 50 B B3 C1 C2 2535 00 B3 C1 C2 C3 2540 50 C1 C2 C3 D1 2546 00 1 0 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem En O 3 Mo Serw Ethemet Ethemet TDM Ho Serw Ethemet Ethemet TOM Quality Figure 23 4 BRS Channel Settings Post Transition Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 23 3 Chapter 24 Cascaded Links About the WBB Cascaded Links In Chapter 1 we introduced the IDU R as device for automatic backup of leased lines The IDU R monitors the status of leased lines
241. ion contre la foudre L utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre d pend des exi gences r glementaires et de l utilisateur final Toutes les unit s ext rieures WBB sont con ues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de min imiser les risques de dommages dus la foudre WBB conseille l utilisation d un dispositif de parafoudre suppl mentaire afin de prot ger le mat riel de coups de foudre proches Mat riel suppl mentaire requis L quipement requis pour l installation du mat riel est le suivant e Pince sertir RJ 45 si un cable pr assembl ODU IDU n est pas utilise e Perceuse pour le montage sur mur seulement e Cables de terre IDU et ODU e Clef 13 mm 12 e Cable ODU IDU si non command type ext rieur CAT 5e 4 paires torsad es 24 AWG e Colliers de serrage e Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP Pr cautions de s curit pendant le montage de ODU Avant de connecter un cable l ODU la borne protectrice de masse visse de l ODU doit tre connect e un conducteur externe protecteur ou un pyl ne reli la terre Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d interrupteurs sur la connection la terre Seulement un personnel qualfi utilisant l quipement de s curit appropri doit pouvoir monter sur le pyl ne d antenne De m me l installation ou le d montage de ODU ou de pyl nes doit tre effectu e seulement par des professionnels ayant su
242. ion within the last two seconds Table E 2 IDU C Input Alarms Description User Defined Voltage in range External Alarm 10 to 50VDC Voltage gt OVDC IDU E AL Alarms Table E 3 IDU E AL Output Alarms Description Link is Down Air Link Alarm Link in Installation mode Link is up Link Authentication Problem Built in Test BIT Error Equipment Alarm No connection to the ODU Incompatible Software Both ODU and IDU are in operational state At least one of two conditions e Link is up but at least one of the ports with service config Link is down or Link is up and ALL ureo ar remote ere 0 orts with service configured at Service Alarm Remote End AIS only for TDM serv state p g the remote and local IDUs are at e At least one of the ports with NORMAL state service configured at local IDU are at LOS or AIS only for TDM serv state Link is up or Link is down without the power fail indication within the last two seconds of the active link Link Loss due to Power Fail A Link Loss occurred while a power fail at the remote End was detected by the remote end IDU Table E 4 IDU E AL Input Alarms Description User Defined User Defined User Defined External Alarm External Alarm On External Alarm Off Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 E 2 PoE 8 Alarms Appendix E PoE 8 Alarms Table E 5 PoE 8 Output Alarms Description ODU Current LED Indicator Power LED Indicator Wireless
243. ions 3 To configure the link as a regular Rink link click Rink Link Non RPL and enter the ring LAN VIDs at least one to which it belongs and click OK Ring Configuration Link Mode Each Aing must contain one APL Ring Link non RPL Ring VLAN IDs i Verity that al inks are configured wih same Aing VLAN ID 4 df Advanced Minimum time for failure detection msec _ EE Minimum time for recovery sec EH Figure 13 7 Configuring Ring LAN VIDs 4 To configure the link as RPL click Ring Protection Link RPL and enter its Ring VID Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 8 Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13 Ring Configuration Link Mode Each Ring must contain one APL Ring VLAN IDs i Vedy fat al inks are configured w h same Aing VLAN i0 2 MP JP 3 Advanced Minimum time for failure detection msec Minimum time for recovery sec Cancel Cancel Figure 13 8 Configuring RPL VIDs 5 Enter the minimum times for failure detection and recovery For dual homed configurations where part of the ring goes through the core if a core segment fails the core should be allowed to recover before the RPL enters Protection State Otherwise it could happen that both the core and the WBB ring will switch in parallel You should there fore configure a Minimum time for failure detection high enough to take this possibility into account The Minimum t
244. ir Interface Details Click the Air Interface item in the left hand list A window similar to the fol lowing appears Site Configuration A File Actions Help Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Air Interface Air Interface General Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory A Sacin Expected dBm Link ID Tx Power D Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Seni Installation Frequency GHz ervices Current dBm Installation Parameters 2X External Alarms Channel Bandwidth MHz I Operations Figure 8 2 Air interface details The only thing you may change here is the expected Tx power If for exam ple you reduce it to 22 you are first offered a notification window like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 3 Hub Site Sync Chapter 8 Tx Power Limits Tx Power Max Values Under the following Link rates the Tx Power limits are D SS Rate Mbps Max Tx Power dBm 9 12 23 18 23 24 20 36 20 48 16 Less than the Expected Tx Power value Site Configuration P frou are about to change ODU parameters v7 This process may last several seconds and may affect link quality Do you wish to continue If you accept it the change is effected immediately Notice that each site can have a different Tx Power setting Changing the Tx Power will affect service quality The same considerations apply here as we
245. is self explanatory The Sync signal path is less self evident If we set ODU 1 on SYNC 1 to HSS Master then the Sync signal path is as shown in Figure 10 6 The signal travels from ODU 1 to SYNC 1 from SYNC 1 to SYNC 2 from SYNC 2 to ODU 2 and back again The back and forth paths repeat for the second to fourth ODU from left to right The signal exits the HSS unit at SYNC 5 and terminates in ODU Ji The choice of the ODU on SYNC 1 as HSS master is not mandatory but is good practice If for example we were to use ODU 3 as HSS master the Sync signal path would be ODU 3 to SYNC 3 then left and right to SYNC 2 and SYNC 4 It would then propagate to ODUs 2 and 4 terminating at both ODUs 1 and 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 4 Using More than One HSS Unit Chapter 10 00000 Figure 10 6 HSS sync signal path with ODU 1 as HSS Master Using More than One HSS Unit In a large collocation site several HSS units may be cascaded daisy chained subject to the following conditions Condition 1 Cabling Sequence 1 Up to nine ODUs may be connected to the first HSS unit using HSS ports SYNC 1 SYNC 2 SYNC 3 up to SYNC 9 in order without leaving empty ports 2 The next available SYNC port of the first HSS unit should be connected to SYNC 10 of the second HSS unit as shown in Figure 10 7 In the illustration the next available port on the first HSS unit is SYNC 6 3 The second HSS unit may be filled out with up t
246. ite lt remote site name gt The Product is not identified at the lt local site name gt site Warning Link Manager is incompatible with the ODU software version The Product is not identified at the lt remote site name gt site The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning ODU release is newer than Link Manager release remote site name gt site Wizards are not available Link Manager will be used just for monitoring Upgrade the Link Manager You will get this message as a pop up The Manager identified a newer ODU release at both sites warning The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning lt local site name gt site Newer Version identified at the lt local site name gt site Warning ODU release is newer than Link Manager release Wizards are not available Link Manager will be used just for monitoring Upgrade the Link Manager Newer Version identified at the lt remote site name gt site Warming Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 16 Setting the Events Preferences Chapter 9 Setting the Events Preferences You can define a color for the messages to be displayed in the Event Log window according to the severity of the event The severity is predefined gt To set the Message color 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears 2 Click the Events Tab Preferences Monitor Events Advanced GSU KU Event Priority
247. ite 1 4 E1 Ports IP Address 10 105 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 1 11 Frequency 5 280 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000028 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Compatible IDUs detected 1 2 000029 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM Ethernet Service has been opened 1 2 000030 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened 1 2 000031 3 30 2009 10 37 39 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm Me lt iil S Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 10 105 1 2 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure 12 7 Primary link a few seconds before regular No Link display It will then revert to the standard No Link available window On the secondary link Manager window you will see a window like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 8 Maintaining a WBB MHS Link Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x G 2 Link Configuration Link Installation ite 2 Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off j Link Link Location Link ID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Ethernet Throughput Mbps RSS dem Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 2 2 TDM Service Secondary Link Active ounters Display Mode
248. ity links operating in license free bands e A comprehensive solution providing protection against both equip ment failure and loss ofair interface by simple connectivity between a primary link and a secondary link The main service redundancy features of the WBB MHS are e TDM service cut over from the primary to the secondary link is com pletely automatic e TDM service cut over time no more than 50 ms e Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes available e Support for up to sixteen TDM channels for Wireless Mux and four TDM channels for Wireless Link MHS is supported between e two Wireless Link links e two Wireless Mux links e a Wireless Link link and a Wireless Mux link What WBB MHS provides Equipment Protection Equipment protection is provided for the electrically active network ele ments ODU and IDU The primary IDU and the secondary IDU are connected by a cable to moni tor failure and to control protection switching Switching time is less than 50ms When connecting two Wireless Link links as 1 1 one dual polarization antenna can be shared by the primary link and the secondary link Air Interface Protection Air Interface protection is unique to WBB and is optimized for wireless links operating in license free bands The primary link and the secondary link use different frequency channels If the air interface of the primary link is disturbed and cannot carry the required TDM service then the s
249. ive Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fos RE ENG Ethernet Throughput Mbps 0C goo ss Radio Interface 4h Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 TOM Service Counters Display Mode Sccuirnitiletive Chirrerit Top pS Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks it Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 TDM Ports Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 580 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Er _ Trap Source IP Address 000001 30 03 2009 16 46 09 Cannot bind to trap service port Port 162 already in Internal 000002 30 03 2009 16 46 09 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available _ Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 102 Q DFS Encrypted Link Figure 16 4 Both sites activated and awaiting configuration FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration The Configuration procedure may be carried out from either site using the Configuration wizard as shown in Chapter 7 E Both sites in a FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link must be configured identically Note j The only difference is in the Channel Settings window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 4 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Configuration Link Configuration Wizard Channel Settings Chapter 16 Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization a Q Operating Chann
250. ivi une formation gt Pour monter l ODU 1 V rifier que les supports de fixation de l ODU sont correctement mis la terre 2 Monter l unit ODU sur le pyl ne ou sur le mur se r f rer la Installa tion sur pyl ne et mur au dessous 3 Connecter la c ble de terre au point de ch ssis sur l ODU 4 Relier le cable ODU IDU au connecteur ODU RJ 45 5 Visser les presses toupe de cables pour assurer le scellement herme tique des unit s ODU 6 Attacher le c ble au pyl ne ou aux supports en utilisant des colliers clas SS UV 7 Repeter la proc dure sur le site distant Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 2 Connecter la terre IDU C Appendix G A Ne pas se placer en face d une ODU sous tension Prudence Connecter la terre a IDU C Connecter un cable de terre de 18 AWG la borne de masse de l appareil L appareil doit tre constamment connect la terre e Les appareils sont pr vus pour tre install s par un personnel de service e Les appareils doivent tre connect s une prise de courant avec une protection de terre a e Le courant CC du IDU C doit tre fourni par l interm diaire d un disjoncteur bipolaire et le Prudence diam tre du cable doit tre de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm Installation sur pylone et mur L ODU ou O PoE peuvent tre mont s sur un pyl ne ou un mur Contenu du kit de montage ODU Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pieces suivantes e u
251. k User Manual Release 1 9 30 Vili UP Ne 8 23 Backup Restore of ODU Software Files 8 24 Backup ODU Software to a EE EE RE 8 24 Restoring ODU Software or Configuration nn nn nn rene eenemnnmenenenenes 8 24 Muting the alignment tone ME scessacenmnssaanaseserceaieteststerapsainenriesanieuseasienst 8 25 Configurati n With NSG 8 25 Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics Retrieving Link Information Get Diagnostics 9 1 HOK COMPAL IN aa en an um tue 9 2 TM 9 3 Local Line 0 810 26 EE EEE E A Er AET 9 6 Remote Reverse Loopback DD 9 6 Remote Line Loopback GE EEE ENE AE 9 6 NNN 9 7 Reinstalling and Realigning a LID PRE EE NE EE 9 7 The Link NN 9 8 FUNN a dou 9 8 TT OO ge EE TR MT RE 9 8 TNT 9 8 Viewing 66 NE NE 9 9 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar 9 12 Setting Air Interface ThresholdS nement 9 12 Events Alarme and TAPE aan iride A a PAAA NE 9 14 RE CNE EEE EP 9 14 Lmk Manager EEE EE EE EE VE 9 16 Setting the Events Preferences EE RE 9 17 VENN 9 17 FE VG EE EN AR nie 9 18 Viewing Recent Events r rnrrsnnrnrnrnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnennnnnvnnnnnnnnnvennuenenen 9 18 Reverting Alert Messages arrarrannrnnrannarnvnnnnnnnnnvnvnnvnnnunavnnnavnvenvnusnvavsnvaunnsnne 9 19 Other Advanced Preferences eee 9 20 Setting the Link Manager Language rxrrrvrrnnnvnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneneunnnvnr 9 20 Saumo SNMP PA ETTE EE 9 20 Remote Power Fall IA 9 20 TOUDE NNN 9 20 FT Lu 9 21 Restonpg PASSES AT
252. l device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor antenna kits in the United States or where FCC rules apply only those antennas certified with the product are used The use of any antenna other Warning than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part
253. le Loss o dB e B Site A Site B 38 dBm 6 3 Watt Name 0 1 Km 0 1 Miles 48 8 Km 30 3 Miles Longtitude few Jem Expected Performance Antenna Height m 48 km M a Coordinates Good c 02 M C 0 25 F ES Wargin 81 dBm 6 dB Services Ethernet Only YW 98 2074 availability downtime 9422 minivea Ethernet Rate Full Duplex 1 6 Mb s Ethernet Only Recommended antenna height 15 Meter 49 Feet Figure 21 9 Calculation of distance from site coordinates For example if you enter the following coordinates and press Set Site site B Latitude 41 1 MN 40 5 Now Longtitude 75 W ae Antenna Height mi 10 the range will be calculated and displayed Min 0 1 Erm f 0 1 Miles Range Max 69 Km l 42 9 Miles RequirediClimate 1271 km M Coordinates Good c 0 25 If for example we enter Site A 41 1 N lat 74 2 W Long Site B 40 8 N lat 74 0 W Long Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 10 Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21 Site site B Latitude 41 1 N iw 40 5 N iM Longtitude Antenna Height im Close 5 Click Set The distance and link budget is calculated 6 Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a drop down list of Climactic C Factor values It is only available if you choose a non adap tive rate Link B Link Budget Product Channel I REPS Frequency Rate Tx Power Tx Antenna Gain Rx Antenna Gain Cable Loss Fade Margin Tx Power EIRP Min
254. led areas should not be used Using those areas you may loose the collocated link with the longest distance between sites If you do move the slider into a circled area you will receive a popup warning Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 10 RFP Wireless Mux Considerations Chapter 10 F Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate from the lists below Service TDM Jitter Buffer Hat Standb Ring Ethernet O05 Services Ethetnet Configure Rate Mbps Adaptive Distance 0 Km 0 Miles Transmissjo Links operating at channel bandwidth of 10MHz will be temporarily disabled 10 04 90 0 lt Back next gt Cancel Monitor Link p Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 10 12 Services and Rates Wireless Mux 100 master Wireless Mux clients Extreme asymmetric allocation By restricting one direction into the restricted area the more distant sites may not even be able to sustain the link much less send or receive data e Asymmetric Allocation and Collocation If the link is collocated the use of Asymmetric Allocation is limited The effective available range for Asymmetric Allocation between the two circled tick in Figure 10 11 is primarily determined by three factors e The RFP in use B or E e Channel Bandwidth e Link distance The first two parameters are entered during Link Inst
255. lled ODUs in a network The update files may be located anywhere accessible by the operator The SWU provides for e Prior backup of the current files prior to upgrade e Upgrade from a lis e Delayed upgrade e Various ODU reset options The default location of the software files is in the installation area and can be used to restore factory defaults i The following procedure is generic to all WBB radio and GSU products ote Upgrading an Installed Link gt To upgrade software for a link 1 In the Link Manager main menu click Tools Software Upgrade The following detached window appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 15 1 Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15 e Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help X E A Start Upgrade Stop parade Add Site Clear All Upgrade Package Save Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Reset Details Available Release 2 5 00 b2635 Jul 25 2010 O Reset each device after successful upgrade Description Release 2 5 00 O Reset all devices after all selected devices successfully upgraded ee pg POENG C Delayed Upgrade Date 07 27 10 Time 03 58 PM Software Upgrade Link Name IP Address Site Name Current Release Progress Status Details TPSFBTT ere ES MTT FEE EES ME Ditect connection 192 168 1 101 A 25 00 b2630 Jun 272010 sd Airconnection 1921681 102 B 2 5 00_b2630 Jun 27 2010 id Figure 15 1 Softwar
256. log To choose Services see the corresponding Installation procedure in 5 The procedures for setting the Jitter Buffer and Hot Standby parameters are also the same as the corresponding procedures in 5 Click Next to continue Step 6 TDM Clock Configuration The following dialog is displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 9 Configuration Chapter 7 Link Configuration Wizard TOM Parameters Configure the TOM Parameters below Ts Clock Configure Select Maximum Deselect All Master Clock independent Lock Per Tor Supported Monitor Link RSS dem Figure 7 10 TDM Parameters Configuration To configure the TDM Parameters see the corresponding procedure in 5 Step 7 Configuration Summary and Exit Link Configuration Wizard Completing the Link Configuration Wizard You have successfully completed the Link Configuration Wizard Services 3xE1 Ethernet Channel GHz 5 740 Channel Bw MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Link ID EBG 20561334 To close this wizard click Done Done Cancel Monitor Link a Radio Interface A B pee EN OO S O Figure 7 11 Contiguration Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 7 10 Configuration Chapter 7 The main window now reflects the configuration Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator A Link TPSF_BTT Carsten Link ID
257. lse Up hssSyncPulseDisappearedClear normal Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse disappeared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS additional sync pulse was disappeared tdmBackupClear normal Indicates that the TDM main link was activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM main link was activated linkLockAuthorizedRemoteODU normal Indicates that the remote ODU is authorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Authorized remote ODU connection accepted Indicates that the ODU is authorized Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Authorized ODU connection permitted linkAuthenticationDisabled normal Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Link Authentication has been disabled Indicates that the Primary Link Was Activated Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Primary Link Is Active sfpExtraction Indicates that a device was extracted from SFP Port sfpPort1 Clear 227 normal Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to connected Contains two parameters 1 Description SFP port 1 status changed to connected S 2 s Is the Eth mode speed amp duplex Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 27 normal hotStandbyClear linkLockAuthorizedODU normal Link Ma
258. lt gateway gt set trap lt index 1 10 gt lt ipaddr gt lt port 0 65535 gt set readpw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt set writepw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt set trappw lt oldpasswd gt lt passwd gt set buzzer lt mode 0 OFF1 ON gt set tpc lt power Value between minimal Tx power and maximal Tx power gt Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Explanation Displays ODU product name Name Location hardware and software revisions uptime MAC address IDU product name IDU software and hardware revisions Displays IP Subnet Gateway Traps table Displays State Link ID Channel BW RSS TSL Frequency ACS DFS Rate ARA Distance Displays Bridge Mode Aging time Port table State Status and action Displays Clock Mode Master Clock Mode Current Clock Quality TDM table Line status Error Blocks Displays Time Server and Offset Shows the performance monitor tables for each interface according to user defined monitoring intervals Set the ODU IP address subnet mask and gateway The user must reset the ODU after the command completion Set a specific trap from the traps table e g set trap 3 192 168 2 101 162 Set the read access password Read Community Set the read write access password Read Write Community Set the trap Community string Toggle the buzzer mode 0 off 1 on Set the ODU Tx Power If a wrong value is entered both min and max values shall be displayed in the e
259. mer will be called the managing site and the latter the over the arr site Which is which is always determined by the loca tion of the managing computer Wireless Link supports three connection methods for the managing com puter e Local a direct peer to peer connection between the Ethernet ports on the managing computer and the IDU or PoE device Local con nection is always read write e Network the managing computer and the site A IDU or PoE device belong to a LAN and communicate through a router or switch e Over the air the managing computer connects to site B via the air interface e The managing computer may be connected to the link through an IDU or a PoE device In what follows where ever we refer to an IDU it includes PoE devices unless stated otherwise Typically if we need to refer to an IDU as such we will use a model name such as IDU C The terms uplink and downlink originate from the field of Satellite com munications In a backhaul or ISP context uplink is from the user to the network and downlink is from the network to the user Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 18 Conventions Used in this Manual Chapter 1 Conventions Used in this Manual Mp Caution Warning Notifications Notifications consist of Notes Cautions and Warnings The purpose of a Note is to e Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or coun ter intuitive e Emphasize a special feature or
260. mum cable length 100 m Table A 31 Mechanical 1 Okg 2 2Ibs Table A 32 Power Power Feeding Power provided by PoE device Max Power Dissipation 10Watt Table A 33 Environmental Operating Temperature Range 35 C to 60 C 13 F to 140 F Table A 34 Safety EN IEC Designed to meet EN IEC 60950 1 60950 22 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 7 Antenna Characteristics Appendix A Table A 35 EMC CO Designed to meet 47 CFR Class B Part15 Subpart B ETSI Designed to meet EN 300 386 V1 3 3 EN 301 489 4 V1 3 1 EN 301 489 1 CAN CSA CEI IEC Designed to meet CISPR 22 02 AS NZS Designed to meet CISPR22 2006 Class B Antenna Characteristics An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig nal in the form of RF power is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa The transmission range is a function of the antenna gain and transmitting power These factors are limited by country regulations The Wireless Link may be operated with an integrated antenna attached to the ODU unit or with an external antenna wired to the ODU via a N type connectors All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce losses The required antenna impedance is 50Q Table A 36 Antenna vie Frequency bands bands Frequency Beam Type it AAA i Mam 0 2 30 2 70 GHz Integrated Flat panel 17 5dBi 2 400 2 483 GHz External i Bi 1 2f Esia EE ma 3 2 50 2 70 GHz
261. n 1 Description SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedAlarm Indicates Desired UL DL RAtio Can Not Be Applied cbwMismatch 130 major Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth mismatch was detected Contains two parameters 1 Description Channel Bandwidth Mismatch one side is n0 MHz and the other is n1 MHz n0 is the local Channel Bandwidth value in MHz n1 is the remoet Channel Bandwidth value in MHz gpsNotSynchronized 131 major Indicates that the GPS is not synchronized with satellites Pulses are self generated tdmServiceClear 200 major Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service Normal ethServiceOpened 201 normal Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Ethernet Service has been opened encryptionClear normal Indicates that encryption is OK Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Encryption Status Normal changeLinkPasswordClear 204 normal Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Link Password has been changed at on s s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 26 Trap Parameters Appendix D Table D 3 MIB Traps
262. n A Radio Interface Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Estimated Throughput Mbps a _ IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors MR min Ree aS ARE Error Blocks IP Address 192 168 2 102 E1 Ports Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Frequency 5 780 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 16 09 2010 14 38 58 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 6 1 Main window Wireless Link is Active The main window of the Link Manager contains a large amount of informa tion about the link Before proceeding to details of link configuration we set out the meaning of each item in the main window The Link Manager Toolbar In configuration mode the Link Manager toolbar contains the following but tons TE x i Fr 9 9 Link Configuration Link Installation Site Site B Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off Exit HeloiF 1 In Installation mode Link Configuration is grayed out and Link Installation iS open The button functions are set out in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Link Manager Toolbar Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link assigns text files Link Configuration for storing alarms statistics and configuration data
263. n Chapter 12 Link Manager 10 105 2 2 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help fe FV a Link Configuration Link Installatori Site 2 2 Site 2 4 Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Link ID Setup 2 Services 2xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 490 Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Site 2 2 IP Address 10 105 2 2 Location RSS dem Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Ethernet Throughput Mbps a lt _ lt TDM Service Secondary Link Not Active Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 z z ane yyy Estimated Time Between Errors Time Between Errors ii 2 i Trap Destination 10 105 2 21 Error Blocks ik Site 2 4 IP Address 10 105 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 10 105 2 11 E1 Ports Frequency 5 490 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 lt amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network 3 30 2009 10 21 36 AM Connected to 2 2 Internal 3 30 2009 10 27 34 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM 2 out of 2 requested TDM Trunks have been opened ODU 3 30 2009 10 27 46 AM TDM Service Alarm The reason is Line state alarm ODU 3 30 2009 10 31 37 AM Compatible IDUs detected ODU 3 30 2009 10 33 03 4M Compatible IDUs detected 2 2 Hit IP Address 10 105 2 2 F DFS
264. n Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta tus label red and showing Inactive 4 Click Site Location Air Interface for the logged in site 5 The Air Interface dialog box opens Site Configuration Location File Actions Help ti 3 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Auto Installation Mode System Air Interface ir Interface General Hub Site Sync Link ID B Management Inventory R Security Expected dBm TxPower Date amp Time Current dBm BET Oo Advanced Installation Parameters ak Ethernet TDM Seni Installation Frequency GHz Other 5 580 E ae ervices XX External Alarms Channel Bandwidth MHz 20 bs I Operations Available Channels Operation Master Slave LD A To Activate the Sie fil Link JO configure Master Slave and click OK Appiy Figure 16 2 Air Interface dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 2 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation Chapter 16 6 Enter the Link ID and note it for use with the second site of the link 7 Check the Master radio button 8 Click OK The following window appears Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer BK File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help de X Site Location site Get Diagnostics Link Link Location Link ID EBG 20561334 Services Mone equency GHz 5 510 RSS dBm Chante MEL Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps
265. n window click the Link Installa tion button The Link Installation button is only accessible if the antennas are properly aligned If this box is grayed out you should align the anten nas as set out in 3 on page 3 17 The Installation Wizard opens Link Installation Wizard N 4 Welcome to the Link Installation Wizard This wizard is used For performing Link configuration updates After Changes made in Frequency field the Link will be resynchronized Mote that all changes made to the Link should be reflected in Link Quality monitor All the fields are mandatory wh wh Monitor Link Radio Interface B RSS dem LE SE Quality Mo Ser Ethernet Ethernet TDM Ho Serw Ethernet Ethernet TOM Figure 5 1 Link Installation Wizard The bottom data area reproduces the corresponding data from the main window which the above panel obscures See 6 for a field by field descrip tion of this data area Click Next to proceed with the installation procedure Step 2 System Parameters The system dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 3 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Monitor Link System Fill in the attribute Fields below Link ID aA Link Name Link Sitel Location Site Location Link Password TITTLITTLTITTLITT Radio Interface Location Location RSS dem mut 3 Quality Mo Ser Ethemet Ethernet TDM H
266. nager Traps Appendix D Table D 3 MIB Traps Sheet 5 of 5 Severity Description compatibleldus Indicates that the ODU has identified compatible Idus on both sides of the link desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedClear Indicates Current UL DL Ratio Is Equal To Desired Ratio cbwMatch 230 normal Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth match was detected Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Channel Bandwidth value in MHz switchCbwAndChannel 231 normal Indicates that the system is switching Channel Bandwidth and channel frequency Contains two parameters 1 Switching to Channel Bandwith n0 MHz and to channel n1 GHz ringRplStatelde ringRplStatelde 1232 Inomal RPL state changed to Idle ringEthServiceStatus 233 normal Indicates Ethernet service s state blocked unblocked Contains a single parameter 1 Description Ethernet s state blocked unblocked ringFirstRpmReceived 234 normal Ring application in non RPL link indicates first from a specific RPL was received Contains a single parameter 1 Description RPM s VLAN ID ringEthernetSrviceUnblockedTO 235 normal Ring application in non RPL link Ethernet service is unblocked due to RPM timeout gpsSynchronized Indicates that the GPS is synchronized with satellites Link Manager Traps The Link Manager application issues traps to indicate various events These traps are shown in the Link Managerr Events Log A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the
267. nal pulse type wbbOduAirHssDesiredExtPulseType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 6 Integer RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse type Valid values for read write typeA 2 typeB 3 typeC 4 typeD 5 typeE 6 Valid value for read only notApplicable 1 wbbOduAirHssRfpT able NAA ODU Radio Frame Patterns RFP Table wbbOduAirHssRfpEntry Z ODU RFP Table entry INDEX wbbOduAirHssRfpindex wbbOduAirHssRfplndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer ODU RFP Table index The index represent the 1 Radio Frame Pattern typeA 2 typeB 3 typeC 4 typeD 5 typeE 6 wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW5MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service 2 under Channel BW of 5MHz _ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW5MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service under 3 Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW10MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service 4 under Channel BW of 10MHz _ in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW10MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of TDM service under 5 Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern wbbOduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW20MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 7 1 Integer Represents the compatibility of Et
268. ne grande clame voir Figure G 1 e une petite clame voir Figure G 2 e un bras voir Figure G 3 e quatre visses hex t te M8x40 e deux visses hex t te M8x70 e quatre rondelles plates M8 e trois rondelles lastiques M8 e deux crous M8 Figure G 1 grande clame Figure G 2 petite clame Figure G 3 bras Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 3 Montage sur un pyl ne Appendix G Montage sur un pyl ne Kir nca MERE Riom GUTTE LAON Ta ETTE bea Ha hi mbil Perdeli dew M TE ijp TT VE LET LT Abe Be re b l iD Lier Pree 4 de uen Peas Piga MD gear i peeve de phn gras de tal mn title D f FI Bf s sE ef du on m STAR gpche 13 p ta UG bee epee l r vulkan EDIT ar rart lan pes 2 1 dress Feb Lar qe real Ga varige der Zi File Seer Lente ma pans an tr evt La plate amp bed kijai et rentes TJ d corses dique Vaart on douple de vera de D F r ae N POUR PLONE 1 11 d Figure G 4 Montage sur un pyl ne Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 4 Montage sur un mur Appendix G Montage sur un mur Kit d installation E DOESCEPTEN CUuLNTITE Bens sen Men Vibe HII enedethes potes M rondelles slivtigua ME sure LE bate CETTE Bj Bp Es Pah es ETAPE 1 Attacher la pice 1 la base rape ref l s surfaces moletees n utilisant les pi ces 2 3 4 5 comme indiqu Utiliser un couple de serrage de 24 Him o
269. nel By MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Link ID FRG 29561334 To close this wizard click Done Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETBE Figure 5 21 Installation Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window The main window now reflects the installation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 18 Installation Chapter 5 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator ME File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help gE x i i a Bg o Link Configuration Link Installation Site A Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Help F1 Xe Link TPSF_BTT Link ID EBG_20561334 Services 3xE1 Ethernet Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dem Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active Location Radio Interface Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Estimated Throughput Mbps D Mmm a IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 TDM Service Estimated Time Between Errors Error Blocks IP Address 192 168 2 102 E1 Ports Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 16 09 2010 14 38 58 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Encrypted Link Figure 5 22 Main window of the Manager after installation with loaded trunks gt To verify th
270. nennnnennennennnnnennnnnnnnnnenn 7 9 FIGURE 7 10 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION oasrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 7 10 FIGURE 7 11 CONFIGURATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY iuuuvanennennennennnnnnnennennnnnennennnnnnne 7 10 FIGURE 7 12 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER CONFIGURATION seccecseceeeeeeeeveues 7 11 FIGURE 8 1 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX aanrannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnnnnrn 8 2 FIGURE 8 2 AIR INTERFACE DETAILS anennnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennsnnennnnnnnnnnenn 8 3 FIGURE 8 3 HSS STATUS scssonana nanas ts nsontansnn ecscsenenan can kkenennanisd atd 8 5 FIGURE 8 4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ss ssensenuunu s 8 6 FIGURE 8 5 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC VLAN SETTINGS ccecceevecvecvereeeeeeserenrs 8 8 FIGURE 8 6 ENABLE DISABLE TELNET ACCESS auunannnnnnnnannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnenenn 8 8 FIGURE 8 7 INVENTORY WINDOW sesnennvnnnnnnnnnnennennennennnnennennnnnennennnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnnenn 8 9 FIGURE 8 8 AVAILABLE SECURITY FEATURES anuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnvnnnennn 8 9 FIGURE 8 9 CHANGING THE COMMUNITY STRING cceeceeeececeeececeeeeeuesueseeeneaneuteuneueantas 8 11 FIGURE 8 10 ALTERNATIVE COMMUNITY DIALOG BOX ccceccecseeeeesevseveevavsaevanseeeenentanns 8 11 FIGURE 8 11 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION avnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnne 8 14 FIGURE 8 12 CHANGE DATE AND TIME aavannannnnnnnnnnnnnnann
271. nerating signals and detecting signals This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper sig nals This ODU is a client Continue Tx but is not detecting signals This ODU is a client Disable Tx and is detecting signals from multiple sources All orange cases transmit STBY Red MHS mode Primary Link state not active Orange MHS mode Secondary Link state active Use the following table to troubleshoot faults in the system Table 9 8 System Troubleshooting Ensure that power is connected to the IDU No power Ensure that the ODU cable is properly wired and connected Complete the installation procedure from the Link Manager Check the antenna alignment Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units is the same channel settings and Link ID Check the antenna alignment reconfigure the link Weak signal received Check the alignment tone sounds the Best Signal sequence Replacing an ODU Prior to any action ensure that both ODUs have the same software version You can see this on the inventory panels for each site For Site A click Site A Inventory and note the ODU software version Repeat this for Site B using Site B Inventory If either ODU has an old software version perform a software upgrade It is important to configure the new ODU identically to the old ODU to oid con figuration mismatches which will disrupt the link An ODU may be reconfigured in several ways
272. net FE SFP transceiver can be plugged into the IDU C These SFPs support various Ethernet interfaces For example a fibre optic interface can be used to support long fibre distances In addition System on SFP transceivers can be used supporting a proto col converter concept The main application for such SFP transceivers is TDM over Ethernet providing E1 T1 or E3 T3 over full duplex Ethernet Remote Bridge The following table provides a few SFP types that can be used with the IDU C Table C 1 SFP Type and Interface description SFP Type Interface Description 100baseT 100BaseT IEEE 802 3 UTP CAT5 100baseFX Multimode fiber optic MMF link spans up to 2km long 100baseLX Single mode fiber optic SMF links pans up to 10km 100baseBX SMF single strand link spans up to 10 km or 40 km E3T3 FE Es 13 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 C 1 Appendix D MIB Reference Introduction About the MIB The WBB MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to control WBB equipment The MIB is divided into public and a private API groups e Public RFC 1213 MIB II variables RFC 1214 MIB II System and Interfaces sections e Private Controlled by WBB and supplements the public group This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by WBB Terminology The following terms are used in this appendix Management Information Base Application Programming Interface SNMP Simple Network Management
273. net commands 8 27 BRS Installation 16 1 23 1 Link Activation 23 1 C Changing link password 5 5 Channel selecting 5 7 Clock configuration TDM 5 16 Community Strings Changing 8 11 Editing 8 10 Forgotten passwords 8 11 MIB D 2 Read Only 8 10 Read Write 8 10 Trap 8 10 Configuration Parameters 8 3 Configuring Advanced 8 2 8 15 8 17 8 19 Air Interface Air interface contact person Date and Time Date and time Ethernet settings External alarms Frequency channel HSS Security Security settings Service parameters System System parameters System settings TDM MHS status Tx Power and antenna View Inventory Release 1 9 30 8 2 7 1 8 2 8 2 8 1 8 1 8 1 7 1 8 1 8 2 8 1 7 1 8 2 7 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 2 Index 1 Connecting user equipment Customer Support D Date and time setting DC Power terminal pinout DFS changing band for Configuration FCC IC DFS Installation Procedure Link Activation E1 T1 connections Backup link Environment Interference Ethernet Ring 1 1 operation Protection Switching purpose setting up ff supported topologies terminology Events color codes log priority Expected Signal Level for AIND radios F Factory settings revert to FEC Gateway Telnet display GSU Cascaded Sites Configuring Installation Kit Preferences Redundancy Software Update Telnet Support Transmission Phase Tx Transmission Ratio use functionality scenarios GUS and RFP Wirel
274. nnector Label brackets J 19 Rack A B D srr H Secondary RES J 19 Rach mounting Indicator ODU Port E Alanns Port pin Power te runding munir holes LEDs Port Connector 3 holes Figure 3 12 IDU C front panel In Figure 3 13 we display a perspective view of the IDU C Figure 3 13 IDU C A perspective view Further description of the keyed items in Figure 3 12 is shown in Table 3 1 below Table 3 1 Components of an IDU C front panel A Indicator LEDs See Figure 3 14 B ODU Port RJ 45 connector see Table B 1 e LAN RJ45Ports Ethernet RJ 45 connector see Table B 3 Do LAN SFP Port See Appendix C Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 10 Mounting the IDU C Chapter 3 Table 3 1 Components of an IDU C front panel Alarm Ports Standard DB25 female connector see Table B 7 Label indent Place for adhesive identification labels CS Primary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector see Table B 8 CS Secondary 3 pin Power Connector EG Grounding Lug Use the lug supplied e 0 4 8 or 16 E1 T1 Ports See Table B 5 M Standby Port Hot Standby ready HSB cable socket see Table B 6 The Indicator LEDs Item A in Table 3 1 above are shown in more detail below nn SE Qu OD po 9 oa 2 avg ARE ST Figure 3 14 IDU C Front Panel LEDs Figure 3 15 IDU E Front Panel LEDs The purpose of the LEDs is shown in Table 3 2 below Table 3 2 IDU C and IDU E R Front Panel LEDs Gre
275. nnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnn 8 15 FIGURE 8 13 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURED FROM AN NTP SERVER saunannannnnnnnnnnnnnennennene 8 15 FIGURE 8 14 BRIDGE VLAN AND MIR CONFIGURATION ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeearaereneeens 8 16 FIGURE 8 15 VLAN TAG SETTINGS ccccceeceeceeneccccceaecaesneaneessaceaeuausnesneassaseaeageugnaneas 8 18 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XV FIGURE 8 16 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX scceesscceeeees 8 20 FIGURE 8 17 ETHERNET MIR THROUGHPUT SELECTION cceececeeeveeeereeeeaeseeeevaneeneanes 8 20 FIGURE 8 18 TOM MHS STATUS Lend 8 21 FIGURE 8 19 EXTERNAL ALARMS CONFIGURATION aununnnnnnnennnnnenennennennennennennenennrnnennenn 8 22 FIGURE 8 20 SITE CONFIGURATION RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS ccecsecseceeeeeeeeveneanes 8 23 FIGURE 8 21 ALIGNMENT TONE BUZZER STATES nvanvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnsnnsnnnnnennnnenne 8 25 FIGURE 8 22 TELNET SESSION LOG ON asrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarnavnnnnnnnnnnenn 8 26 FIGURE 8 23 TELNET MANAGEMENT WINDOW cceeceeeeecaccacsaeseeseuseesevaevansaeeeeueeennante 8 27 FIGURE 9 1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DIALOG BOX uunnunvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnenn 9 2 FIGURE 9 2 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX ccsececcenecceanecceaccneuneuneaneassacsaceaeuaeannaneases 9 4 FIGURE 9 3 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX WITH ONE SITE PORT SELECTED seeceevenvars 9 4 FIGURE 9 4 LOOPBACK OPTIONS eine cie 9 4 FIGURE 9 5 LOOPBACK DEFIN
276. nnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnne 3 10 FIGURE 3 13 IDU C PERSPECTIVE VIEW sesnvanvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnne 3 10 FIGURE 3 14 IDU C FRONT PANEL LEDS iauanvannannnnnnnnannannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnavnnnnnnnnvnnnn 3 11 FIGURE 3 15 IDU E FRONT PANEL LEDS iavunennvnnvnnvnvnnvnnennennenennvnnennennnnnennsnnnnnnnnnennn 3 11 FIGURE 3 16 IDU C POWER CONNECTORS sannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 13 FIGURE 3 17 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALIGNMENT ccecccceeeeccaveneaveneaveneaneneanenss 3 15 FIGURE 4 1 LAN PORTS ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE IDU C nn 4 2 FIGURE 4 2 PINGING AN UNINSTALLED AND UNCONFIGURED LINK cecceeeseveeeeeeeeeeeseeeeranrs 4 3 FIGURE 4 3 FIRST TIME LOG ON WINDOW avannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 3 FIGURE 4 4 LOG ON WINDOW EXPOSING THE USER TYPES ssecceceeeeeeeeaneceveneueueaneanesueaars 4 4 FIGURE 4 5 UNSUPPORTED DEVICE MESSAGE avannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennennennnnnnennennennnnnnen 4 6 FIGURE 4 6 UNREACHABLE DEVICE MESSAGE csececccnecneenecccaccnecnenneaneessansaceaeunesneaneases 4 6 FIGURE 4 7 INVALID COMMUNITY STRING MESSAGE ceccecceccecceceaceeeeeusevsevanvaneansaneenanes 4 7 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XIV FIGURE 4 8 LOGGING ON TO AN OVER THE AIR SITE cscccccccecccccccnaccecesnuaceueenuauseueenaaegs 4 7 FIGURE 4 9 OPENING LINK MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION IDU C AND NEW STYLE IDU FANN 4 9 FI
277. nstallation Mode System Operations i Factory Settin Air Interface actory Settings Hub Site Sync Site Configuration dialog box will be closed B Management Restore to Factory Default Settings will bring down the connection Inventory Date amp Time IDU Detection Mode Le Advanced sk Ethernet TDM Services Enabled License Key 3 External Alarms eee Operations KJ tot J Figure 20 7 Using the Operations window to enter a license key 3 Enter your license key and click Activate 4 When it is accepted click Cancel License keys where appropriate are obtainable from WBB Customer Support I 3 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 20 6 Chapter 21 Link Budget Calculator Overview The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected perfor mance of the Wireless Link wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link and find the type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link range and deployment conditions User Input You are required to enter or choose the following parameters Depending on the product some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be changed Band which determines frequency and regulation Channel Bandwidth Tx Power maximum Tx power per modulation is validated Antenna Type cannot be changed f
278. nt Max Received Level Reference per Day Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day GA Fo Number of seconds Receive Signal Level R wbbOduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh2Exceed exceeded the RSL2 threshold per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day wbbOduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL wbbOduPerfMonAirDayTSLThresh1Exceed Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the current 15 min interval wbbOduPerfMonAirDayBBERThresh1Exceed wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrTable wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrEntry N A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table INDEX ifIndex wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrRxMBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 1 Gauge Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrTxMBytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 2 Gauge Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrEthCapacityThreshUn 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 3 Gauge The number of times throughput was below der threshold in the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrHighTrafficThreshExc 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 4 Gauge The number of times actual traffic was above eed threshold in the present 15 minutes
279. ntrolled links as shown in Figure 13 2 has to be an IDU It is recommended to have an IDU at each node to have the flexibility to change the RPL A ring node is built from two ODUs from adjacent links The ODUs can be connected to either an IDU or to a PoE device as in Figure 13 2 Port names in the IDU are shown Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 5 Special Case 1 1 Ethernet Redundancy Chapter 13 IDU PoE Device Ethernet Switch Figure 13 2 Node with IDU and PoE device i Connect the switch at the site only to one IDU ote The switching function is carried out by the IDU Cs and IDU Es both of which provide Layer 2 support see Chapter 15 Special Case 1 1 Ethernet Redundancy The same device may be used to provide economic 1 1 redundancy for a single link A 1 1 Ethernet is a ring with two nodes One of the links is RPL The equipment in a 1 1 Ethernet installation is as follows PoE Device PoE Device IDU C IDU C Ethernet Switch Ethernet Switch Figure 13 3 1 1 Ethernet Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 6 Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13 ate _ _ ARRET 000000600980 8 ETH re Figure 13 4 Using IDU C or IDU E with PoEs for the RPL Notice that link content drops from four PoEs plus two switches to two PoEs and two IDU Cs or IDU Es Using Link Manager to Set up a Ring Creating a Ring using Link Manager requires two stages 6 Set up
280. nual Release 1 9 30 7 1 Overview Table 7 1 Link Configuration Wizard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 2 3 4 6 7 Chapter 7 Wizard welcome System parameters Link ID e Site details Channel settings ACS Configuration HSS settings Services Types Adaptive or fixed Jitter Buffer MHS Ethernet Ring QoS Set TDM Clock Parameters Wizard summary and completion 7 2 Configuration Chapter 7 Configuration Since configuration functionality is included in the instalation we will briefly review the main steps and for most part offer references to the correspond ing installation step Step 1 Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the Link Manager main window click the Link Configu ration button The Link Configuration button is only accessible on a fully installed link as set out in 5 The Configuration Wizard opens Link Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Link Configuration Wizard This wizard is used For performing Link configuration updates After Changes made in Frequency field the Link will be resynchronized Mote that all changes made to the Link should be reflected in Link Quality monitor All the Fields are mandatory p Monitor Link Radio Interface pi B PSS Mai OO OO O ETBE 56 min Fer on her Figure 7 1 Link Configuration Wizard Click Next to proceed with the configuration procedure Step 2 System Parameters
281. o 9 Eh a if A D 000G ETAPE 2 Attacher la piece 6 au bras reperer les surfaces moletees en utilisant les pi ces 2 3 4 5 comme indiqu Utiliser un couple de serrage de 24 Nim ETAPE 3 Installer l antenne sur le mur mate riel fourni par te cent Figure G 5 Montage sur un mur Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 G 5 Montage d une antenne externe Appendix G Montage d une antenne externe L antenne externe optionnelle peut tre mont e sur un pyl ne Contenu du kit de montage d une antenne externe Le kit de montage d une antenne externe comprend les pi ces suivantes Douze rondelles plates Huit rondelles lastiques Huit crous hex Quatre oblons Un upport en U Un support pivotement Deux courroies de fixation en m tal gt Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pyl ne 1 Attacher le support en U l arri re de l antenne en utilisant quatre ron delles plates quatre rondelles lastiques et quatre crous hex 2 Attacher le support pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit ron delles plates quatre rondelles lastiques quatre crous hex et quatre boulons 3 Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le sup port pivotement 4 Attacher l antenne au pyl ne en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation Ajuster l inclinaison n cessaire en utilisant l chelle angulaire et serrer tous les boulons et crous la position requise
282. o Serw Ethernet Ethernet TOM Figure 5 2 Installation Wizard System dialog box gt To complete Installation Step 2 M Wireless Link User Manual di Enter a Link ID The Link ID must be identical for both ODUs in the link otherwise they will not communicate The Link ID must include at least eight alphanumeric characters Up to 24 characters are allowed You should use a Link ID composed of both alphabetic and numeric characters Enter a Link Name for the link identification The default name is Link You should change it Enter names for Site 1 and Site 2 The default names are both Location You should change them Throughout this manual we use A for Site 1 and B for Site 2 Optionally enter a new Link Password If the Link Password is incorrect a link is established but configuration cannot be performed and no services are available A new link password may be obtained from WBB Customer Support or use the alternative password supplied with the product The link password is peculiar to the link itself and should not be confused with the Link Manager log on password Here is our completed System panel Release 1 9 30 5 4 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard System Fill in the attribute Fields below Link ID EBG 20561334 Link Marne ITFSF BTT Sitel Sikez Link Password Monitor Link Radio Interface Location Location RSS dem mut 36 Quality
283. o disconnected LAN Port 01 on Idu 01 09 2005 00 00 28 SFP port 01 status changed to disconnected SFP Port 01 on Idu 29 06 2009 16 51 56 The time was set to MON JUN 29 16 51 56 2009 Figure 9 19 Recent Events Up to last 256 events at Site A 2 Use the Site button to choose Site B 3 Use the Save button to store the events in a tab delimited list Reverting Alert Messages Many alert messages in the Link Manager have an option of the form Do not show this message again These alert messages can be reverted to their default state shown by choosing the Advanced tab from the Prefer ences dialog Preferences Monitor Events Advanced csu Alerts Restore Alerts Interface Language English SNMP parameters Monitor Interval Timeout Figure 9 20 Advanced Preferences Just click the Restore Defaults button followed by OK Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 19 Other Advanced Preferences Chapter 9 Other Advanced Preferences Setting the Link Manager Language In the dialog of Figure 9 20 you can set the Link Manager interface lan guage where other localizations are available Setting SNMP Parameters Use these choices to set the SNMP monitoring interval and time out These are only significant if you are using an SNMP based network management system Remote Power Fail Indication Remote power fail indication indicates to one side that the other side has suf
284. o nine more ODUs in reverse order That is connect SYNC 9 SYNC 8 SYNC 7 aS shown in Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 Cascading two HSS units Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 5 Using More than One HSS Unit Chapter 10 4 To add a a further HSS unit Connect the next available SYNC port from the second HSS unit in descending order SYNC 5 in Figure 10 7 to SYNC 1 of the third HSS unit 5 ODUs are connected to thethird HSS unit from SYNC 2 as shown in Figure 10 8 in ascending order Figure 10 8 Cascading three HSS units 6 If further ODUs are required observe the convention that additional even numbered units are populated in descending order from SYNC 9 and odd numbered HSS units are populated in ascending order from SYNC 2 If an ODU is disconnected from an HSS unit then all remaining ODUs must be moved up or down to maintain the connectivity MN Condition 2 Total HSS Cable Length The total path of the HS sync pulse must not exceed 300m This applies no matter how many HSS units are used To illustrate the method for calculat ing the sync pulse path length we show three examples For our purpose let Ln denote the length of the ODU HSS unit cable at SYNC n on HSS unit m Hm be the length of the cable joining HSS unit m to HSS unit m 1 One HSS unit with five collocated ODUs PathLength Ly 2xLy 2xLj3 tT2Xx Ly t Lys Two cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 10 7 PathLength L
285. ocation 2 Ee System Operations GPS Sync Unit hoder B Management Inventory R Security Date amp Time Restore Defaults Le Advanced Operations Figure 11 13 Site Configuration Operations Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 11 GSU Preferences Chapter 11 GSU Preferences The Preferences window adds a new tab for the GSU Preferences Monitor Events Advanced GSU Show Latitude Longitude Decimal Degrees 8 Degrees Minutes Seconds Figure 11 14 Site Configuration Operations You may chose the units for latitude longitude coordinates GSU Monitoring and Diagnostics The monitoring and diagnostic reports are similar to those of Wireless Link GSU Telnet Support To configure the GSU with Telnet start a Telnet session using telnet lt GSU_ipaddr gt For example if you run Telnet as follows telnet 192 168 222 20 you will be asked for a user name and password You must log on with administrator privilege under user name admin and password netman The available commands are the same as for Wireless Link with the addition of four additional display commands and three additional set commands The additional display commands are display rfp display ratio display tx_phase display gpsinfo The last one display gpsinfo is the most interesting admin 192 168 222 20 gt display gpsinfo Current GPS time 102941 000 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9
286. of the air interface wbblduSrvPossibleTdmServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 2 Integer Deprecated parameter A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate wbblduSrvPossibleEthServices 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 3 Integer Deprecated parameter This parameter describes if the Ethernet Service can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate The valid values are disabled 0 enabled 1 wbblduSrvRemainingRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 4 RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps per air rate wbblduSrvTrunkCost 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 10 1 5 e Cost of the TDM Service in bps wbblduSrvAvailServicesTable N A ODU Possible TDM Services table wbblduSrvAvailServicesEntry N A ODU TDM Services table entry INDEX wbblduSrvAvailServicesindex wbblduSrvAvailServicesindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 10002 2 11 1 1 mi Table index The index is the bit mask of the TDM service wbblduSrvAvailServicesState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 2 Integer RO Represents the TDM service availability wbblduSrvAvailServicesMinRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 3 Integer Minimum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible wbblduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateldx 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 4 Integer Maximum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible wbblduSrvAvailServicesReason 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 11 1 5 Integer Information about the TDM Service availabilit
287. og that records when the rates fall above or below a pre defined threshold See page 9 14 below Both the statistics Monitor log and events log can be saved as text files The Monitor Log The Monitor Log records performance statistics for predefined intervals You can save the monitor log to a text file as well as display the information in an on screen report Saving the Monitor Log You can save the recorded Monitor Log statistics to a text file gt To save the monitor log 1 From the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 8 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 Preferences Monitor Events Advanced Monitor File File C l ings Default User My Documents Monitr tat LJ Interval Sec Figure 9 11 Preferences dialog box 2 Click the Monitor Tab 3 Select the file to save 4 Click the check box to open the file for saving 5 Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the monitor log file is to be saved 6 Set the time interval for adding data to the file 7 Click OK to save the file Viewing Performance Reports The Performance Monitor Report displays performance views of each of the interfaces gt To obtain performance monitoring reports 1 From the main menu choose Tools Performance Monitoring Report You are presented with the following win
288. om Midnight January 1st 1970 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmText 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 3 2 1 8 DisplayString Alarm display text same as the text in the sent trap wbbOduAgnLastEventsNumber 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 1 Integer This counter indicates the size of the wbbOduAgnLastEventsTable wbbOduAgnLastEventsTable N A This table includes the last events When atrapis sent an event entry is added to the table wbbOduAgnLastEventsEntry N A Entry containing the details of last traps INDEX wbbOduAgnLastEventsindex wbbOduAgnLastEventsindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 1 Integer RO The index of the table Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 13 of 18 wbbOduAgnCurrAlarmifindex Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 18 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 14 of 18 i m PT wbbOduAgnLastEventsSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 2 Integer RO Current Trap severity wbbOduAgnLastEventslflndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 3 Integer Interface Index where the event occurred Traps that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value 65535 wbbOduAgnLastEventsTimeT 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 7 4 2 1 4 Integer Timestamp of this trap This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970 wbbOduAgnLastE vents Text DisplayString Trap display text same as the text in the sent trap wbblduAdmProductT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1
289. on dialog box opens 2 Choose Inventory Site Configuration A File Actions Help Chapter 8 ti Backup Restore System 3 Air Interface Hub Site Sync Le Management Inventory Security Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet amp TDM Services 2X External Alarms I Operations Figure 8 7 Inventory window Security Features Refresh Buzzer Off j Installation Mode Property Value HW Version SW Version MAC Address Serial Number HW Version SW Version Serial Number SFP Vendor Name Vendor Pn Version R H G58 FCC CO EXT 8 1 9 30_b1835_Aug 15 2010 00 15 67 26 64 51 See product label 7 C 16 BO00 3 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 7C16200000000104 Device is not detected Ca JL J The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP Community strings and use the Link Lock feature Site Configuration A File Actions Help tel 3 Backup Restore System Q Air Interface Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory R Security ao Date amp Time o Advanced a amp Ethernet TDM Services iY External Alarms Operations Refresh Community SNMP Communities Link Password Link Password Value Link Lock Sy C Lock the Link Buzzer Off is Installation Mode Change Figure 8 8 Available security features Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 Apply Changing the Link Password Chapter 8
290. onnecting the Site 1 4 primary IDU activates Hot Standby After the Site 1 4 primary IDU is replaced the Link will detect the change and switch back to the primary link If you replaced the Site 2 2 IDU remember to reconnect the MHS cable Situation 2 Replacing the Site 1 2 IDU is different and requires several steps Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 9 ODU Replacement Chapter 12 gt To replace the Site 1 2 primary link IDU 1 Power off the Site 1 2 IDU This activates the secondary link using Hot Standby 2 Run the Configuration manager on the secondary link and in the Hot Standby panel of Figure 12 4 above check the Disabled button 3 Replace the Site 1 2 IDU without connecting it to the ODU to prevent transmission by the primary link with the undefined IDU 4 Reconnect the MHS cable between the IDUs at Site 1 2 5 Again run the Configuration Wizard on the secondary link and in the panel of Figure 12 4 above check the Secondary button to re enable the link as secondary 6 Connect the new Site 1 2 IDU to its ODU The Hot Standby will automatically revert to the primary link within 50ms ODU Replacement Both the primary and secondary replacement ODUs require pre configura tion prior to insertion into the link The items to be pre configured are e HSS ate e Link ID e Frequency e Hot Standby mode using the new Services panel in Figure 12 4 above e IP address optional n Pr
291. onnection failure automati cally switches to the radio link You may choose which of the two links is the main link and which is the backup link The IDU R may be configured for multi hop see Chapter 24 boom IDU A Leased Line Leased Lime Leased Lina IDUR EUT Figure 1 13 Backup link for E1 T1 connections IDU C The IDU C is a carrier class 19 inch 1U unit providing E1 T1 ports Ethernet ports dry contact alarms and indication LEDs It has two Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 10 Power Over Ethernet PoE Devices Chapter 1 DC power feed connectors An AC to DC converter is available for powering the IDU C from an AC source The IDU C is designed to be rack mounted Four IDU C products are supported by Wireless Link with 16 8 4 or no TDM ports Wireless Link uses the first four TDM ports only He E vane FH P aes Figure 1 14 IDU C Ethernet only front panel ir S sms pit SS nr ww Te Figure 1 15 IDU C 4 E1 T1 ports front panel You can use an IDU C with 4 8 or 16 ports Wireless Link will recognize ports 1 4 only Power Over Ethernet PoE Devices Basic PoE Device The basic PoE device provides Ethernet ser vice only with power for the ODU The PoE device is extremely compact having one Ethernet port one ODU port and a standard 3 pin male AC power socket It may be used with both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux radios Figure
292. onnectorized ODU always use RF terminators Warning For an ODU with an integrated antenna ensure that the antenna is always directed away from other people 3 Connect the Poe device to AC power 4 Using a crossed LAN cable connect the LAN IN port of the PoE device to the Ethernet port of the managing computer The ODU will commence beeping at about once per second indicating correct operation 5 Launch the Link Manager 6 At the log on window choose Local Connection Link Manager Version 8 5 00 Build 8516 EAE llosa Connection il SCC Figure 19 1 Log on Window for Local Connection 7 Enter the default password admin After a few moments the Link Man ager main window appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 2 The procedure Chapter 19 Link Manager 255 255 255 255 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help kr x gt Link Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site2 Configuration Get Diagnostics Link Link Location i Radio Interface Services None Frequency GHz 5 820 RSS dem Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps SSE Ethernet Throughput Mbps Site Location IP Address 10 0 0 120 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Transmitting on Channel 5 820 GHz Events Log Number Date amp Time Messa
293. ons ETR Figure 19 4 Management Addresses Site Configuration dialog box 10 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway as requested For example the ODU used here is to be configured as follows Site Configuration A File Actions Help vi 2 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off h Installation Mode System Management Air Interface Network Parameters WYLAN Protocol gt Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory T Security Default Gateway 0 0 D Date amp Time Le Advanced Ethernet TDM Services 2X External Alarms IP Address 192 168 Subnet Mask 255 255 Trap Destination IP Address TL Operations Figure 19 5 ODU with IP Addressing configured 11 Click OK You are asked to confirm the change Site Configuration Location fou are about to change ODU parameters This process will last several seconds The IP parameters will be changed and will produce a disconnection from the local unit Do you wish to continue Figure 19 6 Confirmation of IP Address change Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 19 4 The procedure Chapter 19 12 Click Yes to accept the change After about half a minute the changes will be registered in the ODU On the left hand panel of the main win dow you will see the new IP configuration for the ODU Link Manager 255 255 255 255 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x
294. or unit connected to antenna The Indoor Unit IDU The IDU has the service ports and provides aggregation of these services towards the ODU that transports them over the air The IDU also provides power to the ODU The following models are available for Wireless Link New style IDU E for both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux The new style IDU E is a carrier grade compact half 19 inch wide 1U plas tic unit providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1 T1 interfaces It offers Layer 2 support for Ethernet service and HSS support for collocated links It is a low cost unit intended for both Access applications and Enter prise use Figure 1 10 New style IDU E front view Note new HSS LED on the left Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 9 The Indoor Unit IDU Chapter 1 The IDU E rear panel right to left has a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port the two or no trunk ports two LAN ports an ODU port and finally a 3 pin DC power plug identical to that used on the IDU C a i i i ETTE 7 2A FE 7 4 Lai LAM Figure 1 11 New style IDU E Rear panel IDU R The IDU R is a compact half 19 inch 1U plastic unit for 1 x T1 E1 backup providing in addition 2 Ethernet ports and an external alarms interface It looks the same as the IDU E above without the HSS LED The IDU R is an indoor unit used for automatic backup of leased lines The IDU R monitors the status of leased lines and in the event of a c
295. or ODU with integrated antenna Antenna Gain per site cannot be changed for integrated antenna Cable Loss per site cannot be changed for integrated antenna Required Fade Margin Rate and Adaptive check box Service Type Required Range Link Budget Calculator Internal Data For each product or Regulation and Band the calculator stores the follow ing data required for link budget calculations Maximum Transmit power per modulation Receiver Sensitivity per modulation for Ethernet service and for TDM services at various BER Maximum linear input power used to calculate minimum distance Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 21 1 Calculations Chapter 21 e Antenna gain and cable loss for ODU with integrated antenna e Available Channel Bandwidths Calculations EIRP EIRP TxPower AntennaGains CableLosss 1 Expected RSS and Fade Margin ExpectedRSS EIRP PathLoss AntennaGains 8 CableLoss sirep where Site A is the transmitting site Site B is the receiving site PathLoss is calculated according to the free space model PathLoss 32 45 20 x log frequency myz 20 x log RequiredRangex ExpectedFade Margin ExpectedRSS Sensitivity where Sensitivity is dependent on air rate Min and Max Range MinRange is the shortest range for which ExpectedRSS lt MaxInputPower per air rate MaxRange with Adaptive checked is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS gt Sensitivity
296. ose Do not do this Figure 17 7 Incorrectly mounted ODU No water nose 3 If you attach an external PoE device close to the ODU the same consid erations apply Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 17 4 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Meticulous implementation of the guidelines in this chapter will provide best protection against electric shock and lightning A 100 protection is neither implied nor possible This chapter is at best a guide The actual degree of lightning protection required depends on local conditions and regulations IN The WBB Lightning Protection System consists of the following components e Grounding for the antenna coax cable e Grounding for each IDU and ODU e External Primary Surge Suppressor units and grounding for the out door cable e Internal ESD protection circuits over the Power Telecom lines Grounding for Antenna Cable A Grounding Kit must be connected to the coax antenna cable and reliably grounded The grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158 2 www andrew com See Figure 18 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 1 Grounding for Indoor Outdoor Units Chapter 18 Antenna Coax cables grounded to the pole within 30 cm of the antenna Connectorized ODU Coax cables grounded to the pole within 30 cm of the ODU r Andrew Grounding Kit Figure 18 1 Grounding antenna cables Grounding for Indoor Outdoor Uni
297. ot be handled without resetting the link such as antenna realignment and IDU or ODU replacement The Link Installation and Configuration phases are both carried out with Wizards which walk you through the processes The Wizards are visu ally quite similar and will be described in detail below Site Configuration described in 8 Site specific configuration for each side of the link is available at any time under a running link or under the restricted Installation mode Site Configuration consists of a set of panels which may be invoked indi vidually in any order as needed An installed and configured link can be returned to installation mode for re installation and configuration from last settings or from factory settings e Reversion to installation mode requires a complete break in the link service e Configuration mode may vary the service throughput and quality but without a service break Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 10 Default Wireless Link Settings Chapter 4 Default Wireless Link Settings The default settings of the Wireless Link configuration parameters are listed in the second column of Table 4 4 below The third column shows the val ues we use in this manual for illustrative purposes Table 4 4 Default Settings Factory default band 5 780GHz ODU IP Address 192 168 2 101 and 102 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap destination 0 0 0 0 Link Manager log on passwords Observer admin Ope
298. otection Units Cables to connect the various system elements Grounding cables Documentation supplied with Wireless Link The technical documentation supplied witha Wireless Link is located on the product CD It includes the following items A Quick Installation Guide for experienced installers also hardcopy A full User Manual the document which you are reading A Help file accessible from the Link Manager Link Budget Calculator Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 16 How to Use this Manual Chapter 1 How to Use this Manual This User Manual is divided into three functionally distinct sections reflecting the activities required to set up a Wireless Link The division is shown in the following table Table 1 3 User Manual General layout Basic Installation Core information to install and operate a link Advanced Installation Specialized installation techniques Technical Information Background for advanced use The Basic Installation section is divided into functionally distinct chapters reflecting the activities required to set up a Wireless Link The division is shown in the following table Table 1 4 User Manual layout 2 Site Preparation Site survey team Er Hardware Installation Field technician technician Getting Started with the Installation technician Link Manager Us Installing the Link Installation technician technician Tug ane Manager Main Installation technician System manager Window En Con
299. ount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom to prevent water from penetrat ing with the strain reliefs facing the ground Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes Connect the ODU IDU cable using the RJ 45 jack Connect one cable between the ODU and the suppressor using an RJ 45 jack m AA N 6 Connect the suppressor s ground stud to a grounding point Use the appropriate wire gauge and type keeping the wire as short as possible less than 1m 3 between the stud and the site grounding point Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 5 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18 7 Replace the cover am There may also be regulatory requirements to cross bond the ODU IDU CAT 5e cable at regular intervals up the mast This may be as frequent as every Note 10 meters 33 feet A second Surge Arrestor Unit should be mounted at the building entry point and must be grounded as shown in Figure 18 3 above gt To mount the lightning protection at the building entry point 1 Mount the device outside the building located as near as possible to the entrance of the CAT 5e ODU IDU cable Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom to prevent water from penetrating with the strain reliefs facing the ground Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit Mount the unit
300. our product Inventory see Figure 8 8 and then consult WBB Customer Support 20 3 The procedure Chapter 20 S Change Band Select a band from the list below Band Description Installation Frequency GHz 5 150 5 335 GHz Universal 5 280 5475 5 720 GHz Universal FRED B 740 5 835 GHz FCC default R 780 F 635 5 665 GHz WPC 5 840 5 740 5 940 GHz Universal Brog i The fate contains common daia from the and ses Figure 20 4 different band selected 9 The Change Band warning is displayed Click Yes to continue Change Band Changing the band will affect the Location site only Services Will be stopped and device will be reset Mote You should ensure that the attached antenna supports the required band Do you wish to continue Figure 20 5 Change Band confirmation The change which may take some time is carried out Please Wait Changing Band The result is reflected in the Link Manager main window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 20 4 Changing Band for DFS Chapter 20 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help ze apis j F Site Location te Configuration Get Diagnostics Location Radio Interface Services None Frequency GHz 5 280 RSS dBm Channel BW MHz 20 Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Ethernet Throughput Mbps IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0
301. ovider VLAN ID can be defined per IDU This setting functions like Provider tagging However all ingress frames are passed through pe Mk Provider Traffic with tagging without Provider VLAN Providers Transport filter Eum te Traffic with and without Network Provider s VLAN Traffic without Provider VLAN VLAN Availability VLAN is available for links using either Wireless Link or Wireless Mux radios VLAN support requires the use of IDU Cs or new style IDU Es VLAN Configuration Using the Link Manager VLAN IDs are used by WBB products in three separate contexts Management VLAN Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring It is recommended that Caution yOu use different VLAN IDs for each context If you are not a VLAN expert please be aware that incorrect VLAN configuration may cause havoc on your network The facilities described below are offered as a service to enable you to get best value from your D Wireless Link links and are provided as is Under no circumstances does Disclaimer BB accept responsibility for network system or financial damages arising from incorrect use of these VLAN facilities Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 6 Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation Chapter 14 Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation You can define a VLAN ID for management traffic separation You should configure the system to prevent conflicts as detailed below When configured fo
302. ow 2 The link will be managed from Site 1 2 Site 1 4 may be a remote site 3 The links intended as the primary and secondary will be referred to their respective names Primary Link and Secondary Link as shown in Figure 12 1 above despite their having yet to be installed gt To install a Hot Standby Link 1 Set up Primary Link in the usual way Ensure that it is fully operational in accordance with the relevant instructions in Part 1 of the User Manual a S Do not proceed unless this condition is fully met Note 2 Connect user equipment to Site 1 4 3 At Site 1 2 disconnect the TDM cables from the external equipment or disconnect external equipment from the Hot Standby Patch Panel 4 The HSS cable connecting the ODUs should be connected at Site 1 2 The ODU belonging to the primary link should be configured as HSM whereas the ODU belonging to the secondary link should be configured as HSC CT Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 4 Installing a WBB MHS Chapter 12 5 Establish Secondary Link in the usual way with HSS enabled The two link frequencies should be at least 5MHz apart 6 Connect the MHS cables at Sites A and B as shown in Figure 12 1 and Figure 12 3 above 7 Run the Configuration Wizard for Primary Link Activate TDM services in the usual way Navigate to the Hot Standby tab in the Services Config uration panel Link Configuration Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate
303. pecial ODU packets Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 23 Backup Restore of ODU Software Files Chapter 8 If a PoE device is in use the detection packets spread to the containing net work and may cause flooding In such a case the IDU Detection feature Figure 8 20 should be disabled To disable IDU Detection Mode just toggle the check box in Figure 8 20 Backup Restore of ODU Software Files Backup ODU Software to a File Link Manager allows you to backup the ODU software of both units of a link to the managing computer as binary files Each site is backed up in a sepa rate file Backup files are matched to the MAC address of the site ODU The default backup file name is constructed from the ODU IP address and the date as in the following example Backup of Site A as used in our examples 192 168 1 101 1 12 2009 backup If you perform more than one backup on a given date you will need to change the file name to something like this 192 168 1 101 1 12 2009 00 backup 192 168 1 101 1 12 2009 01 backup gt To backup the ODU software a file 1 Choose a site to back up The Site Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click Backup 3 In the Save As dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name configuration file is to be saved and click Save Restoring ODU Software or Configuration Backup files can be uploaded from the managing computer You may choose a full software restore or configuration only restore
304. period wbbOduPerfMonEthCurrActiveSeconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 6 7 1 5 Gauge The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet swervice was not blocked in the present 15 minutes period wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalTable N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the last day in resolution of 15 min intervals wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalEntry a N A This is an entry in the Interval Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalldx wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalldx This table is indexed per interval number Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96 wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalRxMBytes wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalEthCapacityThresh The number of times throughput was below Under threshold in the each interval wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalHighTrafficThresh The number of times actual traffic was above Exceed threshold in the each interval wbbOduPerfMonEthintervalActiveSeconds The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet service was not blocked in the each interval wbbOduPerfMonEthDay Table N A This table defines keeps the ethernet counters of the last month in resolution of days wbbOduPerfMonEthDayEntry N A This is an entry in the Days Table INDEX iflndex wbbOduPerfMonEthDayldx Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 16 Current RX Mega Bytes per interval MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 12 of 18 wbbOduPerf
305. pported device Please check the IP Address was entered correctly Figure 4 5 Unsupported device message Incorrect IP Address If the IP address chosen is invalid or the link is unreachable the following error message will be displayed Device unreachable Please check IP Address was entered correctly Ping connection to the device Read Only Community string setting in the login dialog Forgotten community string can be retrieved From product label or Technical Support Do you want to continue Figure 4 6 Unreachable device message In both of the above situations if you click No you will see a warning graphic J alongside the IP Address field Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 6 Incorrect Password Chapter 4 Incorrect Password If you type an incorrect password in the Login window you will see a warn ing graphic J alongside the password field Invalid Read Write Community String This will result in the following message X Invalid Read Write Community Do vou want to continue Figure 4 7 Invalid Community String message Logging in to the Over the Air Site You can log on to the over the air site of an established link Site B in our example However you will be first offered the following caution Over the air connection 192 168 1 107 The system has detected an over the air connection to the device Please select one of the Following Continue bo resume this operation
306. r code is n 2 n number configurationChanged normal incompatiblePartner critical Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 24 Trap Parameters Appendix D Table D 3 MIB Traps Sheet 2 of 5 fame IB ee foer oo hssOpStateChangedTolNU hssOpStateChangedToHSM hssOpStateChangedToHSC vlanModeActive spectrumAnalysis tdmServiceAlarm ethServiceClosed 10 ethServiceNotPermitted encryptionAlarm changeLinkPasswordAlarm externalAlarmInPort1Alarm externalAlarmInPort2Alarm bitFailedAlarm wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm mngPortDisconnectedAlarm externalAlarminPort3Alarm externalAlarminPort4Alarm Wireless Link User Manual N N N 19 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to INU type Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to INU 20 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSM type Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to HSM normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSC type Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS operating state was changed to HSC_DT HSC_CT Indicates to non VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support only VLAN tag on management interface Contains a single parameter
307. r the default operational mode a Provider port will handle ingress traffic as follows e Filters frames that are not tagged with the Provider VLAN ID e Removes the Provider double tag Therefore if a port isconfigured for management traffic separation by VLAN and as Provider port then the received management frames must be dou ble tagged as follows e The outer tag has to be the Provider s tag so the frame is not fil tered e The internal tag has to be management VLAN ID To avoid mix ups best practice is to e Separate the management and data ports e Define only a data port with Provider function All IDU C and new style IDU E models have two LAN ports so you can easily separate management and Ethernet service VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration VLAN Configuration is carried out per site It is up to you to ensure consis tency between the link sites The discussion below is based on Site A how ever it also applies to Site B To set up VLAN tagging for Ethernet service enter Site Configuration for Site A choose the Ethernet tab and click the VLAN Configuration but ton Figure 8 15 The following window is displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 7 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration Chapter 14 W VLAN Configuration Ingress Mode Egress Mode Transparent v VLAN ID VLAN D CE VLAN Priority
308. rade Package Save Configuration Close Software Upgrade details Reset Details Available Release 2 5 00 b2635 Jul 25 2010 Reset each device after successful upgrade Description Release 2 5 00 Reset all devices after all selected devices successfully upgraded Delayed Upgrade Date 07 27 10 Time 06 14PM Software Upgrade Link Name IP Address Site Name Current Release Progress Status Details amp Directcomnection 192 168 1 101 A 125 00 b2630 Jun 272010 Ed Uploading software Airconnection 1921681 102 B 125 00 b2630 Jun 272010 Uploading software Figure 15 6 Software upgrade in progress Note the stop button Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 15 4 Software Update for GSUs Chapter 15 Caution Link Name IP Address Site Name Current Release Progress Status Details HE sm upgrade co amp Direct connection 192 168 1 101 A 2 5 00 b2630 Jun 27 2010 IG Reset done Airconnection 1921681102 B 2 5 00 b2630 Jun 27 2010 IG Reset done Figure 15 7 Software upgrade completed successfully 9 Click Close to exit 10 If you requested a delayed upgrade a notice like this will appear in the SWU title bar Software Upgrade Tool SW Upgrade scheduled for 28 07 2010 3 45 PM If one or both sites fail to update a warning notice will be displayed If one site of a link updates but the other fails you should correct the problem and update the second site as soon as possi
309. ral Chapter 23 Installation Mode 23 Hub Site Sync Link ID B Management Inventory TxPower Security Expected dBm Date amp Time Le Advanced Current dBm a amp Ethernet XT External Alarms Frequency a Band Plan Pre Transition Post Transition Bandwidth Single Band C Double Band Frequency MHz 41 2503 v A For Activation select Frequency parameters and move fo Installation Mode Figure 23 2 BRS Air Interface dialog box 4 Set the appropriate Frequency Band Plan and Bandwidth 5 Select the required frequency band and click Apply 6 Click Installation Mode 7 Repeat for the remote ODU Link Installation Wizard BRS Channel Settings Any changes to the Channel field may result in Link re synchronization a Configuration M BRS Notation BandPlan 4 Pre Transition Bandwidth Quad Band vi Frequency MHz 42 43 B1 B2 2518 50 43 B1 B2 B3 2524 00 B1 B2 B3 C1 2529 50 B2 B3 C1 C2 2535 00 B3 C1 C2 C3 2540 50 C1 C2 C3 D1 2546 00 D v Post Transition Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem a No Sery Ethernet Ethemet TDM No Sery Ethemet Ethemet TDM Quality BM O Figure 23 3 BRS Channel Settings Pre Transition 8 Perform the remainder of the Installation procedure as defined in the Installation section Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 23 2 BRS Link Configurat
310. rated or external antenna Flat panel antennas are suitable for short range typi cally in Access applications They are relatively cheap use comparatively little tower space and are robust under extreme weather conditions i ri Figure 1 22 External antennas Flat Panel Parabolic Dish Antennas gt l The Parabolic dish antenna is a high gain reflector antenna used for radio television and data communi cations The relatively short wavelength of electro magnetic radio energy at these frequencies allows reasonably sized reflectors to exhibit the very desir able highly directional response for both receiving and transmitting 4 Figure 1 23 External antennas Parabolic Dish Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 14 Link Manager Chapter 1 Grid Antennas I Grid antennas are used for 2 4 GHz applications MY Due to the large size the grid design minimizes weight and wind loading Figure 1 24 External antennas Grid Antenna See the WBB products catalog for WBB offering of external antennas Exter nal antennas are also available from antenna vendors Link Manager The Link Manager is an SNMP based management application which man ages a complete link over a single IP address It can also manage each side of the link separately The Link Manager application facilitates installation and configuration of the link between the ODU units The intuitive easy to use Link Manager has a graphical Mic
311. rating frequency range A free frequency channel must be determined within the operating range for optimum per formance Recommended Equipment Stage 1 Preliminary Survey e Topological map of the area e Urban map of the area Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 2 1 Stage 1 Preliminary Survey Chapter 2 e Compass Stage 2 Physical Survey e 100 meter tape measure e Ohmmeter to check ground connection e Binoculars e Map e Digital camera e Paper pencil and a clipboard e GPS device optional e Compass optional Stage 3 RF Survey e Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facil ity that can store multiple images for documentation purposes e RF accessories connectors and cables e Communication devices for example cellular phones or a set of walkie talkies Stage 1 Preliminary Survey A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites As much detail as possible should be obtained about the two designated ODU installation sites and the area between them gt To perform a preliminary survey 1 Mark the two designated installation sites on a topographic map of the area 2 Measure the distance between the sites check that it is within the speci fied range of the equipment 3 On the urban map check for developed areas situated between the two installation sites Pay attention to these areas when performing the phys ical site survey there may
312. rator admin Installer wireless Link ID EBG 20561334 Link Name TPSF BITT Location per site A Name per site Here Contact per site John Radio Link Failure Actions Community values There Mary Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 11 Chapter 5 Installing the Link Overview The installation is carried out using the Installation wizard Its operation is detailed in the following pages in a tutorial style For the purpose of explanation we will set up a laboratory link with the fol lowing characteristics e Channel selection Automatic e Services Ethernet 3xE1 on ports 1 2 3 using IDU As For new style IDU E users The procedure shown here is the same as for IDU C based links The main window will show two trunk ports instead of four mi A The Installation wizard has seven eight steps as shown in Table 5 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 1 Overview Table 5 1 Link Installation Wizard Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 3 Chapter 5 Wizard welcome System parameters Link ID e Site details Channel settings ACS Configuration 4 uss Settings 6 Services Types Ethernet e TDM Adaptive or fixed Jitter Buffer MHS Ethernet Ring QoS Set TDM Clock Parameters Wizard summary and completion 5 2 Installation Chapter 5 Installation Step 1 Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the Link Manager mai
313. re noted in the Installation procedure on page 5 17 Caution Hub Site Sync Here you can view the HSS status Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 4 Site Management IP Address VLAN and Protocol Chapter 8 Site Configuration File Actions Help bi 3 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off j Installation Mode System Q Air Interface Status 22 Hub Site Sync Operation Hub Sync Client Disable Tx T Management Synchronization Synchronized External Pulses Detected Synchronization Status Inventory Security D Date amp Time Enabler Le Advanced Operational State Configure Operational States sk Ethernet Radio Frame Pattern RFP Status E TDM Services 2 External Alarms RFP TDM E Fit I Operations Use Wizard for configuration changes Figure 8 3 HSS Status Site Management IP Address VLAN and Protocol Configuring the ODU Address Each site must be configured separately For an over the air configuration first configure site B then site A so as to avoid lockout See 19 for detailed instructions about the best way to do this on site See 15 for further details about VLAN Functionality for Wireless Link gt To define the Management Addresses 1 Choose a site to configure The Configuration dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 5 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 8 Site Configuration File Actions Help se se Backup Restore Refr
314. rect band may be in violation of local regulations Required Equipment The minimal equipment required to change an ODU default band is e Laptop computer managing computer satisfying the requirements of Table 4 1 e An installed copy of the Link Manager e A PoE device e A crossed Ethernet LAN cable e An IDU ODU cable The procedure n The following procedure is generic to all relevant WBB radio products What you see on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the Note screen captures used to illustrate this chapter Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 20 1 The procedure Chapter 20 gt To change the factory default band 1 Using the IDU ODU cable connect the PoE device to the ODU ensuring that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P LAN OUT 2 Connect the Poe device to AC power 3 Using a crossed LAN cable connect the LAN IN port of the PoE device to the Ethernet port of the managing computer The ODU will commence beeping at about once per second indicating correct operation 4 Launch the Link Manager 5 Log on as Installer EPA Link Manager A Wersion 8 5 00 Build 8516 IP Address 192 168 2 101 Password User Type Installer Community Read Only Read Write CETT Figure 20 1 Becoming Installer 6 Enter the default password wireless After a few moments the Link Manager main window appears Wireless Link Us
315. rosoft Windows interface and can be run locally and remotely The Link Manager provides e Installation Wizard e Frequency band selection e On line monitoring of air interface quality allowing the administrator to monitor the service and status of each link e On line monitoring of equipment alarms and QoS e Local and remote loopback testing e Configuration Wizard and site settings e Integrated software upgrade utility e On line user manual and help files e Link Budget Calculator for calculating the expected performance of the Wireless Link wireless link and the possible service configura tions for a specific link range The Link Manager can easily be integrated with any SNMP based NMS sys tem Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 15 Accessories Chapter 1 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Oporator J vink test om Link it FBG 20541334 Saimi 3281 Ethernet Frequency Gra 5 780 Band 5 740 5095 GHE FOLIE Channel fw Metz 20 Pete Maps Adaptive JP Arles 197 1ER IM Subnet Mak 255 255 255 0 AL Sit ii Eire Tara Bote Bram 2 Le Error Blacks TP Address 192 068 2 108 E1 Ports Subnet Make 255 255 2550 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 i Connection Avaliable Connection Mode Network DP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure 1 25 Link Manager window Accessories WBB provides a variety of accessories to support the Wireless Link system PoE evices AC Power Adaptors External Lightning Pr
316. rror reply 8 26 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8 Table 8 2 Telnet Commands Summary Continued Command Explanation set bridge lt mode 0 Bridging OFF 1 Bridging Set the ODU bridge mode 0 off 1 on ON gt set name lt new name gt Set the name of the link set location lt new location gt Set the name of the location set contact lt new contact gt Set the name of the site manager set ethernet lt port MNG LAN1 LAN2 gt lt mode AUTO 10H 10F 100H 100F DISABLE gt Set the mode and speed of each Ethernet port Resets both the IDU and the ODU The user is warned that the command reboot will reset the ODU A new Telnet session to the ODU may be opened after the reset is complete Watch the IDU LEDs help Displays the available commands Figure 8 23 below shows the available Telnet commands using the help command admin 192 168 2 101 gt Type help for help admin 192 168 2 101 gt help display inventory display management display link display ethernet display tdm display ntp display PM lt interface AIRJSMNGLANI LAN2 TDM1 TDM2 TDM3 TDM4 gt lt interval current day month gt set ip lt ipaddr gt lt subnetMask gt lt gateway gt set trap lt index 1 10 gt lt ipaddr gt lt port 1 65535 gt set readpw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set writepw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set trappw lt writePasswd gt lt newPasswd gt set buzzer lt mode 0 OFF 1 ON gt set tpc lt power Value
317. rts the Select Maximum button to choose all available ports es e Ethernet is always selected e The maximum available services will be reduced in accordance with ote actual air interface capacity Services Configuration TOM Type TOM Ports asimum Available Services 4xE 1 Ethernet Error ET Select Select Maximum Clear All Selected 3 Remaining 1 Figure 5 12 TDM Service port selection seven services selected 4 Click OK You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of Figure 5 14 It is updated to reflect your choice Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 11 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TDM Jitter Buffer Jott Services Rate Mbps Distance a km IO Miles Product 7 0 16 B000 FC HH6 BOOO Hy Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 132010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 13 Services and Rates Services chosen Modulation Rate Selection You may choose a specific modulation rate or use Adaptive Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TOM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Services Rate Mbps Distance ID B Product 7 0 16 B000 FC H6 BOOO Hy Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio
318. s B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time yen Le Advanced Q sk Ethernet TDM Services iY External Alarms Community Link Password Link Password Value I Operations The Link Lock check box is now unavailable 5 If required repeat the procedure for Site B E To revert the Link Lock status to unlocked power down each ODU in turn Use the above procedure to uncheck the Link Lock status Note box for the live ODU A simple ODU reset at either end will restore the link to ts previous locked or unlocked state Setting the Date and Time The ODU maintains a date and time The date and time should be synchro nized with any Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 compatible server During power up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time using an NTP Server If the server IP address is not configured or is not reachable a default time is set When configuring the NTP Server IP address you should also configure the offset from the Universal Coordinated Time UTC If there is no server available you can either set the date and time or you can set it to use the date and time from the managing computer Note that manual setting is not Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 13 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8 recommended since it will be overridden by a reset power up or synchroni zation with an NTP Server The NTP uses UDP port 123 If a firewall is configured bet
319. s Generating Not Detected Status A Operation Hub Sync Master Independent Unit Synchronization N A Nia External Pulses Generating Not Detected Figure 10 14 Hub Site Configuration dialog Left Wireless Link right Wire less Mux Site Configuration and HSS For units that support HSS the Hub Site Sync option appears in the Air Interface section and displays the current HSS of the unit Configure the unit from the Link Configuration Wizard according to the procedure described above Site Configuration A File Actions Help Site Configuration A File Actions Help ti Backup System Q ir Interface Hub Site Sync A Management Inventory R Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced sk Ethernet 3 Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode Synchronization Status Status 4 Operation Hub Sync Client Disable Tx Synchronization Synchronized External Pulses Detected Configure Operational States Enabled Operational State Hub Syne Client Disable Tx Radio Frame Pattern RFP Status E TDM Services ik External Alarms _RFP I Operations TDM z Fit Use Wizard for configuration changes Apply bi 3 Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Fa Synchronization Status amp Air Interface 2 Status 4 Operation Hub Sync Master Synchronization N A External Pulses Generating Tx Power amp Ant
320. s also used when a link is not established wbbOduAirLinkWorkingMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 30 Integer Link working mode as a result of comparing versions of both sides of the link Possible modes are Unknown no link Normal versions on both sides are identical with full compatibility with restricted compatibility or versions on both sides are different with software upgrade or versions incompatibility Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 10 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 6 of 18 m i ne wbbOduAirMajorLinklfVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 31 Major link interface version wbbOduAirMinorLinklfVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 32 Integer RO Minor link interface version wbbOduAirHssDesiredOpState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 1 Required Hub Site Synchronization operating state wbbOduAirHssCurrentOpState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 2 Integer o Integer RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state wbbOduAirHssSyncStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 3 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status wbbOduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 4 Integer Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection status In GSS mode if generating then 1PSP is auto generated by the GSS Unit if generatingAndDetecting then 1PSP is generated by GPS satellites signal wbbOduAirHssExtPulseType 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 5 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization exter
321. s at a central site Like any other RF deployment the wireless operation is highly dependent on factors such as available frequen cies the physical spacing between radios other interfering radios and whether Wireless Link or Wireless Mux units are installed HSS does not eliminate the need for careful RF planning to ensure the design will work as planned See Chapter 2 of the User Manual both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux for information on installation site survey For Wireless Link units Hub Site Synchronization support depends on the product model The WBB Hub Site Synchronization HSS method uses a cable connected from the master ODU to all collocated ODUs this cable carries pulses sent to each ODU which synchronize their transmission with each other The pulse synchronization ensures that transmission occurs at the same timefor all collocated units This also results in all of the hub site units receiving data at the same time eliminating the possibility of interference that could result if some units transmit while other units at the same location receive Figure 10 1 illustrates interference caused by non synchronized collocated units Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 1 What is Hub Site Synchronization Chapter 10 Figure 10 1 Interference caused by collocated units Adding HSS removes interference as shown in the next two figures Ky Figure 10 3 Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization 2
322. s that the configured TDM services are Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar Additional Ethernet Transmitted Bytes Interface PM Data You can use the toolbar to perform the actions described in the following table Table 9 4 Action of the toolbar buttons Get Data Gather current performance monitoring data Save current performance monitoring data to a file Setting Air Interface Thresholds Use the Thresholds button on the Monitoring Performance Report toolbar to set the Air Interface Thresholds Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 9 12 The Monitor Log Chapter 9 i Threshold Configuration A Thresholds Air Interface RSL 1 dBm RSL 2 dBm TSL dBm BBER o Ethernet Interface Capacity Mbps Traffic Mbps Figure 9 15 Threshold configuration dialog box RSL Thresholds Two RSL Thresholds can be defined They are used as an indicator of prob lems in the radio channel You can check the RSS from the Link Budget Cal culator results during installation Values of 5dB and 8dB from the current RSS are typical TSL Threshold A counter is maintained of the number of second intervals during which Tx power exceeds this threshold BBER Threshold The Background Block Error Ratio is measured as a percentage The thresh old can be set from 0 1 up to 50 For links with Ethernet only service 8 threshold is recommended If there are no probl
323. se 1 9 30 17 2 Mounting an ODU on a Wall Chapter 17 Mounting an ODU on a Wall av X Installation Kit ITEM DESCRIPTION Q Arm lt Screw hex head M8x40 Washer flat M8 Washer spring M8 Nut M8 Base wall O On amp Co FD ON amp MP SIEP 1 Attach item 1 to the base mate knurled surfaces opu STEP 2 xe Attach item 6 to the arm es Y mate knurled surfaces P A using items 2 3 4 5 as shown 6 e 3 4 5 Use tightening torque of 24 N n STEP WALL Install ant to wall hardware supplied by customer ODU Figure 17 5 Mounting on a Wall Mounting an External Antenna Optional external antennas can be mounted on a pole The external mount ing kit varies according to the specific antenna model Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 17 3 Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally Chapter 17 Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally What follows applies to both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux with obvious differences An ODU may be mounted horizontally as shown in Figure 17 6 gt To mount an ODU horizontally observe the following cautions 1 To ensure your warranty rights for horizontally installed ODUs make sure that the four ports ANT1 ANT2 HSS and ODU are firmly secured or moisture sealed with the supplied caps 2 Further ensure that cables are connected using a water nose as shown in Figure 17 6 Figure 17 6 Mounted ODUs with correct water n
324. seesnvaneueseeeeeeerentanes B 3 TABLE B 7 IDU ALARM CONNECTOR DRY CONTACT Us B 3 TABLE B 8 TERMINAL BLOCK 3 PIN 48VDC cccccecescecesccecesceneesevaneanvansaeueeseeeneantanes B 5 TABLE B 9 TERMINAL BLOCK 2 PIN 48VDC cccccecesceececeueeecesevsevaeeanvansueneeeneeneantanes B 5 TABLE C 1 SFP TYPE AND INTERFACE DESCRIPTION cecceccecvecceccaceeeeeuseesnvarvansaeeanennanys C 1 TABLE D 1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARIABLES asaenavnnennnnnnnnnnennennennennennnnnnnnnnnnnsnnennnnnn D 4 TABLE D 2 PRIVATE MIB PARAMETERS vu een D 6 TABLE D 3 MIB RAS a ea aa ae ea Dee neue D 24 TABLE E 1 IDU C E OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION csececeeveveveevevavenenvavavenvavarenennars E 1 TABLE E 2 IDU C INPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION cceceeccacvaccaceceecueceeevanvanvansaueeeentanes E 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XIX TABLE E 3 IDU E AL OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION ccscccceccccccecuccesueecnunensarenaneenunes TABLE E 4 IDU E AL INPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION esunnnernnnnennnnnernnnnervnnnernnnnerennnnevnnn TABLE E 5 POE 8 OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XX Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 1 Basic Installation Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to Wireless Link The Wireless Broadband WBB family of wireless products delivers carrier class performance at the most competitive price Wireless Link products pack legacy TDM and Ethernet s
325. sing the Link Manager Application for chang ing these values Setting wrong values may cause indeterminate results Community String To control a link all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address See Table 4 4 for default Community strings Private MIB Structure The sections in the private WBB MIB and its location in the MIB tree are shown in Figure D 1 below Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 2 MIB Parameters I private ae enterprises E E wilinks S E wbb G 70 wbbOdu H wbbOduAdmin E E wbbOduService E E wbbOduEthernet E E wbbOduBridas 8 0 wbbOduair a S wbbOduPerfMon EG wbbOdudgent 9 wbbldu BS wbbidu dmin 8 0 wbblduService E E wbbIduEthernet H 1 bbldubridge o E E wbbIduTdm oe 1 whbGeneral E E wilinksProducts Appendix D Figure D 1 Top Level Sections of the private MIB The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the two form factors of the ODU Integrated Antenna and Connectorized referred in the MIB as external antenna and GSU where applicable L wilinks 8 0 wbb aS wilinksProducts ae WwbbFarmily i o adu e gt oduintegrated ntenna ooo ha B oduExternal ntenna g En wbbBFamiy I LO GpsSynchronizerFamily oduGsu elf oduGSUExternal ntenna wilinks E E wbb 3 wilinksProducts ae whbFamily wbbBFamily odu 000 db odu2Kintegrated ntenne es D oduZkExternal4ntenna D GpssynchronizerFamily oduesu effi oduGSUExternal
326. site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 2 3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Chapter 2 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be 35 to 60 C 31 to 140 F Additional Indoor Site Requirements The following requirements guarantee proper operation of the system e For IDU C units allow at least 90 cm 36 of front clearance for operating and maintenance accessibility Allow at least 10 cm 4 clearance at the rear of the unit for signal lines and interface cables e The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F at a humidity of up to 90 non condensing Stage 3 RF Survey S No te The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the installation site to determine whether there are available channels within the radio operating frequency band An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before going out on site specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions You should perform the RF survey at both proposed link sites The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day to best judge the worst case radio interference Allow 2 4 hours duration for a good RF survey It is possible to install the link and use the Link Manager to find a clear channel Each frequency channel can be evaluated in turn Achievement of a clear channel is indicated by t
327. smission for the collocated units as shown in Figure 10 10 Tx Tx Tx Tx ODU 1 Rx Rx Rix Rx I Tx Tx Tx Tx ODU 2 Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx ODU 3 Rx Rx Rx Rx RFP Figure 10 10 Radio Frame Fattern Five RFP types A to E are available Under HSS the RFP must be config ured by the user depending on the type of the radio products services and channel bandwidth in accordance with the Table 10 2 and Table 10 3 The tables describe the efficiency of the air interface according to the RFP type radio products mix services and channel bandwidth The tables may also be viewed in the Link Manager and in the Link Budget Calculator for both Wireless Link and Wireless Mux The efficiency of the air interface will vary according to the product used Table 10 2 Radio Frame Pattern Table Wireless Mux Legend Fit available RFP for TDM and Ethernet services Best optimal RFP for TDM and Ethernet services N A service unavailable Release 1 9 30 10 8 RFP General Radio Frame Pattern Chapter 10 Select the RFP that gives you the Best or Fit for required system services and select the channel bandwidth accordingly im The RFP must be the same for each link within the collocated system Note RFP General Radio Frame Pattern When setting the RPF the following considerations should be borne in mind RFP When synchronizing Wireless Mux units you must use RFP Bor E If you mix Wireless Mux
328. ss Mux master The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each side of the link e Operation Type of unit Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 10 13 Link Configuration and HSS Chapter 10 e Hub Sync Master HSM e Hub Sync Client Disable Transmission HSC DT e Hub Sync Client Continue Transmission HSC CT n Continue Transmission is intended to work if there is no HSM pulse If a E3 wrong HSM pulse is detected a Wireless Link will resync adapting to the ote HSM RFP and continue whereas Wireless Mux may stop e Independent Unit e Synchronization e N A for Master or Independent Units e Synchronized for Hub Site Clients e Not Synchronized for Hub Site Clients e External Pulses Table 10 6 External Pulse Status ODU is HSM and generates the Generating sync pulse Detected ODU is HSC and detects the sync pulse Not detected ODU is independent Generating and detected HSM but other HSM present Wireless Mux ODU is HSM but but detects a Wireless Link HSM signal that is not RFP E Not detected HSC but no HSM present HSC but HSM pulse doesn t fit the HSC as configured Occurs only for Wireless Mux which stops transmitting Generating and Improperly Detected Improperly detected gt To configure the Operational States of the Hub Site unit 1 Click the Enabled check box 2 Click the Configure button The Hub Site Configuration dialog box with the current status of the
329. ss Mux and Wireless Link Site Synchronization is supported with any mix of Wireless Mux and Wireless Link links Wireless Mux can be used to backhaul Wireless Link collocated links without mutual interference Monitored Hot Standby 1 1 The WBB Monitored Hot Standby MHS protects up to sixteen E1 T1 services with Wireless Mux and up to four E1 T1 services with Wireless Link It is designed to provide high reliability high capacity Point to Point Links The WBB MHS 15 e Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier class operators e Optimized for high capacity links operating in license free bands e A comprehensive solution providing protection against both equipment failure and loss of air interface by simple connectiv ity between a primary link and a secondary link Able to use a different band for maximum protection to the air interface The main features of the WBB MHS are e Cut over from the primary to the secondary link completely automatic e Cut over time no more than 50 ms e Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes avail able e Wireless Link can backup a Wireless Mux link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 5 Wireless Link Link Chapter 1 A major benefit of WBB MHS is that is can underpin an affordable Service Level Agreement structure by protecting part of the Wireless Mux trunks with Wireless Link MHS supports TDM services Ethernet services are carried by both l
330. sub band 5 administrative state wbbOduAirComboSubBandinstallationAllowed 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 a Reflects if the Multi band sub band allowes 6 installtion Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 12 Hub Site Synchronization GPS Longitude MIB Parameters Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 8 of 18 wbbOduAirComboFrequencyBandld 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 1 1 7 wbbOduAirComboNumberOfSubBands 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 2 wbbOduAirComboSwitchSubBand 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 53 3 wbbOduAirinternalMaxRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 54 Integer RO wbbOduAirCapacityDirection 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 55 wbbOduAirSpectrumAnalysisOperState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 1 wbbOduAirRxPowerAntennaA 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 3 wbbOduAirRxPowerAntennaB wbbOduAirNumberOfSpectrumChannels 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 56 4 wbbOduAirSpectrumChannelTable Appendix D Integer id Reflects the frequency band Id Represents the number of Multi band sub bands DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub band ID The get operation retrieves the current sub band ID Max Ethernet throughput of the site in Kpbs Capacity direction of the site Integer RW Spectrum Analysis operation state The configurable values are Spectrum Analysis Stop Start and Restart Not Supported value indicates that the feature is not supporte
331. tagged with one of the user defined VIDs You can define up to eight VIDs per port Other frames are not modified Un tagged traffic inside the User Network User Network A am 00 Untag selected VIDs en Tagged traffic x multiple VLANs Un tagged traffic inside the User Network This setting allows for mutial filtering of multiple ingrees tags not relevant at the egress end Un tagged traffic inside the User Networkdropping filtered packets typically for B Filtered VLAN IDs at egress IDU Tagged traffic ag multiple VLANs User Network A Un tagged traffic inside the User Networkdroppingfiltered packets typically for A Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 5 VLAN Availability Chapter 14 Table 14 2 Port settings Egress direction Continued With Provider tagging the system double tags egress frames towards the provider s network All frames are tagged QinQ with a VLAN ID which is configured by the service provider Provider VLAN ID a Se Provider s Transport lt Network User traffic Double Tagged multiple VLANS traffic Provider With this setting ingress frames which are not tagged with the configured Provider VLAN ID are tagging blocked filtered nar EA Traffic with y Provider VLANY Pravider s Transport Traffic with Provider s VLAN Traffic without Provider VLAN Note Each port can be configured independently to a tagging mode However only a single Pr
332. tate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 19 msi Radar detection state Valid values disabled 0 enabled 1 wbbOduAirAutoChannelSelectionState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 20 Integer Deprecated parameter Indicating Automatic Channel Selection availability at current channel bandwidth Valid values disabled 0 enabled TT 1 disabled wbbOduAirMinTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 22 Integer RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerTable N A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate in dBm wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerEntry N A Maximum Transmit power table entry INDEX wbbOduAirMaxT xPowerlndex wbbOduAirMaxTxPowerlndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 23 1 1 Integer RO Air interface rate index wbbOduAirMaxTxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 23 1 2 Integer RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm wbbOduAirChannelBandwidth 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 24 Channel bandwidth in KHz A change is effective after reset wbbOduAirChannelBWTable N A Channel Bandwidths table wbbOduAirChannelBWEntry N A Channel Bandwidth table entry INDEX wbbOduAirChannelBWIndex wbbOduAirChannelBWindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 1 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth index wbbOduAirChannelBWAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 25 1 2 Integer Channel Bandwidth availability product specific Options are Not supported supported with manual channel selection supported with Automatic Channel Selection wbbOduAirChannelsAdminState 1 3 6 1 4 1 296
333. ted Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem ETRE ser Min our day month yea sec min our day monthyea 3 Click the required parameter Their meanings are as follows mi Please keep in mind that what follows is per port A Transparent Transparent Recovered Loop Timed JT Loop Timed Recovered aft aT Internal Recovered ef Recovered Internal Figure 5 20 TDM Parameters Transparent Transparent The clock at Site A regenerates the clock from Site B and vice versa Loop time Recover The Site A port receive clock is used as the transmit clock for that port on both sides of the link Recover Loop time The Site B port receive clock is used as the transmit clock for that port on both sides of the link Internal Recover Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 17 Installation Chapter 5 The Site A port uses its internal oscillator to generate its transmit clock while the Site B port regenerates the clock received at the Site A port Recover Internal The Site B port uses its internal oscillator to generate its transmit clock while the Site A port regenerates the clock received at the Site B port 4 Click Finish to complete the wizard Step 7 Installation Summary and Exit Link Installation Wizard Completing the Link Installation Wizard You have successfully completed the Link Installation Wizard Services 3xE1 Ethernet Channel GHz 5 780 Chan
334. ted ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast Note A Wireless Link link operates in pairs of two ODUs with the same configura tion Both ODUs must be installed and the antennas aligned for maximum throughput Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 3 7 Mounting external antennas Chapter 3 Prior to connecting cables to the ODU the protective earth terminal screw of the ODU must be connected to an external protective ground conductor or to a grounded pole y e Only a qualified person using the proper safety equipment should Warning climb the antenna mast e Only qualified professional personnel should install or dismantle ODUs and masts gt To mount the ODU on a pole or a wall 1 Ensure that the ODU is properly grounded 2 Mount the ODU onto the pole or wall Ensure that the unit is oriented so that the cable connectors are at the bottom If they are on top water may penetrate into the unit causing damage It is possible to mount an ODU horizontally See Chapter 17 for details 3 Refer also to Chapter 17 for detailed ODU mounting kit contents and schematics e Do not tighten the ODU to its mounting brackets until the alignment process of the antenna is complete e Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the ODU or interference from man made obstacles mi A Mounting external antennas If you are using ODU with an integrated antenna skip to Mounting the Lightning Protection Devic
335. tenna path such as large buildings trees etc e Use a spectrum analyzer with suitable sensitivity to measure the sig nal at the distance between the sites e If nothing improves the receive power level check the overall link e Reduce the distance of the link move the equipment from one site closer to the other site where it is possible to actually see the anten nas with the naked eye e If you now get the expected receive signal level you can assume that the equipment is operational and the problem arises from interference between the sites Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 22 3 Chapter 23 BRS Installation Procedure BRS Link Activation In accordance with 2 5 GHz standard Wireless Link BRS links must be acti vated before use This is done at both ODUs independently before installa tion on site Both ODUs must be configured the same gt To Activate a BRS Link 1 Install Link Manager software as usual 2 When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta tus label red and showing Inactive The Link Configuration and Link installation buttons are disabled Figure 23 1 Inactive link state 3 Click Configuration Configure Location The Air Interface dialog box opens Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 23 1 BRS Link Activation H Site Configuration Location File Actions Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer On Systern Air Interface GJ Air Interface Gene
336. tes to be reset The Configuration dialog box opens 2 Choose Operations in the Configuration dialog box Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 22 IDU Detection Chapter 8 Site Configuration A File Actions Help bi M Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off x Installation Mode System Operations Q Herse Factory Settings Hub Site Sync re Management Inventory Security Restore Defaults Date amp Time IDU Detection Mode Le Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services XX External Alarms Operations Restore to Factory Default Settings will bring down the connection Site Configuration dialog box will be closed Enabled Figure 8 20 Site Configuration Reset to factory defaults 3 Click the Restore Defaults button A message box asking if you want to restore factory default settings appears re you sure you want to Restore Factory Default Settings The link may be unreachable after the process This process takes several seconds and is Followed by device reset Default IP Address 10 0 0 120 4 Click the check box if you want to keep the current IP address settings 5 Click Yes to continue Please Wait Site will be reset After a few moments the site will be reset and you will need to log on to it to re install the link IDU Detection An ODU always tries to detect the IDU to which it is connected IDU Detec tion is effected by an IDU responding to s
337. the five rows of Table 14 2 in the order row 1 2 4 5 3 The first two choices Transparent and Untag all require no further action Untag selected VIDs causes the eight VLAN ID fields to become avail able Ingress Mode Egress Mode Tag v v Fe VLAN ID VLAN ID 1 VLAN Priority 0 Figure 14 7 Untagging selected VIDs You may nominate up to eight VIDs for untagging beyond simple range checking there is no other validation Both Provider tagging and Provider tagging without filter enable the Provider parameters fields Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 9 VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service Configuration Chapter 14 Provider parameters are common fo all ports Provider parameters VLAN ID WLAN Priority 0 Figure 14 8 Provider parameters There is of course only one Provider VLAN ID It is most likely yours as the Provider Filtered VLAN IDs enables you to filter and block only frames tagged with one of the user defined VIDs You can define up to eight VIDs per port Other frames are not modified and are forwarded transparently When you are finished remember to click OK Figure 14 3 to save your entries Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 10 Chapter 15 Software Upgrade What is the Software Upgrade Utility The Link Manager provides a Software Upgrade Utility SWU to upgrade the software firmware of insta
338. the main menu applicable to the Wireless Link Notice that there are no Installation or Configuration wizards Such configuration as is necessary is carried out using a modified version of Site Configuration for Wireless Link Similarly the Tool bar is a subset of that applicable to the Wireless Link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 6 Configuring the GSU Chapter 11 Using Site Configuration for the GSU Site Configuration System Here is the opening window for Site Configuration Site Configuration Location File Help e Backup Restore Refresh System GPS Sync Unit a gt Description Wireless Link B Management Inventory R Situri ObjectiD 1 3 6 1 4 1 4458 20 4 1 2 D Date amp Time Q Advanced I Operations Contact Person Location Location Last Power Up 13 07 2010 17 21 20 Apply Figure 11 7 Site Configuration System It is similar to that of the Wireless Link Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 7 Configuring the GSU Site Configuration GPS Sync Unit This window is the main GSU configuration tool Site Configuration Location File Help id ig Backup Restore System gt GPS Sync Unit B Management Inventory Security D Date amp Time Le Advanced I Operations Refresh Radio Frame Pattern RFP Configuration Channel Bandwidth MHz 40 20 10 5 TDM Eth TDM Eth TDM Eth TDM Eth
339. the system 10 Connect Wireless Link AIND unit to the external antenna The opera tional link is shown in Figure 22 1 11 Configure Wireless Link NMS at both sites to operate at the pure chan nel frequency found in the RF survey Wireless Link is now ready for operation Configuring the Link 1 Run the Installation Wizard in the Link Managerr Software to set the con figuration of the link Configure the link in accordance with the parame ters calculated in the Link Budget Calculator 2 Wireless Link has a unique identification number the Link Name Each side of the link looks for its partner with the same Link Name Therefore both sides of the link must be configured with the same Link Name 3 The Wireless Link link is now ready for operation Evaluating the Link With the link operating at a pure channel as determined by the RF survey procedure the recommended performance threshold of an Wireless Link link is the following RSS 84 dBm minimum There are cases when there is no line of sight but still the link is of an acceptable quality Troubleshooting If the link is not within the acceptable limit as defined in the previous sec tion Evaluating the Link check the following e Verify that both antennas have the same polarization horizontal vertical e Check all the Wireless Link AIND cable connectors for faulty connec tions e Verify that there are no obstacles in the Fresnel zone of the an
340. therwise in KHz wbbOduAirNumberOfChannels 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 17 Integer RO Number of channels that can be used wbbOduAirChannels Table N A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection ACS wbbOduAirChannelsEntry N A ACS channels table entry INDEX wbbOduAirChannelsindex wbbOduAirChannelsindex 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 1 Integer RO Channel Index wbbOduAirChannelsFrequency 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 2 Integer RO Channel frequency in MHz wbbOduAirChannelsOperState 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 3 Integer RW Channel state Can be set by the user Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled A change is effective after link re synchronization Valid values disabled 0 enabled 1 wbbOduAirChannelsAvail 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 4 Integer Channel state Product specific and cannot be changed by the user Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and Al enabled Valid values disabled 0 enabled 1 wbbOduAirChannelsDefaultFreq 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 18 1 5 Integer Default channel s availability for all CBWs The valid values are forbidden 0 available 1 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 9 Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 4 of 18 MIB Parameters Appendix D Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 5 of 18 wbbOduAirDfsS
341. tibilityClear normal swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal externalAlarmInPort4Clear This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port 4 is cleared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description External Alarm 4 lt User Text gt Alarm Cleared The trap is sent if SW versions match Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible The trap is sent if SW versions match and link functionality is not restricted Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal The trap is sent if SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Software Versions compatible hssMultipleSourcesDisappearedClear 218 normal Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources disappeared Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS multiple sync pulse sources disappeared hssSyncToProperSourceAchievedClear 219 normal Indicates that synchronization to a proper Sync source was achieved Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description HSS sync pu
342. to 16msec for interference immunity confront Clock Recovery Resolution 0 05ppb Clock stability 20ppm as clock master crucial for wander requirements of cellular operators Table A 11 LAN Interface 10 100BaseT with Auto Negotiation IEEE 802 3u VLAN Support Transparent Bridge Layer 2 self learning of up to 2047 MAC addresses IEEE 802 1Q hub Bridge selectable mode Table A 12 Special Features Dry Contact Alarms 4 Inputs 4 Outputs Configurable by the Link Manager Monitored Hot Standby IDU C only Supported Table A 13 Mechanical Style 1U 19 Rack mounted Half 19 wall mounted or desktop Dimensions 43 6cm W x 21cm D x 4 4cm H 22cm W x 17cm D x 4 4cm H Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 A 4 PoE Device Indoor AC Appendix A Table A 14 Power Power Consumption With Wireless Link ODU With Wireless Mux ODU Alone Power Feeding Options Dual feeding 20 to 60VDC Single feeding 20 to 60VDC Table A 15 Environmental Operating Temperatures 0 C 50 C 32 F 122 F Table A 16 Safety FCC IC cTUVus UL 60950 1 CAN CSA C22 2 60950 1 ETSI IEC EN IEC 60950 1 Table A 17 EMC CFR47 Class B Part15 Subpart B ETSI EN 300 386 EN 301 489 4 EN 301 489 1 CAN CSA CEI IEC CISPR 22 Class B AS NZS CISPR 22 2006 Class B PoE Device Indoor AC Table A 18 Electrical porem CS Short circuit protection Protection Auto recovery Over voltage protection
343. ts ODU Grounding WBB Lightning Protection System uses a Shielded CAT 5e cable to intercon nect the Outdoor ODU and Indoor IDU units However this shielding does not provide a good lightning discharge path since it can not tolerate the high Lightning Current surges To provide an alternate Lightning Discharge path the ODU and antenna grounding posts should be connected to ground point by a 10 AWG short copper wire The device should be permanently connected to ground IDU Grounding The IDUS grounding post should be connected to the internal ground point using a grounding wire of at least 10 AWG The grounding wire should be connected to a grounding rod or the building grounding system The device should be permanently connected to ground Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding A Grounding Kit and Surge Arrestor Unit must be located near the ODU and properly grounded as illustrated in Figures 18 2 and 18 3 below ODU EBS Ground to tower Surge Arrestor Ground connections are within 30 cm ODU IDU CAT5e cable Surge Arrestor Ground Figure 18 2 Grounding a typical pole installation Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 18 3 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding OOU IOU CATSe cable Surge Arrestor Grounding cable Ground Figure 18 3
344. ts Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 30 03 2009 15 11 01 Connected to Location Internal IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure 16 6 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz operational Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 6 Wireless Link Broadband Wireless Transmission System USER MANUAL RELEASE 1 9 30 Part 4 Field Installation Topics Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation ODU Mounting Kit Contents Table 17 1 Bill of Materials ODU mounting kit M8 Nuts Figure 17 1 Large Clamp Figure 17 2 Small Clamp Figure 17 3 Arm Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 17 1 Mounting an ODU on a Pole Chapter 17 Mounting an ODU on a Pole ODU Je Installation Kit ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY 1 Clamp 1 2 Screw hex head M8x40 1 3 Washer flat M8 4 4 Washer spring M8 3 5 Nut M8 1 6 Clamp 1 7 Screw hex head M8x40 2 8 2 for greater size of mast for 1 3 4 dia mast pe Screw hex head M8x70 STEP I x2 Attach item I to the base mate knurled surfaces using Items 2 3 4 5 as shown loot 1 2 3 4 5 Use tightening torque of 24 N m xe FOR MAST 1 3 4 3 Tighten the antenna to the mast using item 6 screws and washers items 7 3 4 as shown Use tightening torque of 14 N m FOR MAST 1 1 3 4 xe xe D 552 O 0006 Figure 17 4 Mounting on a pole Wireless Link User Manual Relea
345. tus i a ee ee eae Np B Direct connection 192 168 1 101 2 5 00 b2630 Jun 27 2010 Co G ir connection 192 168 1 102 B 2 5 00_b2630_Jun 27 2010 5 TPSFBTT Direct connection 192 1682 101 A 1 930 b1825 90 Remove from list Remove grid Configure Communities Figure 15 5 Software Upgrade site options 5 To back up your existing system check Backup device software check box Then click the button for a standard file dialog The default location is the My Documents directory on the managing com puter or the last backup directory you used The backup here is the same as that in page 8 32 and serves the same purpose It provides a fallback if the upgrade proves problematic I 3 6 In addition to the previous step you may opt to perform a delayed upgrade Check the Delayed Upgrade box and enter the date and time for the delayed upgrade 7 The radio buttons on the rigft determines how your sites should bereset Bear in mind that on the one hand a reset involves a service interrup tion but on the other hand the software upgrade will not become effec tive until after the reset is carried out 8 Click Start Upgrade to commence the process For an immediate upgrade you will be ableto observe the upgrade progress from the green progress bars e Software Upgrade Tool File Actions Help 2 gt ma X a Start Upgrade Stop Upgrade Add Site Clear All Upg
346. twork address prior to physical installation The procedure is quite straight forward and set out in 19 at Each ODU requires a static IP address since part of the link definition is the IP address pair of both ODUs Network Managers should ensure that these addresses are outside of the automatic allocation ranges used by their ote network DHCP server gt To start the Link Manager 1 Connect the managing computer to one of the two LAN ports as shown in Figure 4 1 below Figure 4 1 LAN ports on the front panel of the IDU C lt i For IDU E users The LAN ports are located on the rear panel on the unit ote If you are not using a direct connection as above ensure that you have IDU to managing computer connectivity e g through a LAN 2 Check that you have connectivity to the ODU You can do this by opening up a command line session Start Run and then type cmd At the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 120 You should see something like this Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 2 The Link Manager log on Concept Chapter 4 ct CAWINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows AP Version 5 1 2600 LC Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings verasping 10 0 0 120 Pinging 10 0 0 120 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 0 0 120 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 63 Reply from 10 0 0 120 bytes 32 time 3ms TTL 63 Reply from 160 868 808 120 hytes 32 time 3ms TTL 63 Reply from 10 0 0 120 bytes
347. uAirHssNumsSatellites 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 15 DisplayString Hub Site Synchronization GPS Number of 0 satellites wbbOduAirHssAltitude 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 16 DisplayString al Hub Site Synchronization GPS Altitude 0 wbbOduAirHssRfpPhase 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 40 17 Hub Site Synchronization GPS RFP phase 0 wbbOduAirLockRemote 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 41 Integer RW This parameter enables locking the link with a specific ODU The following values can be set Unlock default The ODU is not locked on a specific remote ODU Unlock can only be performed when the link is not connected Lock The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU Lock can only be performed when the link is active wbbOduAirAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 42 Integer RW Current Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution User defined value for external antenna Legal range MinAntennaGain lt AntennaGain lt MaxAntennaGain wbbOduAirFeederLoss 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 43 Integer RW Current Feeder Loss in 0 1 dBm resolution User defined value for external antenna wbbOduAirMaxAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 44 Integer Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution wbbOduAirMinAntennaGain 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 45 ie Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0 1 dBi resolution wbbOduAirMaxEIRP 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 5 46 Integer Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0 1 dBm resolution wbbOduAirAntennaGainConfigSupport 1 3 6 1
348. ubnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol ifInNUcastPkts 136121 221123 Counter The number of non unicast i e subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol ifinErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 x Counter The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 x Counter The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters ifOutUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 X Counter The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 4 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Appendix D Table D 1 Supported RFC 1213 Variables Sheet 2 of 2 ifOutNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 18 x Counter The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a non unicast i e a subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent a x is the interface ID Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 MIB Parameters Appendix D MIB Parameters Table D 2 Private MIB Parameters Sheet 1 of 18 wbbOduAdmProductT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 1 1 1 DisplayString RO ODU configuration description wbbOduAdmHwRev 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612
349. uesevanvansaeeeeueeennanes 15 3 FIGURE 15 5 SOFTWARE UPGRADE SITE OPTIONS cccecsecceccacseceeueevanvanvanvansaeeeeaneeenants 15 4 FIGURE 15 6 SOFTWARE UPGRADE IN PROGRESS NOTE THE STOP BUTTON cceeceereeeeers 15 4 FIGURE 15 7 SOFTWARE UPGRADE COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY anuununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 15 5 FIGURE 16 1 ACTIVATING AN ODU INACTIVE LINK anaunanvanennennennennennnnennnnnennennennennnne 16 2 FIGURE 16 2 AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX avanennvnnvnnvnnnnnnnennennenennnnnnnnennnnnennvnnnnennnnennn 16 2 FIGURE 16 3 THE LOCAL ODU AFTER ACTIVATION PROBING anunnanvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 16 3 FIGURE 16 4 BOTH SITES ACTIVATED AND AWAITING CONFIGURATION ccsecseceacseveeeeeneees 16 4 FIGURE 16 5 CHANNEL SELECT DIALOG BOX ACS PERMANENTLY ENABLED suisses 16 5 FIGURE 16 6 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHZ OPERATIONAL ecececveveveeceveveeeevevavseeevavensnvavananes 16 6 FIGURE 17 4 MOUNTING ON A POLE susnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennenn 17 2 FIGURE 17 5 MOUNTING ON A WALL 222 52 0 sansne unes lan one comes tescesctesia inc sos 17 3 FIGURE 17 6 MOUNTED ODUS WITH CORRECT WATER NOSE anunnnnnnnnnnnennenennennenennnnenn 17 4 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 xvii FIGURE 17 7 INCORRECTLY MOUNTED ODU NO WATER NOSE cceceececeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeees 17 4 FIGURE 18 1 GROUNDING ANTENNA CABLES eceeceeceeeeeeaccacsaeeeeseeseusevanvansaesaeuenannanes 18 2 FIGURE 18 2 GROUNDING A TYPICAL POLE INSTALLATIO
350. us eliminating mutual interference see Chapter 11 GPS Antenna GSU GPS based Site Ga o Pr Synchronization T RF Cable pe CAT 5e Cable HSS Cable HSS Unit PoE device Figure 1 20 General GSU configuration Antennas An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig nal in the form of RF power is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa The antenna gain and transmitting power may be limited by country regula tions The Wireless Link may be operated with an integrated antenna that is part of the ODU unit or with external antennas connected to the ODU via N type connectors All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce RF losses The required antenna impedance is 50Q The 5 x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 330 mm 1ft flat panel antenna with a gain of 22dBi 5 x GHz 17dBi 4 9 GHz and 9 beam width The 2 x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 330 mm Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 1 13 Antennas Chapter 1 1ft flat panel antenna with a gan of 16dBi and 20 beam width Theradio and the antenna are housed in a weatherproof case as a single unit ODU with integrated antenna w Figure 1 21 ODU with integrated antenna side and front views Various external antennas are available for the Wireless Link operating fre quencies Flat Panel Antennas The Flat Panel antenna shown in Figure 1 22 is available as an integ
351. vant WBB radio products What you see on your running Link Manager may differ in some details from the ote screen captures used to illustrate this chapter FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation gt To Activate a FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link 1 Install Link Manager software as usual 2 Connect the PC to the IDU ODU pair to be used as the local site Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 16 1 FCC IC 5 4 5 3 GHz Link Activation Chapter 16 3 Run the Link Manager and log in as Installer You will see the following window Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Installer BK File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help w X Link Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site Configuration Get Diagnostics Kk Link Link Link ID Location Radio Interface Services None Frequency GHz 5 580 RSS dem Channel BW MHz Rate Mbps Ethernet Service Rx Tx R ate Units le Mbps FN Fps OE Ethernet Throughput Mbps 4 Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 Activation Required IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Destination Not Responding Link State Inactive Events Log Number Date amp Time Message Trap Source IP Address 000001 30 03 2009 14 47 32 Connected to Location Internal amp Connection Available Connection Mode Network IP Address 192 168 2 101 Figure 16 1 Activating an ODU Inactive link When the Manager Mai
352. vnavnavnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennrnnennnnnnnnnnenne 10 16 FIGURE 11 1 GSU SCENARIO INDEPENDENT DISTRIBUTED SITES cceccecceceeneeeeuveneenras 11 2 FIGURE 11 2 GSU SCENARIO COMMUNICATING DISTRIBUTED SITES cssavecsavenvaveneanears 11 2 FIGURE 11 3 PHASE SHIFTED TRANSMISSION PHASE SHIFT IS 1 2 THE RFD 11 3 FIGURE 11 4 MAKE THE GSUS THE FIRST TWO COLLOCATED UNITS suunnunnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennenn 11 4 FIGURE 11 5 GENERAL GSU CONFIGURATION cccceceeceecsaccaveaeeceeeuceeenvanvaneaueneeneentanes 11 5 FIGURE 11 6 GSU MAIN WIDOW AT STARTUP avunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennennnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnne 11 6 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 XVI FIGURE 11 7 SITE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM uunvrunnnnunnennnnrnnnennnnevnnnennnervnnennnnevnnennune 11 7 FIGURE 11 8 SITE CONFIGURATION GPS SYNC UNIT uununnannnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnne 11 8 FIGURE 11 9 SITE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT svunnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnennnnnennennennnnnnnennnnnenn 11 9 FIGURE 11 10 SITE CONFIGURATION INVENTORY ccecceceececeeeceeeeeeeeaeeaneaneaeeareuneueas 11 10 FIGURE 11 11 SITE CONFIGURATION SECURITY avunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnne 11 10 FIGURE 11 12 SETTING THE DATE AND TIME FOR TRAP REPORTING usecsecseceeceeeeeveeveneas 11 11 FIGURE 11 13 SITE CONFIGURATION OPERATIONS suunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnne 11 11 FIGURE 11 14 SITE CONFIGURATION OPERATIONS suuunnnnnnnnnennennnnennennennennennennnnnnnnnne 11 12 FIGURE 12 1 WB
353. w MHz 20 Rate Mbps Adaptive Status Link Active For Link status possibilities and color codes see Table 9 2 The two lower left panels show basic link site details Site IP Address 192 168 2 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 166 2 107 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 The three fields for each site are user definable see page 8 7 f The Monitor pane The monitor pane is the main source of real time information about link performance at both link sites It includes the following panes top to bot tom e Radio Interface Received Signal Strength RSS in dBm Location B Radio Interface RSS dem e Ethernet Service Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps 8 Fos eo Ethernet Throughput Mbps 0 NNN Rx Rate 25 6 Tx Rate 0 5 Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 5 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 e Estimated Ethernet Throughput The numbers are the current calculated throughputs at each site The colored bars with numbers indicate the maximum possible throughput having regard for air conditions e Rxand Tx Rates The Rx and Tx rates are the receive and transmit rates on the LAN side of each ODU not the air side For a balanced link the Rx and Tx rates at the LAN side of Site A will match the Tx and Rx rates at the LAN side of Site B respectively In all cases The LAN side Rx rate shown
354. ware Upgrade 15 1 SSID 22 3 T TDM Services Clock configuration 5 16 Evaluation 5 15 in Link Budget calculation 21 1 Jitter Buffer 5 13 Loopbacks 9 3 modulation rate 5 13 over internet with SFP C 1 selection 5 10 TDD in MIB D 3 Telnet commands 8 26 Throughput display 6 6 Trap message 9 16 Technical Specifications Air Interface general A 1 Configuration A 1 EMC AD AS AG A 7 A 8 Environmental A 3 A 5 Power A 3 A 3 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 5 Radio A 1 Safety A 3 A 5 Telnet configuration 8 25 TDM 8 26 Time Division Duplex 10 8 Trap messages 9 3 Trunk Ports pinout B 3 typical installation 3 6 U User equipment connecting 5 7 V VLAN configuration 14 6 Port Functionality 14 2 QinQ 14 2 tagging 14 1 terminology 14 1 Index 5 Release1 9 30 VLAN for Ethernet services 1 1 8 18 VLAN for Ethernet services ff 13 1 14 1 W Wiring Specifications B 1 Alarm Connector IDU C B 3 Connectors User Port B 2 LAN Ports B 2 ODU IDU Cable B 1 Ports LAN B 2 User Port Connectors B 2 Wireless Link User Manual Release1 9 30 Index 6 IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY GE MDS products are designed for long life and trouble free operation However this equipment as with all electronic equipment may have an occasional component failure The following information will assist you in the event that servicing becomes necessary TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Technical assistance for GE MDS products is available from our Technical Support Departm
355. ween the ODU and the NTP Server this port must be opened ge Note It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and time gt To set the date and time 1 Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used 2 Test it for connectivity using the command Windows XP for example w32tm stripchart computer 216 218 192 202 You should get a continuous response of times each a few seconds apart 3 Choose a site to configure The Configuration dialog box opens 4 Choose Date amp Time Site Configuration A File Actions Help Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Date amp Time Q ir Interface 23 Hub Site Sync B Management Inventory Security Date amp Time Offset Minutes 00 00 HH mm NTP Server Le Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services XX External Alarms Date amp Time 01 09 2005 181257 I Operations Figure 8 11 Date and Time Configuration 5 If entering an IP address for the NTP Server click Clear and then enter the new address 6 Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT 7 To manually set the date and time click Change and edit the new values 1 Greenwich Mean Time Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 14 Ethernet Properties Chapter 8 Change Date amp Time Site A Date amp Time fie 09 2005 01 55 51 C Use Managing Computer Time Figure 8 12 Ch
356. which is its description 1 Description VLAN Mode is active Non VLAN traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes normal Indicates that the ODU is in Spectrum Analysis mode Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Spectrum analysis in progress normal 00 Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description TDM Service Alarm major 1 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Ethernet Service is closed 102 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description A valid IDU could not be detected at s Please check your configuration s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link 103 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Encryption Status Failed No Services are available Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link Password Contains a single parameter which is its description 1 Description Failed to change the Link Password at on s s Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link 104 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port 1 Contains a single parameter which is its d
357. will be the same as the air side Tx rate for each individual ODU Actual Ethernet traffic received and transmitted rates per site is in Mbps of Fps selectable in the panel title bar e TDM Services IDU C and new style IDU E TOM Service Counters Display Mode Accumulative Current EE Error Blocks amam E1 Forts e The title bar enables you to switch between Accumulative and Current view e Immediately below the title bar is displayed the Estimated Time Between Errors It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool bar e Error block count is shown immediately above the active TDM channels display e The color of the TDM ports reflects their current status e Green p rational e Red Error LOS for loss of signal and AIS for Alarm Indi cation Signal e Yellow Loopback e Gray ndctive e TDM Services IDU E R TOM Service Estimated Time Between Errors sse mn LE ist Trunk Mor mal Mor mal Errors Blocks 1 1 2nd Trunk Normal Normal Errors Blocks 1 1 e For each Trunk the line status and Error block count is dis played It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool bar The line status is color coded and may be one of e Green oMNnal Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 6 6 Elements of the Link Manager Main Window Chapter 6 e Red Error LOS for loss of signal and AIS for Alarm Indi cation Signal e Yellow loopback e Frequency box It shows th
358. will introduce a loop Caution into your network Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 13 10 Chapter 14 VLAN Functionality with Wireless Link VLAN Tagging Overview VLAN Terminology Both the technical literature and the Link Manager use the terms VLAN ID and VID interchangeably to denote a VLAN identification number VLAN Background Information on the WEB The standards defining VLAN Tagging are IEEE_802 1Q and extensions For general background about VLAN see http en wikipedia org wiki IEEE 802 1Q Background information about Double Tagging also known as QinQ may be found here http en wikipedia org wiki 802 1QinQ VLAN Tagging VLAN tagging enables multiple bridged networks to transparently share the same physical network link without leakage of information between net works Network A traffic is tagged with VLAN A ug 205 Network B traffic is IDU tagged with VLAN B bte ais Untagged traffic Untagged traffic J Untagged traffic Figure 14 1 Two network using the same link with tagging Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 14 1 QinQ Double Tagging for Service Providers Chapter 14 IEEE 802 1Q is used as the encapsulation protocol to implement this mech anism over Ethernet networks QinQ Double Tagging for Service Providers QinQ is useful for Service Providers allowing them to use VLANs internally in their transport network while mixing Ethernet traff
359. word and the new password E3 A valid log on password must contain at least five characters excluding SPACE TAB and any of gt ote 3 Click OK to confirm First steps For what follows it is assumed that you have set the IP addresses of both ODUSs For the purposes of illustration we will use the following IP addresses n Our managing computer has its NIC set to IP address 192 168 2 100 The E3 log on ODU is set to IP address 192 168 2 101 and the over the air ODU is ote set to 192 168 2 102 The Subnet Mask for both sites is 255 255 255 0 and the Default Gateway is left unset We will maintain this arrangement throughout the remainder of this manual Other defaults are shown in Table 4 4 At this point the main window of the Link Manager should be displayed Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 4 8 First steps Chapter 4 Link Manager 192 168 2 101 Operator File Configuration Tools Maintenance Help x i Gr 9 Es Link Configuration Link Installation Site Location Site Location Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log Off Exit Help F1 he Link Link Link ID Services None Frequency GHz 5 780 RSS dBm Band 5 740 5 835 GHz FCC IC Channel BW MHz 20 Rate Mbps 6 Status Installation Required Location Location Location Radio Interface Ethernet Service Rx Tx Rate Units Mbps Fps Estimated Throughput Mbps 22 Site Location IP Address 192 168 2 101
360. x Mounting Kit e 1x GPS Antenna e 1x GPS Antenna Mounting Kit e 1x RF Cable 1 5m e CD GSU Installation Overview The GSU uses the same container and cabling as a Wireless Link unit Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 11 4 Preparing the GSU for Use Chapter 11 GPS Antenna GSU GPS based Site EL o gt Synchronization FT RF Cable J ve CAT 5e Cable HSS Cable HSS Unit PoE device NC 2 NEC J DYNE SYNC O war HA edd her ba Vet Parta PER te os eed a y s Hen Darro ato ual s Ca T FTTFF Figure 11 5 General GSU configuration In that respect all of the considerations of 3 17 and 18 apply to the GSU It may be configured using the regular Link Manager or Telnet Preparing the GSU for Use Use the method of 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address to change the IP address from the default 10 0 0 120 In the example screen captures below we use 192 168 222 20 with Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Mounting the GSU Mount the GSU and antenna Ensure that its ODU port connected to its PoE device and the HSS cable is connected to the HSS unit as shown The exter nal LAN port of the PoE device is connected to the managing computer If you are accessing the GSU through a netvork it is essential that you use the IP preloading method The default IP address may be inaccessible and you may not use the Local Connection method over a network Configuring the
361. y Not Applicable if the service is available The reasons for TDM Service unavailability The available throughput isn t sufficient for Service demands The IDU HW doesn t support the service Link Password mismatch was detected The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services A Software versions mismatch was detected A Symetric TDD Mode Is Obligated wbblduSrvEthActive 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 12 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state wbblduSrvEthAvailable 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 13 ee Represents the Ethernet service availability state wbblduSrvEthThroughput 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 14 ms laid Current available Ethernet service throughput in bps Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 D 20 MIB Parameters Appendix D mo mn wbblduSrvEthMaxinfoRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 15 Integer RW Holds the maximum bandwidth kbps to be allocated for Ethernet service Value of zero means that Ethernet service works as best effort The maximum value is product specific Refer to the user manual wbblduSrvAvailable TrunksT1 1 3 6 1 4 1 29612 1000 2 2 16 Integer bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened under T1 configuration The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration the air rate and the installation range wbblduEthernetlfTabe o IDU Ethernet Interface table Er IDU Ethernet Interface table entry INDEX wbblduEthernetlflndex w
362. y or OK Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 7 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID Chapter 8 Site Configuration File Actions Help Backup Restore 7 Refresh Buzzer Off i Installation Mode System Management Air Interface Network Parameters VLAN Protocol 22 Hub Site Sync Enabled BD Management Inventory Security D Date amp Time e Advanced sk Ethernet E TDM Services 2 External Alarms VLAN ID VLAN Priority I Operations Figure 8 5 Configuring management traffic VLAN Settings Lost or forgotten VLAN ID If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the ODU then reset the relevant ODU During the first two minutes of connection the ODU uses management packets both with and without VLAN You may use this period to reconfigure the VLAN ID and priority Enable Disable Telnet Access For a link managed in a network direct access to an ODU using Telnet is considered to be a security breach Telnet access may be enabled or dis abled by clicking the Protocol tab and enabling disabling Telnet access using the Telnet check box Management Network Parameters VLAN Protocol NM Telnet Figure 8 6 Enable Disable Telnet Access Displaying the Inventory gt To view the inventory data 1 Choose a site from the main menu Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 8 Security Features The Configurati
363. ynchronized In such a case an alarm is raised by the Link Manager gt To enable Link Lock 1 Click Site A on the main tool bar 2 Choose the Security tab The following window is displayed Site Configuration A File Actions Help a Y Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off Installation Mode System Air Interface Community 3 29 Hub Site Sync SNMP Communities rey Management Inventory Link Password Link Password Value Date amp Time Link Lock Advanced Q Advance amp C Lock the Link sk Ethernet fa TDM Services XX External Alarms I Operations 3 Click the Link Lock check box and then OK You are asked to confirm the lock Site Configuration A fou are about to change ODU parameters S The local ODU can be synchronized exclusively to the current remote ODU Do vou wish to continue 4 Click the Yes button and you are returned to the main window of the Link Manager Observe that a link icon is now displayed in the status bar on the bottom right of the Link Manager window Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 8 12 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8 KN Encrypted Link The link to the remote unit is now locked If you repeat steps 1 and 2 above the Security screen will look like this Site Configuration File Actions Help Backup Restore Refresh Buzzer Off x Installation Mode System Q ir Interface ie 22 Hub Site Sync SNMP Communitie
364. ys the current status of each side of the link See 10 for instructions about installing and configuring col located links If you do not require HSS click Next Step 5 Services The Services dialog appears Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 9 Installation Chapter 5 Link Installation Wizard Services Select the Services and Rate Service TOM Jitter Buffer Hot Standby Ring Services Ethernet Rate Mbps Adaptive w Distance a km IO Miles Evaluate IDU A B Praduct 7 CJ 16 BODO 7 C 15 BOODO HW Version 3 3 SW Version 1 9 30 b3700 May 132010 1 9 30 b3700 May 13 2010 Monitor Link Radio Interface RSS dem Figure 5 10 Services and Rates TDM Services selection gt To select services 1 Click the Configure button The TDM services dialog is displayed Services Configuration OE TOM Parts 1 3 ee h h E DUR CL SUR Maximum Available Services Ethernet On Select o El Select Maximum Clear l Selected 0 Remaining O a 2 Using the TDM Type radio buttons choose E1 or T1 You are now able to select the required service ports Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 5 10 Installation Chapter 5 Services Configuration basmam Available Services 4xE1 Ethernet Select Select Maximum Clear All Selected O Remaining 4 Figure 5 11 TDM service port selection 3 Use the spin button to choose consecutive service po
365. ystem automatically switches to the secon dary link In addition improved robustness and frequency planning flexibility is achieved as the primary and secondary air interfaces can operate in the same frequency band or in different frequency bands Automatic Channel Selection ACS can be configured for each link to add additional robustness Wireless Link User Manual Release 1 9 30 12 2 Purpose of this Chapter Chapter 12 The primary and secondary links are synchronized using Hub Site Synchro nization HSS It is recommended that both sites be installed with HSS cables If HSS fails at one site it can be operated from the other site by remote configuration Purpose of this Chapter This chapter is an installation and maintenance guide for WBB MHS It applies to all WBB radio products able to support the Monitored Hot Standby operational mode Who Should Read this This chapter is intended for persons responsible for the installation and maintenance of WBB MHS To use it you need to know how to e Install a Wireless Link radio link e Install a Wireless Mux radio link e Use the Link Manager software WBB MHS Kit Contents e One Y Connection Patch Panel e One MHS cable Figure 12 2 WBB Y Connection Patch Panel Installing aWBB MHS _ The following procedure is substantially generic to all WBB radio products Differences between Wireless Link and Wireless Mux class products will be stated explicitly What you see

MDS Intrepid

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents